Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

11th Computer Applications Guide Introduction to Computers Text Book Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 1.
Which is the opening screen of OpenOffice?
a) Star desktop
b) Star center
c) Star screen
d) Star window
Answer:
b) Star center

Question 2.
Which option allows you to assign text, tables, graphics and other items to a key or key combination?
a) Autoformat
b) Automatic
c) Auto text
d) Autographies
Answer:
c) Auto text

Question 3.
Which menu contains the Numbering option?
a) File
b) Edit
c) Tools
d) Format
Answer:
d) Format

Question 4.
Which is displayed at the top most part of the window?
a) Menu bar
b) Tool bar
c) Title bar
d) Format bar
Answer:
c) Title bar

Question 5.
Which is changing the default appearance of the text called?
a) Text formatting
b) Page formatting
c) Special formatting
d) Paragraph formatting
Answer:
a) Text formatting

Question 6.
The Find & Replace option is available in which menu?
a) File
b) Edit
c) Format
d) Tools
Answer:
b) Edit

Question 7.
Which button selects all instances of the search text in the document?
a) Find
b) Find All
c) Replace
d) Replace All
Answer:
b) Find All

Question 8.
What is the shortcut key to go to the start of the document?
a) Ctrl + Home
b) Ctrl + End
c) Home
d) End
Answer:
a) Ctrl + Home

Question 9.
What is the shortcut key for finding and replacing text in a document?
a) Ctrl + F
b) Ctrl + F4
c) Ctrl + F5
d) Ctrl + F7
Answer:
a) Ctrl + F

Question 10.
What is the short cut key for Undo?
a) Ctrl +E
b) Ctrl + U
c) Ctrl + Z
d) Ctrl + n
Answer:
c) Ctrl + Z

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
How do you insert pictures in to your document?
Answer:
To insert an image/picture from a file, the steps are as follows:

  1. Place the insertion pointer where you want the image to appear
  2. Select Insert → Picture From file
  3. The insert picture dialog box appears where the picture gallery opens from which the desired picture can be selected.
  4. If the picture is not in the gallery, then browse the pictures from the folder, choose the desired one and
  5. Click on the Open button
  6. The selected picture is inserted into the document.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 2.
What are the different packages in OpenOffice writer?
Answer:
OpenOffice is a productive office suite with a collection of different software packages such as –

  1. OpenOffice Writer – Word Processor to create text documents
  2. OpenOffice Calc – Spreadsheet to create worksheets
  3. OpenOffice Base – Database
  4. OpenOffice Impress – Presentation software
  5. OpenOffice Draw – Drawing Software
  6. OpenOffice Formula – Create formula and equations

Question 3.
What is auto text in writer?
Answer:
Auto Text allows you to assign text, tables, graphics and other items to a key or key combination. For example, rather than typing “TamilNadu” every time you use that phrase, you might just type “tn” and press F3.

Question 4.
How do you merge ceils in a table?
Answer:
To merge a group of cells:

  1. Select the cells to merge.
  2. Right click and choose Cell → Merge or choose Table → Merge Cells from the menu bar.

Question 5.
State the difference between proprietary software and open source software?
Answer:
Proprietary Software:

  • It is closed source software that means the company who developed the software owns it and others can not duplicate or distribute it without permission.
  • User have to pay and use.
  • Example : Windows, Adobe Photoshop.

Open Source Software:

  • It provides source code for the users and the user can modify if they want according to their requirement.
  • It is a software which is free to use.
  • Example : Linux, Open office.

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is the difference between moving and copying text?
Answer:
Copy Text:

  • Copy text will leave the source as it is and place a copy in the destination.
  • After copy, the text available in both source and destination locations.

Move Text:

  • Move text will shift the source to the destination i.e., the text will change its position.
  • After move, the text available in destination location alone.

Question 2.
What are the different types of orientation?
Answer:
Page orientation refers to how the document will be displayed on screen and printed. There are two different orientations:

Landscape : The width of the document is more than the height. This is best suited for displaying professional photos, invitations, albums, tables etc.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 1
Portrait : This is the most common and default orientation. Here, the height of the document is more than the width. Normally books, newspapers will be displayed in this format.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 2

Question 3.
How do you insert rows and columns?
Answer:
To insert rows or columns inside a table:
1. Place the insertion pointer in the row or in the column where you would like to add new rows or columns and right-click.

2. Choose Row → Insert – to insert a row or Column → Insert – to insert a column. A dialog box will appear, from which we can select the number of rows or columns to insert. We can also set the position of the new rows or columns to Before or After as shown in the following Figure.

3. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 3

Question 4.
What are the different ways to save a document?
Answer:
Saving the Document:
The first time the document is saved, OpenOffice Writer prompts for a name. Naming the file enables the user to find and open that file again. One can select the drive and folder where the file will be stored. To save a document for a first time, the following steps are used:

  • Click File → Save → (or) File Save As (or) press Ctrl + S
  • The “Save As” dialog box appears
  • Select location to store your document. The default location to store all documents is “Documents” folder in Windows.
  • Type your document name in the File Name box.
  • All documents in OpenOffice writer will be stored with .odt extension.
  • Finally, Click “Save” button.
  • Once the file is saved, our document name will be displayed on the title bar.

Save as Microsoft Word document or PDF : We can store our OpenOffice document as Microsoft Word document or pdf. To do so, select file type from Save as type list box. This list box shows variety of formats to be saved.

Saving with password : In OpenOffice writer, a document can be protected with a password. We can set a password to protect your document while saving a file. To save a file with password, click on “Save with Password” check box and then click “Save” button. Immediately it shows “Set Password” dialog box as given in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 4
In this dialog box, Enter a password in “Enter Password to open” text box and retype the same password in “Confirm Password” box for confirmation. Finally click “OK” button.

Save document as Read only:
We can save the document as read only i.e. editing is not possible by using More Option.

Question 5.
Write the steps to change the line spacing of text.
Answer:
Line spacing determines the amount of vertical space between lines of text in a paragraph. By default, the lines are single-spaced, that is the spacing accommodates the largest font in that line, plus a small amount of extra space.

Method – 1
Select the line or word or phrase, Right-click Line spacing, then select the required type as single, 1.5 or double

Method – 2

  • Select the entire document by Edit → Select All
  • Format → Paragraph
  • The paragraph dialog box appears, click Indents & Spacing tab.
  • In the line spacing option, select the type and click OK button.

Part – IV

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
What are the different methods to change margin in writer?
Answer:
Changing or setting page margins in Open office writer can be done in two ways:

  • Using the Rulers – quick and easy, but does not have precise values.
  • Using the Page Style dialog box – can specify precise values for the margins.

Changing page margins – using Ruler:

  • The shaded sections of the rulers are the margins.
  • Hold the mouse pointer over the line between the gray and white sections.
  • The mouse pointer turns into a double¬headed arrow.
  • Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to move the margin and release it at the required point.
  • The new margin is set.

Changing Margins using the Page Style dialog box

  • Right-click anywhere on the page and select Page from the popup menu and select page tab of page style dialog box.
  • In the Margins boxes, specify the values for left , right, top and bottom margins.
  • Click on ok button.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 2.
What are Header and Footer? How do you Insert page numbers?
Answer:
The header is a section of the document that appears in the top margin, which displays the title or chapter name, author name of a document. The footer is a section of the document that appears in the bottom margin of the page which displays the page number, date, time etc. which gets displayed on ail the pages automatically.

Inserting Header and Footer

  • Select Insert → Header → Default from the main menu.
  • The header text area is separated from the normal text area.
  • In the header area, Enter the text that is to be repeated in all pages or Select Insert → Fields → Title.

Similarly to insert a Footer, the steps are as given below:

  • Select Insert → Footer → Default from the main menu.
  • Place the insertion pointer in the footer part of the page.
  • Select Insert Fields → Date to insert date in all the page

Once the headers and footers are given in the first page, the same text appears in all the pages.

Inserting and Formatting page numbers – Once the Header / Footer area is enabled, the page numbers can be inserted by performing the following steps:

  • position the insertion pointer where you want to insert the page number
  • choose Insert → Fields Page Number
  • The page number appears with a gray background.

Normally, the page numbers appear as 1, 2, 3, …., To change the numbering style, the following sequence of steps can be performed:

  • Position the cursor where the page number has to appear.
  • Select Format Page, which will bring the page style dialog box.
  • Select Page Tab.
  • In the Layout settings, select the format drop down combo box.
  • Select the desired style and click OK button.

Question 3.
Write the steps to Find and Replace a word with another word in Open Office writer?
Answer:
OpenOffice Writer has a Find and Replace feature that helps to locate for a text inside a document and replace it with another word. In addition to finding and replacing words and phrases, we can also use wildcards and regular expressions to perform advanced search. To search a word:
1. Click Edit → Find & Replace (or) Ctrl + F

2. The Find & Replace dialog box appears as shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 5
Steps to And & replace a text:
1. Type the text you want to find in the Search for box
For Example: To search a word “Bombay” in a document and replace with “Mumbai”, enter the word “Bombay” in the Search for box.

2. To replace the text with different text, type the new text in the Replace with box Enter the word “Mumbai” in the Replace with box and Click Find button , to start the search , the found word is highlighted and the first occurrence of “Bombay” is highlighted.

3. To replace text, click Replace button.
The highlighted word is replaced with the word given in the replace with box.

4. Click Find All, Writer selects all instances of the search text in the document.
All occurrences of Bombay are highlighted.

5. Click Replace AH button, Writer replaces all matches.
This will replace all occurrences of “Bombay” with “Mumbai”.

6. Enable Match case to perform the search case sensitively so that uppercase and lower cases are distinguished separately.

7. Enable Whole Words only to make the search more specific to words used separately alone.

Question 4.
Explain Page formatting in writer.
Answer:
The most important thing in a word processor is how to format the page with elements such as margins, numbering, page layout, headers and footers. Formatting our pages makes them look more attractive and makes them easier to read.

Setting the Page Size and Margins – Changing Page Size:
The default page size in writer is 8.5 x 11″, the same as that of a standard A4 printing paper. However, for different types of documents, you may need to change the page size.

Changing page margins:
Page margins are the white space around the top, bottom, left, and right of your document. Margins . let Writer know where to start placing the text at the top of a document, when to move on to the next page at the bottom, where to start typing text on the left side, and where to stop and move to the next line on the right.

Changing or setting page margins in Open office writer can be done in two ways:

  • Using the Rulers – quick and easy, but does not have precise values.
  • Using the Page Style dialog box – can specify precise values for the margins.

Page Orientation:
Page orientation refers to how the document will be displayed on screen and printed. There are two different orientations:

Landscape :
The width of the document is more than the height. This is best suited for displaying professional photos, invitations, albums, tables etc.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 6

Portrait:
This is the most common and default orientation. Here, the height of the document is more than the width. Normally books, newspapers will be displayed in this format.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 7
Changing the page color is not quite common. To do so, in the Page style dialog box, select Background tab, In As option click on color and select the “color” from the color palette or select “graphic” to apply an image as a page background Borders can be applied to an entire document, an entire page, paragraph, or just to certain sections of the document. From the page style dialog box, select the Border tab, the user defined area helps to define the area of borders, the line style of borders, color of borders can be selected.

Header and Footer:
The header is a section of the document that appears in the top margin, which displays the title or chapter name, author name of a document. The footer is a section of the document that appears in the bottom margin of the page which displays the page number, date, time etc. which gets displayed on all the pages automatically.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

11th Computer Applications Guide Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
_______ is computer software to create, edit, manipulate, transmit, store and retrieve a text document.
a) Word processor
b) Word processing
c) Text processor
d) Spreadsheet
Answer:
a) Word processor

Question 2.
_______ is an activity carried out by a computer with suitable software to create, edit, manipulate, transmit, store and retrieve text documents.
a) Word processor
b) Word processing
c) Text processor
d) Spreadsheet
Answer:
b) Word processing

Question 3.
_______ is word processing activity.
a) Word processor
b) Word processing
c) Text processor
d) Spreadsheet
Answer:
d) Spreadsheet

Question 4.
_______ is a proprietary source word processing software.
a) Microsoft Word
b) WPS Word
c) WordPro
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 5.
_______ is a open source word processing software
a) Open Office Writer
b) LibreOffice Writer
c) Abiword
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 6.
Who is the developer of Microsoft Word?
a) Microsoft Corporation
b) Kingsoft
c) Lotus Corporation
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Microsoft Corporation

Question 7.
Who is the developer of WPS Word?
a) Microsoft Corporation
b) Kingsoft
c) Lotus Corporation
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Kingsoft

Question 8.
Who is the developer of WordPro?
a) Microsoft Corporation
b) Kingsoft
c) Lotus Corporation
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Lotus Corporation

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 9.
Who is the developer of Open Office Writer?
a) Apache
b) The document foundation
c) Abisource
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Apache

Question 10.
Who is the developer of LibreOffice Writer?
a) Apache
b) The document foundation
c) Abisource
d) None of these
Answer:
b) The document foundation

Question 11.
Who is the developer of Abiword?
a) Apache
b) The document foundation
c) Abisource
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Abisource

Question 12.
Identify the odd one from the following.
a) Open Office Writer
b) LibreOffice Writer
c) Abiword
d) WordPro
Answer:
d) WordPro

Question 13.
Identify the odd one from the following.
a) Apache
b) The document foundation
c) Abisource
d) Lotus Corporation
Answer:
d) Lotus Corporation

Question 14.
Identify the odd one from the following.
a) OpenOffice Writer
b) OpenOffice Calc
c) OpenOffice Formula
d) OpenOffice Draw
Answer:
d) OpenOffice Draw

Question 15.
_______ is a Tamil word processor.
a) Tamil Openoffice Writer
b) Mentamiz 2017
c) Kamban 3.0
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 16.
_______ is a familiar word processors exclusively for Tamil Language.
a) Tamil Openoffice Writer
b) Mentamiz 2017
c) Kamban 3.0
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 17.
_______ provides full Tamil interface to its office suits.
a) Borland International
b) Microsoft
c) Apple
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Microsoft

Question 18.
_______ stores all our data in an International open standard format.
a) Microsoft Office
b) Open Office
c) Kamban 3.0
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Open Office

Question 19.
________ can read and write files from other common office software packages.
a) Microsoft Office
b) Open Office
c) Kamban 3.0
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Open Office

Question 20.
________ is available in many languages and works on all common computers.
a) Microsoft Office
a) OpenOffice Writer
c) Kamban 3.0
d) None of these
Answer:
a) OpenOffice Writer

Question 21.
_______ is a word processor of OpenOffice.
a) OpenOffice Writer
b) OpenOffice Calc
c) OpenOffice Formula
d) OpenOffice Impress
Answer:
a) OpenOffice Writer

Question 22.
_______ is a spreadsheed of OpenOffice.
a) OpenOffice Writer
b) OpenOffice Calc
c) OpenOffice Formula
d) OpenOffice Impress
Answer:
b) OpenOffice Calc

Question 23.
________ is a database of OpenOffice.
a) OpenOffice Base
b) OpenOffice Calc
c) OpenOffice Formula
d) OpenOffice Impress
Answer:
d) OpenOffice Impress

Question 25.
_______ is a presentation application of OpenOffice.
a) OpenOffice Writer
b) OpenOffice Calc
c) OpenOffice Formula
d) OpenOffice Impress
Answer:
d) OpenOffice Impress

Question 26.
________ application of OpenOffice is used to create formula and equations.
a) OpenOffice Writer
b) OpenOffice Calc
c) OpenOffice Formula
d) OpenOffice Impress
Answer:
c) OpenOffice Formula

Question 27.
________ is the usual feature of a word processor.
a) Spell check
b) Thesaurus
c) Hyphenation
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 28.
_______ is the usual feature of a word processor.
a) Find and Replace
b) Mail Merge
c) Automatic generation of tables of content
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 29.
________ is the important feature of a word processor.
a) Templates and Styles
b) Page layout methods
c) Embedding of other objects
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 30.
________ is the important feature of a word processor.
a) Database integration
b) Export to PDF
c) Built-in Drawing tools
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 31.
PDF stands for _______.
a) Portable Document Format
b) Printable Data Format
c) Pioneer Data Format
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Portable Document Format

Question 32.
The opening screen of OpenOffice is called as _______.
a) Star Center
b) Open Center
c) Work Center
d) Document Center
Answer:
a) Star Center

Question 33.
________ is the shortcut key to open new text document.
a) Ctrl + N
b) Alt+N
c) Shift + N
d) Esc + N
Answer:
a) Ctrl + N

Question 34.
The is displayed at the top most part _______ of the window.
a) Menu bar
b) Title bar
c) Scroll bar
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Title bar

Question 35.
_______ displays the name of the document and the name of the application.
a) Menu bar
b) Title bar
c) Scroll bar
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Title bar

Question 36.
By default, the initial document is given the name as _______.
a) Untitled
b) Document
c) Nonamet
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Untitled

Question 37.
In the right corner of title bar _______ control button is available
a) minimize
b) maximize/restore
c) close
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 38.
When we click ________ button, it shrinks our document window smaller in size and shows it as a small button on the task bar.
a) minimize
b) maximize/restore
c) close
d) all the above
Answer:
a) minimize

Question 39.
When we click ________ button, our document window is displayed in full screen.
a) minimize
b) maximize
c) close
d) restore
Answer:
b) maximize

Question 40.
When the window is in full screen, the maximize button is changed as _______.
a) maximize
b) close
c) restore
d) none of these
Answer:
c) restore

Question 41.
When we click _______ button, the document window regains its original size.
a) maximize
b) close
c) restore
d) minimize
Answer:
c) restore

Question 42.
When we click ______ button, the application is closed and OpenOffice returns back to the desktop.
a) maximize
b) close
c) restore
d) minimize
Answer:
b) close

Question 43.
The close button may be called as _______
a) Exit
b) Quit
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 44.
The _______ is just below the title bar which comprises of various menus consisting of various options.
a) Menu bar
b) Tool bar
c) Scroll bar
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Menu bar

Question 45.
The _______ menu contains various option for file management task.
a) File
b) Format
c) Edit
d) Tools
Answer:
a) File

Question 46.
_______ is the File menu option.
a) New / Open / Close
b) Save / Save As
c) Print / Export
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 47.
The Edit menu contains the editing option _______.
a) cut/ copy and paste
b) Undo
c) Find and Replace
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 48.
The _______ menu contains the options which are used to modify the environment of writer.
a) File
b) Format
c) Edit
d) View
Answer:
d) View

Question 49.
________ is a View menu option.
a) Navigator
b) Web layout
c) Print layout
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 50.
The _______ menu contains commands for inserting various elements.
a) Insert
b) Tools
c) Add
d) Elements
Answer:
a) Insert

Question 51.
________ is the Insert menu option.
a) Picture
b) Tables/Charts
c) Header / Footer
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 52.
The _______ menu contains the options of various text and page formatting features
a) File
b) Format
c) Edit
d) View
Answer:
b) Format

Question 53.
_______ is a Format menu option.
a) Bullets and Numbering
b) Font
c) Layout
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 54.
The _______ menu contains various tools to manage and manipulate tables.
a) File
b) Table
c) Insert
d) View
Answer:
b) Table

Question 55.
The Tools menu contains _______.
a) Mail merge
b) Spelling and Grammar
c) Endnotes/Footnotes
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 56.
The _______ menu shows display options such as New Window, Close Windows, Split and Freeze.
a) Window
b) File
c) Insert
d) View
Answer:
a) Window

Question 57.
The _______ menu lists out the inbuilt help features available with OpenOffice.
a) Window
b) File
c) Insert
d) Help
Answer:
d) Help

Question 58.
Under the menu bar, there are two _______ available by default.
a) toolbars
b) scroll bars
c) both a and b
d) none of these
Answer:
a) toolbars

Question 59.
Under the menu bar, _______ toolbar is available by default.
a) Standard
b) Formatting
c) Insert Object
d) Both A and B
Answer:
d) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 60.
_______ tool bar consists of shortcut icons for frequently performed tasks.
a) Standard
b) Formatting
c) Insert Object
d) Both A and B
Answer:
a) Standard

Question 61.
_______ toolbar consists of icons used for formatting the text like bold, underline, italics, font type, font color.
a) Standard
b) Formatting
c) Insert Object
d) Both A and B
Answer:
b) Formatting

Question 62.
The _______ is a scale below the formatting tool bar which shows the margins.
a) ruler
b) tab stops
c) margin guide
d) none of these
Answer:
a) ruler

Question 63.
There are _______ set of rulers.
a) three
b) two
c) only one
d) no ruler
Answer:
b) two

Question 64.
_______ is a ruler type.
a) Horizontal Ruler
b) Vertical Ruler
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 65.
_______ ruler is used to set left and right margins of a page.
a) Horizontal Ruler
b) Vertical Ruler
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Horizontal Ruler

Question 66.
______ ruler is used to set top and bottom margins of a page.
a) Horizontal Ruler
b) Vertical Ruler
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Vertical Ruler

Question 67.
The _______ is the blank area which is used to type the content of the file.
a) work space
b) document space
c) window
d) none of these
Answer:
a) work space

Question 68.
A flashing vertical bar appears at the beginning of the screen which is called as _____
a) cursor
b) insertion point
c) Indicator
d) none of these
Answer:
b) insertion point

Question 69.
The ______ bar is at the bottom of the window.
a) status
b) scroll
c) tool
d) menu
Answer:
a) status

Question 70.
_______ bar shows the current status of the document such as number of pages, current page number, default language etc.
a) status
b) scroll
c) tool
d) menu
Answer:
a) status

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 71.
When the text reaches the end of the line, the word is automatically wrapped to the next line is known as ________
a) Hard return
b) Soft return
c) Word wrap
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Word wrap

Question 72.
The _______ key must not be pressed at the end of the each line.
a) Enter
b) Tab
c) Backspace
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Enter

Question 73.
The Enter key should be pressed only ______
a) at the end of a paragraph
b) when a blank line is to be inserted
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 74.
______ key is used to move the insertion point to one word right.
a) Ctrl + →
b) Ctrl + ←
c) Ctrl + ↑
d) Ctrl + ↓
Answer:
a) Ctrl + →

Question 75.
________ key is used to move the insertion point to one word left.
a) Ctrl + →
b) Ctrl + ←
c) Ctrl + ↑
d) Ctrl + ↓
Answer:
b) Ctrl + ←

Question 76.
_______ key Ii used to move the insertion point to one paragraph up.
a) Ctrl + →
b) Ctrl + ←
c) Ctrl + ↑
d) Ctrl + ↓
Answer:
c) Ctrl + ↑

Question 77.
_____ key Is used to move the Insertion point to one paragraph down.
a) Ctrl + →
b) CtrI + ←
c) Ctrl + ↑
d) Ctrl + ↓
Answer:
d) Ctrl + ↓

Question 78.
_______ key Is us.d to move the Insertion
point to the beginning of a line.
a) Ctrl + Home
b) Ctrl + End
c) Home
d) End
Answer:
c) Home

Question 79.
________ key Is used to move the Insertion point to the end of a line.
a) Ctrl + Home
b) Ctrl + End
c) Home
d) End
Answer:
d) End

Question 80.
_______ key Is used to move the insertion point to the beginning of document.
a) Ctrl + Home
b) Ctrl + End
c) Home
d) End
Answer:
a) Ctrl + Home

Question 81.
________ key Is used to move the insertion point to the end of document.
a) Ctrl + Home
b) Ctrl + End
c) Home
d) End
Answer:
b) Ctrl + End

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 82.
_______ key Is used to move the insertion point to one cell light.
a) Tab
b) Shift + Tab
c) PgUp
d) PgDn
Answer:
a) Tab

Question 83.
______ key Is used to move the insertion point to one cell left.
a) Tab
b) Shift + Tab
c) PgUp
d) PgDn
Answer:
b) Shift + Tab

Question 84.
_______ key Is used to scroll one screen up.
a) Tab
b) Shift + Tab
c) PgUp
d) PgDn
Answer:
c) PgUp

Question 85.
_______ key is used to scroll one screen down.
a) Tab
b) Shift + Tab
c) PgUp
d) PgDn
Answer:
d) PgDn

Question 86.
______ is the shortcut key to save a document.
a) ctrl+S
b) Ctrl+F
c) Alt+S
d) Shift+S
Answer:
a) ctrl+S

Question 87.
_______ check box s available in Save As dialog box.
a) Automatic file name extension
b) Save with password
c) Edit filter settings
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 88.
______ is the file extension for Open office writer flic.
a) odt
b) doc
c) docx
d) all the above
Answer:
a) odt

Question 89.
When the work Ii finished, we should save the document and then close document using _______.
a) File – Close command
b) Press Ctrl+W
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 90.
When we dose en unsaved file using the dose control button, select ______ from Alert Message box to accept the warning message.
a) Save
b) Discard
c) Cancel
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Save

Question 91.
When we close an unsaved file. using the close control button, select _______ from Alert Message box if we are not willing to save the file.
a) Save
b) Discard
c) Cancel
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Discard

Question 92.
When we close an unsaved file using the close control button, select ______ from Alert Message box if we want to cancel this warning and continue working in the same document.
a) Save
b) Discard
c) Cancel
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Cancel

Question 93.
_____ lithe shortcut key to open a document.
a) Ctrl + O
b) Ctrl + N
c) Ctrl + F
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ctrl + O

Question 94.
Typing in Tamil has ______ methods.
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
a) 2

Question 95.
________ is a Tamil typing method.
a) Using Tamil font
b) Using Tamil interface
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 96.
________ is a drawback of using Tamil font to Tamil text.
a) The user must be aware of Tamil typing.
b) The particular font must be available In the system.
c) It does not support other languages including English.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 97.
_______ is a drawback of using Tamil font to Tamil text.
a) The computer accepts characters as symbols not as language.
b) It is not portable
c) Both A and B
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 98.
_______ is an advantage of using Tamil Interface to Tamil text.
a) It follows Unicode technique. Hence knowledge of Tamil typing Is not necessarly
b) It Is easy to type documents in Tamil In any word processor
c) Some of the Unicode fonts supports all Indian languages
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 99.
_______ ¡s a Ta mil Interface.
a) Murasu
b) NHM writer
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 100.
Once document s typed, corrections can be made In _______ ways.
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
a) 2

Question 101.
Once document is typed, corrections can be made using _______ key.
a) Backspace
b) Delete
c) Insert
d) Either A or B
Answer:
d) Either A or B

Question 102.
________ key deletes the character left of the Insertion point.
a) Backspace
b) Delete
C) Insert
d) Either A or B
Answer:
a) Backspace

Question 103.
key deletes the character right of the Insertion point.
a) Backspace
b) Delete
c) Insert
d) Either A or B
Answer:
b) Delete
b) Delete

Question 104.
_______ is a text Insertion mode.
a) Insert mode
b) Type over mode
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 105.
We can toggle between the insert mode and type over mode by pressIng the _______ key.
a) Backspace
b) Delete
c) Insert
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Insert

Question 106.
Text selection can be done by methods.
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) only one
Answer:
a) two

Question 107.
_______ is text selection method.
a) Selecting the continuous text
b) Selecting the non continuous text.
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 108.
To select the text continuously, _______ key is used.
a) Shift
b) Ctrl
c) Alt
d) Esc
Answer:
b) Ctrl

Question 109.
To select the text non-continously, ________ key is used.
a) Shift
b) Ctrl
c) Alt
d) Esc
Answer:
b) Ctrl

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 110.
The required text may be selected using _______.
a) Keyboard
b) Mouse
c) Shortcut key
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 111.
_______ helps to select the text quickly and easily.
a) Keyboard
b) Mouse
c) Shortcut key
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Shortcut key

Question 112.
_______ is a shortcut key to select a word.
a) Double click on the word
b) Ctrl + A
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Double click on the word

Question 113.
_______ is a shortcut key to select the entire document.
a) Double click on the word
b) Ctrl + A
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Ctrl + A

Question 114.
________ is used to cut the text.
a) Ctrl + X
b) Edit → Cut
c) Cut Icon
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 115.
________ is used to paste the text.
a) Ctrl + V
b) Edit → Paste
c) Paste Icon
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 116.
________ is used to copy the text.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Edit → Copy
c) Copy Icon
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 117.
_______ is used to Undo the operation.
a) Ctrl + Z
b) Edit Undo
c) Undo Icon
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 118.
_______ is used to open Paste Special dialog box.
a) Ctrl + Shift + V
b) Edit → Paste Special
c) Alt + E + S
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 119.
DDE means _______.
a) Dynamic Data Exchange
b) Data Dynamic Exchange
c) Direct Data Exchange
d) Dynamic Data Entry
Answer:
a) Dynamic Data Exchange

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 120.
_______ is a mechanism whereby the source data can be pasted into the destination as a linked, ‘live’ copy of the original.
a) DDE link
b) Formatted text
c) Unformatted text
d) None of these
Answer:
a) DDE link

Question 121.
While paste the text with _______ option, any changes made in the source will immediately reflect into the destination.
a) DOE link
b) Formatted text
c) Unformatted text
d) None of these
Answer:
a) DOE link

Question 122.
_______ key Is used to open Help window In Open Office.
a) F1
b) Ctrl + F
c) Ctrl + F4
d) None of these
Answer:
a) F1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 123.
To activate ________ click Tools → Options → Open Office
a) Tooltips
b) Extended tips
c) The Help Agent
d) all the above
Answer:
a) Tooltips

Question 124.
For a more detailed explanation, select ________ and hold the mouse pointer over the icon where you want more help with.
a) Help → What’s This
b) Help → Content
c) Help → More
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Help → What’s This

Question 125.
A text without any special formatting gives a _______ appearance.
a) good
b) monotonous
c) contagious
d) None of these
Answer:
b) monotonous

Question 126.
________ is the most common types of text formatting.
a) Bold
b) Italic
c) Underline
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 127.
A ________ is a set of characters in a particular style.
a) font
b) paragraph
c) word
d) none of these
Answer:
a) font

Question 128.
Changing the default appearance of the text like changing the font type , size, color, style etc., are called as _______.
a) Text Editing
b) Text Formatting
c) Text
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Text Formatting

Question 129.
To make the text attractive and more appealing ________ is used.
a) Text Editing
b) Text Formatting
c) Text Processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Text Formatting

Question 130.
________ is the shortcut key to makes the text bold.
a) Ctrl + B
b) Ctrl + I
c) Ctrl + U
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ctrl + B

Question 131.
________ is the shortcut key to underlines the text.
a) Ctrl + B
b) Ctrl + I
c) Ctrl + U
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Ctrl + U

Question 132.
________ is the shortcut key to italizes the text.
a) Ctrl + B
b) Ctrl + I
c) Ctrl + U
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Ctrl + I

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 133.
The default font type is _______.
a) Times New Roman
b) Fajitha
c) Courier
d) Wingdings
Answer:
a) Times New Roman

Question 134.
The type of font can be changed by clicking on the – icon.
a) Font type
b) Font size
c) Font colour
d) all the above
Answer:
a) Font type

Question 135.
The font size can be changed by clicking on the – icon.
a) Font type
b) Font size
c) Font colour
d) all the above
Answer:
b) Font size

Question 136.
The font colour can be changed by clicking on the – icon.
a) Font type
b) Font size
c) Font colour
d) all the above
Answer:
c) Font colour

Question 137.
Using dialog box, all the formatting can be done at a single stretch with an online preview.
a) Paragraph
b) Character
c) Format
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Character

Question 138.
________ is the command to open Character dialog box.
a) Format → Character
b) Tools Character
c) Edit → Character
d) Format Paragraph
Answer:
a) Format → Character

Question 139.
The text can be changed to _____ case.
a) Uppercase
b) toggle case
c) sentence case
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 140.
The text can be changed to ______ case,
a) Lowercase
b) Capitalize every word
c) sentence case
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 141.
The text can be changed to different case using ________.
a) Format Change case
b) Format → Case
c) Tools → Change case
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Format Change case

Question 142.
________ is used to draw attention to important information in a text.
a) Text editing
b) Highlighting
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Highlighting

Question 143.
Highlighting can be removed by selecting the text and click ________ from the color palette.
a) No colour
b) No Fill
c) No background
d) None of these
Answer:
b) No Fill

Question 144.
After the formatting is applied, it can be removed by ________.
a) Ctrl + M
b) Ctrl + R
c) Ctrl + C
d) Alt + M
Answer:
a) Ctrl + M

Question 145.
A paragraph is any text that ends with a _______.
a) soft return
b) hard return
c) automatic return
d) none of these
Answer:
b) hard return

Question 146.
A hard return is accomplished anytime you press the key.
a) Insert
b) Enter
c) Backspace
d) Esc
Answer:
b) Enter

Question 147.
Paragraph _______ refers to the way in which the lines of a paragraph are aligned.
a) Alignment
b) justification
c) Adjustment
d) Both A and B
Answer:
d) Both A and B

Question 148.
_______ lets you control the appearance of individual paragraphs.
a) Paragraph Alignment
b) Soft return
c) Editing
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Paragraph Alignment

Question 149.
There are _______ types of alignment available in Open office Writer.
a) three
b) four
c) five
d) many
Answer:
b) four

Question 150.
________ is a paragraph alignment option.
a) Justify
b) Center
c) Left or Right
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 151.
_______ is the default alignment when a paragraph is typed.
a) Justify
b) Center
c) Left
d) Right
Answer:
c) Left

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 152.
A paragraphs text is _______ aligned when it is aligned evenly along the left margin and uneven along the right margin.
a) Justify
b) Center
c) Left
d) Right
Answer:
c) Left

Question 153.
A paragraph’s text Is _______ aligned when it is aligned evenly along the right marign and uneven along the left margin.
a) Justify
b) Center
c) Left
d) Right
Answer:
d) Right

Question 154.
paragraphs text b _______ aligned, all the lines In the paragraph are alIgned to the canter of the page size.
a) Justify
b) Center
c) Left
d) Right
Answer:
b) Center

Question 155.
A paragraph’s text Is _______ aligned, all the lines In the paragraph, are arranged evenly both on the left and tight margins.
a) Justify
b) Center
c) Left
d) Right
Answer:
a) Justify

Question 156.
_______ alignment is achieved in writer by automatically inserting additional space between the words.
a) Justify
b) Center
c) Left
d) Right
Answer:
a) Justify

Question 157.
Paragraph formatting can be applied by _______ command.
a) Format → Character
b) Format → Paragraph
c) Format → Alignment
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Format → Paragraph

Question 158.
________ is the shortcut key to left align text.
a) Ctrl + L
b) Ctrl + R
c) Ctrl + J
d) Ctrl + E
Answer:
a) Ctrl + L

Question 159.
_______ is the shortcut key to right align text.
a) Ctrl + L
b) Ctrl + R
c) Ctlr + J
d) Ctrl + E
Answer:
b) Ctrl + R

Question 160.
_______ is the shortcut key to center align text.
a) Ctrl + L
b) Ctrl + R
c) Ctrl + J
d) Ctrl + E
Answer:
d) Ctrl + E

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 161.
_______ is the shortcut key to justify align text.
a) Ctrl + L
b) Ctrl + R
c) Ctrl + J
d) Ctrl + E
Answer:
c) Ctrl + J

Question 162.
Line spacing determines the amount of _______ between lines of text in a paragraph.
a) vertical space
b) horizontal
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) vertical space

Question 163.
By default, the lines are _______ spaced.
a) double
b) 1.5
c) single
d) None of these
Answer:
c) single

Question 164.
There are _______ different types of line spacing options.
a) seven
b) six
c) five
d) four
Answer:
a) seven

Question 165.
_______ dialog box is used to change the line space.
a) Character
b) Format
c) Paragraph
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Paragraph

Question 166.
_______ is the distance from the left and right margin of a paragraph.
a) orientation
b) Indent
c) header
d) footer
Answer:
b) Indent

Question 167.
_______ is used to improve the efficiency and readability of the paragraph and makes the paragraph look more attractive.
a) orientation
b) Indent
c) header
d) footer
Answer:
b) Indent

Question 168.
There are ________ types of indents.
a) six
b) five
c) four
d) three
Answer:
c) four

Question 169.
_______ is an indent type.
a) Left/Right indent
b) Hanging indent
c) First Line indent
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 170.
The _______ indent controls the space between the paragraph and the left margin.
a) Left
b) Hanging
c) First Line
d) Right
Answer:
a) Left

Question 171.
_______ is the default indent.
a) Left
b) Hanging
c) First Line
d) Right
Answer:
a) Left

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 172.
Each click on the Increase indent icon moves the paragraph _______ inch away from the left margin.
a) 1
b) 1/2
c) 1 1/2
d) 2
Answer:
b) 1/2

Question 173.
The _______ indent controls the space between the paragraph and the right margin.
a) Left
b) Hanging
c) First Line
d) Right
Answer:
d) Right

Question 174.
Each click on the decrease indent icon ________ the indent applied by the Increase indent.
a) removes
b) adds
c) modifies
d) none of these
Answer:
a) removes

Question 175.
________ indentation indents the first line of the paragraph.
a) Left
b) Hanging
c) First Line
d) Right
Answer:
c) First Line

Question 176.
_______ indent is the most common way to start a new paragraph.
a) Left
b) Hanging
c) First Line
d) Right
Answer:
c) First Line

Question 177.
_______ is a special kind of indent where the first line of the paragraph alone hangs outside leaving the rest of the text.
a) Left
b) Hanging
c) First Line
d) Right
Answer:
b) Hanging

Question 178.
To apply Hanging indent, a value is _______ given in the “first line” option.
a) positive
b) zero
c) negative
d) none of these
Answer:
c) negative

Question 179.
_______ are used to emphasize list of things and make list easy to read and follow.
a) Bullets and Numbering
b) Paragraph alignments
c) Margins
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Bullets and Numbering

Question 180.
_______ provides an excellent way to segregate, list and organize information for a reader.
a) Bullets and Numbering
b) Paragraph alignments
c) Margins
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Bullets and Numbering

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 181.
________ is a paragraph level attribute that applies a bullet character to the start of the paragraph.
a) Bullet
b) Numbering
c) Margins
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Bullet

Question 182.
_______ is suitable when the text has to be presented as a list of items preceded by a bullet symbol and no sequence has to be followed.
a) Bullet
b) Numbering
c) Margins
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Bullet

Question 183.
_______ attribute applies a numeral to the start of the paragraph.
a) Bullet
b) Numbering
c) Margins
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Numbering

Question 184.
_______ is more suitable when the text has to be presented as a sequence.
a) Bullet
b) Numbering
c) Margins
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Numbering

Question 185.
The numbers in a numbered list are updated automatically when we ________ paragraphs in the list.
a) add
b) remove
c) add or remove
d) none of these
Answer:
c) add or remove

Question 186.
_______ is a page formatting option.
a) margins and numbering
b) page layout
c) headers and footers
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 187.
Formatting document pages makes them _______.
a) look more attractive
b) easier to read
c) both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 188.
The default page size in writer is .
a) 8.5″ x 11″
b) 11″ x 8.5″
c) 11.5″ x 8″
d) 8″x 11″
Answer:
a) 8.5″ x 11″

Question 189.
_______ margins are the white space around the top, bottom, left, and right of your document.
a) page
b) paragraph
c) text
d) document
Answer:
a) page

Question 190.
_______ margins let Writer know where to start placing the text at the top of a document.
a) Left
b) Right
c) Top
d) Bottom
Answer:
c) Top

Question 191.
_______ margins let Writer know, when to move on to the next page at the bottom,
a) Left
b) Right
c) Top
d) Bottom
Answer:
d) Bottom

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 192.
_______ margins let Writer know where to start typing text on the left side
a) Left
b) Right
c) Top
d) Bottom
Answer:
a) Left

Question 193.
________ margins let Writer know where to stop and move to the next line on the right.
a) Left
b) Right
c) Top
d) Bottom
Answer:
b) Right

Question 194.
Changing or setting page margins in Open office writer can be done in ________ ways.
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) five
Answer:
a) two

Question 195.
________ is used to change the margins.
a) Ruler
b) Page style dialog box
c) both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 196.
________ is used to change the margin when precise values are known.
a) Ruler
b) Page style dialog box
c) both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
b) Page style dialog box

Question 197.
________ is used to change the margin when precise values are not known.
a) Ruler
b) Page style dialog box
c) both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
a) Ruler

Question 198.
_______ refers to how the document will be displayed on screen and printed.
a) Margins
b) Page orientation
c) Header
d) Footer
Answer:
b) Page orientation

Question 199.
There are _______ different orientations.
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) five
Answer:
a) two

Question 200.
The width of the document is more than the height is called ________ orientation.
a) Portrait
b) Landscape
c) Ruler
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Landscape

Question 201.
_______ orientation is best suited for displaying professional photos, invitations, albums, tables etc.
a) Portrait
b) Landscape
c) Ruler
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Landscape

Question 202.
_______ is the most common and default orientation.
a) Portrait
b) Landscape
c) Ruler
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Portrait

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 203.
The height of the document is more than the _______ width is called orientation.
a) Portrait
b) Landscape
c) Ruler
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Portrait

Question 204.
Books, newspapers will be displayed in ________ format.
a) Portrait
b) Landscape
c) Ruler
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Portrait

Question 205.
Changing the ________ color is not quite common.
a) text
b) page
c) both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
b) page

Question 206.
Borders can be applied to _______.
a) an entire document
b) an entire page, paragraph
c) just to certain sections of the document
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 207.
The ________ is a section of the document that appears in the top margin.
a) header
b) footer
c) orientation
d) none of these
Answer:
a) header

Question 208.
________ displays the title or chapter name, author name of a document.
a) header
b) footer
c) orientation
d) none of these
Answer:
a) header

Question 209.
The ________ is a section of the document that appears in the bottom margin of the page.
a) header
b) footer
c) orientation
d) none of these
Answer:
b) footer

Question 210.
_______ displays the page number, date, time etc.
a) header
b) footer
c) orientation
d) none of these
Answer:
b) footer

Question 211.
In the header area, enter the text that is to be repeated in ail pages or Select _______.
a) Insert → Fields → Title
b) Insert → Header → Title
c) Insert → Fields → Header
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Insert → Fields → Title

Question 212.
________ command is used to insert page number in footer / header.
a) Insert → Fields → Page Number
b) Insert → Header → Page Number
c) Insert → Footer → Page Number
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Insert → Fields → Page Number

Question 213.
_______ is used to insert date in all the pages.
a) Insert → Fields →Date and Time
b) Insert → Header → Date
c) Insert → Footer → Date
d) Insert → Fields → Date
Answer:
d) Insert → Fields → Date

Question 214.
Once the headers and footers are given in the first page, the same text appears in – page(s).
a) all
b) first
c) specified
d) none of these
Answer:
a) all

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 215.
_________ is the shortcut key to open the Find and Replace dialog box.
a) Ctrl + F
b) Ctrl + FI
c) Alt + F
d) Alt + Ctrl + F
Answer:
a) Ctrl + F

Question 216.
In Find and Replace dialog box, type the text you want to find in the _______ box.
a) Search for
b) Find for
c) Replace with
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Search for

Question 217.
In Find and Replace dialog box, type the new text in the ________ box.
a) Search for
b) Find for
c) Replace with
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Replace with

Question 218.
In Find and Replace dialog box, ________ button is used to find the next occurance of the word.
a) Find
b) Search
c) Find All
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Find

Question 219.
In Find and Replace dialog box, ________ button is used to find all the occurances of the word.
a) Find
b) Search
c) Find All
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Find All

Question 220.
In Find and Replace dialog box, ________ button is used to replace the current occurrence of the word.
a) Replace Once
b) Search
c) Replace
d) Change
Answer:
c) Replace

Question 221.
In Find and Replace dialog box ________ button is used to replace all the occurrences of the word.
a) Replace
b) Search
c) Replace All
d) Change All
Answer:
c) Replace All

Question 222.
While Find and Replace text, enable ________ to perform the search case- sensitively so that uppercase and lower cases are distinguished separately.
a) Match case
b) Whole words only
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Match case

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 223.
While find and Replace text, enable _______ to make the search more specific to words used separately atone.
a) Match case
b) Whole words only
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Whole words only

Question 224.
The documents prepared using word processing software should be without any _______.
a) spelling mistakes
b) non-graphics
c) formatting
d) None of these
Answer:
a) spelling mistakes

Question 225.
To check the spelling of a document, OpenOffice includes a _______.
a) dictionary
b) spell check program
c) both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 226.
OpenOffice writer check the spelling _______.
a) while typing
b) after typing
c) Both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:

Question 227.
_________ option checks each word as at is typed and displays a wavy red line under any misspelled words.
a) Auto spell check
b) Auto correct
c) Spell check
d) none of these
Answer:
c) Spell check

Question 228.
To perform a separate spelling check on the document (or a text selection) click the ________ button.
a) Auto Correct
b) Spelling and Grammar
c) Auto spell check
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Auto Correct

Question 229.
_______ checks the document or selection and opens the Spelling dialog box if any misspelled words are found,
a) Auto Correct
b) Spelling and Grammar
c) Auto spell check
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Spelling and Grammar

Question 230.
The dictionary language cart be changed to _______.
a) Spanish
b) French
c) German
d) All the above
Answer:
b) French

Question 231.
The new words can be added to a dictionary by clicking ______ button.
a) New
b) Include
c) Add
d) None of these
Answer:
d) None of these

Question 232.
Dictionaries also can be added or deleted through __________ directories.
a) custom
b) system
c) default
d) none of these
Answer:
a) custom

Question 233.
Auto Correct function has the facility to correct the _______ automatically.
a) common misspellings
b) typing errors
c) both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 234.
_______ command is used to open the Auto Correct dialog box.
a) Tools → Auto correct
b) Format → Auto correct
c) File → Auto correct
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Tools → Auto correct

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 235.
To stop the Writer to replace specific spellings, use Tools → Auto Correct, highlight the word pair and click ________ button.
a) Remove
b) Delete
c) Replace
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Delete

Question 236.
To add a new spelling to correct, type it into the Replace and With boxes and click – button.
a) Add
b) New
c) Replace
d) Insert
Answer:

Question 237.
Spell check identifies misspelled words and displayed with a _______ wavy line under the wrong word.
a) green
b) red
c) blue
d) yellow
Answer:
b) red

Question 238.
Spell check identifies the grammatical error and Is displayed with a _______ wavy line under the wrong word.
a) green
b) red
c) blue
d) yellow
Answer:
a) green

Question 239.
A _______ is a grid with a specified number of rows and columns.
a) spreadsheet
b) table
c) worksheet
d) none of these
Answer:
b) table

Question 240.
Tables can often be used as an alternative to _______ to organize materials.
a) spreadsheet
b) bullets
c) numbers
d) none of these
Answer:
a) spreadsheet

Question 241.
A table is a grid with a specified number of _______.
a) rows
b) columns
c) rows and columns
d) none of these
Answer:
c) rows and columns

Question 242.
_______ is used to insert a table.
a) Table → Insert → Table
b) Ctrl + F12
c) left-click the Table icon
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 243.
Formatting a table involves _______.
a) adding or removing rows or columns
b) merging and splitting cells
c) changing borders and the background
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 244.
Select the _______ option to define the first row in the table as the heading
a) Heading
b) Repeat Heading
c) Don’t split table
d) Border
Answer:
a) Heading

Question 245.
Select the _______ option to repeat the heading row if the table spans more than one page.
a) Heading
b) Repeat Heading
c) Don’t split table
d) Border
Answer:
b) Repeat Heading

Question 246.
Select the _______ option to prevent the table from spanning more than one page.
a) Heading
b) Repeat Heading
c) Don’t split table
d) Border
Answer:
c) Don’t split table

Question 247.
Select the _______ option to surround each cell of the table with a border.
a) Heading
b) Repeat Heading
c) Don’t split table
d) Border
Answer:
d) Border

Question 248.
_______ command is used to merge the cells in a table.
a) Table → Combine Cells
b) Table → Merge Cells
c) Table → Join Cells
d) Table → Integrate Cells
Answer:
b) Table → Merge Cells

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 249.
______ command is used to split a cell in a table.
a) Table → Divide Cells
b) Table → Explore Cells
c) Table → Sub Cells
d) Table → Split Cells
Answer:
d) Table → Split Cells

Question 250.
To insert an image from a file in a document _______ command is used.
a) Insert → Picture → From File
b) Insert → Picture
c) Inserts Image → From File
d) Insert → From File → Picture
Answer:
a) Insert → Picture → From File

Question 251.
To insert a special character in a document _______ command is used.
a) Insert → Characters
b) Insert → Special Characters
c) Insert → Symbols → From File
d) Tools → Special Characters
Answer:
b) Insert → Special Characters

Question 253.
Auto Text allows you to assign to a key or key combination.
a) text
b) tables
c) graphics and other items
d) All the above
Answer:
b) tables

Question 254.
_______ is used to assign Auto Text.
a) Edit → Auto Text
b) Ctrl+F3
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 255.
________ is used to preview the document before printing.
a) File → Page Preview
b) Preview button
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 256.
In the page preview tool bar click ________ icon to display multiple pages.
a) Multiple Pages
b) Many Pages
c) More Pages
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Multiple Pages

Question 257.
To close the preview, click the ________ button.
a) Close Preview
b) Exit Preview
c) Navigate Preview
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Close Preview

Question 258.
________ is used print a document.
a) File → Print
b) Ctrl + P
c) Print Icon
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 259.
_______ is a print option.
a) All
b) Pages
c) Selection
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 260.
_______ is the shortcut key to double underline the text.
a) Ctrl + D
b) Ctrl + 2U
c) Ctrl + DU
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ctrl + D

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 261.
________ is the shortcut key for Redo Last Action.
a) Ctrl + X
b) Ctrl + Z
c) Ctrl + Y
d) Ctrl + R
Answer:
b) Ctrl + Z

Question 262.
_______ key move cursor with selection to the left.
a) Shift Left Arrow
b) Shift Right Arrow
c) Up Arrow
d) Down Arrow
Answer:
a) Shift Left Arrow

Question 263.
_______ key move cursor with selection to the right.
a) Shift Left Arrow
b) Shift Right Arrow
c) Up Arrow
d) Down Arrow
Answer:
b) Shift Right Arrow

Question 264.
_______ key move cursor to the beginning of the current word.
a) Shift Left Arrow
b) Shift Right Arrow
c) Ctrl + Left Arrow
d) Ctrl+ Right Arrow
Answer:
c) Ctrl + Left Arrow

Question 265.
_______ key move cursor to the end or the current word,
a) Shift Left Arrow
b) Shift Right Arrow
c) Ctrl + Left Arrow
d) Ctrl+ Right Arrow
Answer:
d) Ctrl+ Right Arrow

Question 266.
_________ is used for go and select from the beginning of line,
a) Shift + Home
b) Shift + End
c) Ctrl + Home
d) Ctrl+End
Answer:
a) Shift + Home
a) Shift + Home

Question 267.
______ is used for go and select fill the end.
a) Shift + Home
b) Shift + End
c) Ctrl + Home
d) Ctrl+End
Answer:
b) Shift + End

Question 268.
_______ key Is used for subscript,
a) Ctrl + Shift + B
b) Ctrl + Shift + P
c) Ctrl + Alt + B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ctrl + Shift + B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 269.
_________ key Is used for superscript,
a) Ctrl + Shift + B
b) Ctrl + Shift + P
c) Ctrl + Alt + B
d) Ctrl + Alt + P
Answer:
b) Ctrl + Shift + P

Question 270.
VIRUS means _______.
a) Vital Information Under Seize
b) Virtual Information Under Seize
c) Void Information Under Seize
d) Vital Information Urgent Seize
Answer:
a) Vital Information Under Seize

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is word processor?
Answer:
Word processor is a computer software to create, edit, manipulate, transmit, store and retrieve a text document.

Question 2.
What do you mean by word processing?
Answer:
Word processing is an activity carried out by a computer with suitable software to create, edit, manipulate, transmit, store and retrieve text documents.

Question 3.
List popular proprietary word processing software along with their developers.
Answer:
Word Processing Package:

  • Microsoft Word
  • WPS Word
  • WordPro

Developer:

  • Microsoft Corporation
  • Kingsoft
  • Lotus Corporation

Question 4.
List popular open source word processing software along with their developers.
Answer:
Word Processing Package:

  • OpenOffice Writer
  • LibreOffice Writer
  • Abiword

Developer:

  • Apache
  • The Document Foundation
  • Abisource

Question 5.
What are the popular Tamil word processors?
Answer:
The familiar Tamil word processors are:

  1. Tamil OpenOffice writer
  2. Tamil LibreOffice writer
  3. Kamban 3.0
  4. Mentamizh 2017

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 6.
What is Star Center?
Answer:
The opening screen of Open Office is called as “Star Center”.

Question 7.
How will you create a new document in OpenOffice?
Answer:
A new text document can be created by selecting File → New → Text Document from any OpenOffice Application. Ctrl + N keyboard short cut can also be used to open a new text document

Question 8.
How will you close a document?
Answer:
After the document is saved, it is still open. So, we can continue typing your document. When the work is finished, we should save the document and then dose document using File → Close command (or) Press Ctrl + W.

Question 9.
Write short note on opening an existing document.
Answer:
Once a document is saved, it can be opened at any time. To open an existing document, Click on the File → Open or Ctrl + 0, the Open dialog box appears, enter the name of the file in the File Name text box and click on OPEN button.

Question 10.
What are the different methods to type Tamil?
Answer:
Typing in Tamil has different methods,

  1. Using Tamil Font
  2. Using Tamil Interface.

Question 11.
What are the drawbacks of typing Tamil using Tamil font?
Answer:
Typing Tamil using Tamil font has some drawbacks:

  1. The user must be aware of Tamil typing.
  2. The particular font must be available in the system.
  3. It does not support other languages including English.
  4. The computer accepts characters as symbols not as language.
  5. It is not portable, i.e. if the document is sent to another computer, if the same font is not available; it is recognized as symbols not as original characters.

Question 12.
What are the advantages of typing Tamil using Tamil interface?
Answer:
The interface method provides the following advantages:

  1. It follows Unicode technique. Hence knowledge of Tamil typing is not necessary.
  2. It is easy to type documents in Tamil in any word processor.
  3. Some of the Unicode font§ like “Aria! Unicode” support all Indian languages including Tamil and English using respective language interface.

Question 13.
What is text editing?
Answer:
If there are some insertions or deletions in the typed document, it can be done while typing or after typing also. This operation is called text editing.

Question 14.
How corrections can be made in the document?
Answer:
Corrections can be made in two different ways:

  1. Backspace Key: Deletes the character left of the insertion pointer.
  2. Delete Key: Deletes the character right of the insertion pointer

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 15.
What are the text selection methods?
Answer:
The text selection can be done by two methods:

  1. Selecting the continuous text.
  2. Selecting the non-continuous text.

Question 16.
How will you select the continuous text?
Answer:
To select the text continuously take the insertion pointer to the starting of the text and then hold the SHIFT key and drag the mouse across until the required text is selected and then release the SHIFT key.

Question 17.
How will you select the non-continuous text?
Answer:
To select the text not continuously, take the insertion pointer to the starting of the text and then hold the CTRL key and drag across it till the required text is selected and release the CTRL key.

Question 18.
Write note on DDE.
Answer:
Dynamic Data Exchange is a mechanism whereby the source data can be pasted into the destination as a linked, ‘live’ copy of the original. Any changes made in the source will immediately reflect into the destination.

Question 21.
What is font?
Answer:
A font is a set of characters in a particular style.

Question 22.
What is text formatting?
Answer:
Changing the default appearance of the text like changing the font type, size, color, style etc,, are called as Text formatting.

Question 23.
What is line spacing? What is default line space?
Answer:
Line spacing determines the amount of vertical space between lines of text in a paragraph. By default, the lines are single-spaced.

Question 24.
List the various line spacing options.
Answer:
The following are the line spacing options:

  1. Single
  2. 1.5 lines
  3. Double
  4. Proportional
  5. At least
  6. Leading
  7. Fixed

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 25.
What is indentation? List its types.
Answer:
Indent is the distance from the left and right margin of a paragraph. There are four types of indents:

  1. Left Indent
  2. Right Indent
  3. First Line Indent
  4. Hanging Indent

Question 24.
What is the purpose of indenting text?
Answer:
It is used to improve the efficiency and readability of the paragraph and makes the paragraph look more attractive.

Question 25.
What is hanging indent?
Answer:
This is a special kind of indent where the first line of the paragraph alone hangs outside leaving the rest of the text. To apply Hanging indent, a negative value is given in the “first line” option of the paragraph dialog box.

Question 26.
What is the purpose of bullets and numbered text?
Answer:
Bullets and numbering are used to emphasize list of things and make list easy to read and follow. It provides an excellent way to segregate, list and organize information for a reader.

Question 27.
What are the page formatting elements?
Answer:
The page formatting elements are:

  1. Margins
  2. Numbering
  3. Page layout
  4. Headers
  5. Footers

Question 28.
What is the impact of page formatting?
Answer:
Formatting our pages makes them look more attractive and makes them easier to read.

Question 29.
What is page orientation? Mention its types.
Answer:
Page orientation refers to how the document will be displayed on screen and printed. There are two different orientations:

  1. Portrait
  2. Landscape

Question 30.
What is Landscape orientation? When it is used?
Answer:

  1. Landscape: The width of the document is more than the height.
  2. Purpose: This is best suited for displaying professional photos, invitations, albums, tables etc.

Question 31.
What is Portrait orientation? When it is used? Portrait:
Answer:
The height of the document is more than the width. This is the default orientation.

Purpose:
Normally books, newspapers will be displayed in this format.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 32.
How will you change the page orientation?
Answer:
To change the orientation:

  1. Select the page whose orientation is to be changed.
  2. In the Page style dialog box, under the Orientation group.
  3. Select Portrait or Landscape button.

Question 33.
What is header? What content may be included in the header?
Answer:
The header is a section of the document that appears in the top margin, which displays the title or chapter name, author name of a document.

Question 34.
What is footer? What content may be included in the footer?
Answer:
The footer is a section of the document that appears in the bottom margin of the page which displays the page number, date, time etc. which gets displayed on all the pages automatically.

Question 35.
How will you create header and insert header content?
Answer:
Inserting Header:

  1. Select Insert → Header → Default from the main menu.
  2. The header text area is separated from the normal text area.
  3. In the header area, Enter the text that is to be repeated in all pages or
  4. Select Insert → Fields → Title.

Question 36.
How will you create footer and insert footer content?
Answer:
Inserting Footer:

  1. Select Insert → Footer → Default from the main menu.
  2. Place the insertion pointer in the footer part of the page.
  3. Select Insert Fields → Date to insert date in all the pages.

Question 37.
How will you insert page number in header / footer?
Answer:
Once the Header / Footer area is enabled, the page numbers can be inserted by performing the following steps:

  1. Position the insertion pointer where you want to insert the page number
  2. Choose Insert → Fields → Page Number
  3. The page number appears with a gray background.

Question 38.
How will you change the page number style?
Answer:
Normally, the page numbers appear as 1,2,3 , To change the numbering style, the following sequence of steps can be performed:

  1. Position the cursor where the page number has to appear.
  2. Select Format → Page, which will bring the page style dialog box.
  3. Select Page Tab.
  4. Select the desired style and click OK button.

Question 39.
What are the tools for checking the spelling of a document?
Answer:
OpenOffice Writer includes a Dictionary and j Spell check program to check the spelling of a document.

Question 40.
What are the different ways to check the spelling of a document?
Answer:
OpenOffice Writer can identify the spelling mistakes as the document is typed or after the entire document is typed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 41.
How will you turn off the auto correct?
Answer:
Auto Correct is automatically turned on. To turn it off, uncheck Format → Auto correct → While Typing.

Question 42.
How will you insert special character using auto correct?
Answer:
Auto Correct can be used as s quick way to insert special characters. For example, (c) will be auto corrected to (c). You can add your own special characters.

Question 43.
What is Table?
Answer:
A table is a grid with a specified number of rows and columns.

Question 44.
When table can be used in a document?
Answer:
Tables can often be used as an alternative to spreadsheet to organize materials. A well-designed table can help readers understand better what you are trying to convey.

Question 45.
How many methods are there to Insert a table in a document?
Answer:
There are two methods:

  1. Using Table Icon
  2. Using Insert Table dialog box

Question 46.
How wilt you open Insert Table dialog box?
Answer:
To open the Insert Table dialog box:

  1. Select Table → Insert → Table or
  2. Ctrl + F12 or
  3. left-click the Table icon

Question 47.
Write note on Formatting table.
Answer:
Formatting a table involves formatting of the table layout, formatting of the table text, adjusting the size of the table, its position on the page, adding or removing rows or columns, merging and splitting cells, changing borders and the background.

Question 48.
How will you merge the cells of a table?
Answer:
To merge a group of cells:

  1. Select the cells to merge.
  2. Right dick and choose Cell → Merge or choose Table → Merge Cells from the menu bar.

Question 49.
How will you insert a picture in a document?
Answer:
To insert an image from a file, the steps are as follows:

  1. Place the insertion pointer where you want the image to appear.
  2. Select Insert → Picture → From file.
  3. The insert picture dialog box appears where the picture gallery opens from which the desired picture can be selected.
  4. If the picture is not in the gallery, then browse the pictures from the folder, choose the desired one and
    Click on the Open button
  5. The selected picture is inserted into the document.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
Write about OpenOffice software.
Answer:
Open Office is the leading open-source office software suite for word processing, spreadsheets, presentations, graphics, databases and more. It is available in many languages and works on all common computers. It stores all our data in an International open standard format and can also read and write files from other common office software packages.

Question 2.
What are the packages available in OpenOffice software?
Answer:
OpenOffice is a productive office suite with a collection of different software packages such as

  1. OpenOffice Writer – Word Processor to create text documents.
  2. OpenOffice Calc – Spreadsheet to create worksheets.
  3. OpenOffice Base – Database
  4. OpenOffice Impress – Presentation software
  5. OpenOffice Draw – Drawing Software
  6. OpenOffice Formula – Create formula and equations

Question 3.
What are the important features of OpenOffice Writer?
Answer:
OpenOffice Writer provides these important features:

  1. Templates and styles.
  2. Page layout methods, including frames, columns, and tables.
  3. Embedding or linking of graphics, spreadsheets, and other objects.
  4. Built-in drawing tools.
  5. Master documents-to group a collection of documents into a single document.
  6. Change tracking during revisions.
  7. Database integration, including a bibliography database.
  8. Export to PDF.

Question 4.
How will you creating a new document in OpenOffice Writer ?
Answer:
A new OpenOffice Writer document can be created by various methods.

  1. From windows, select
  2. Start → All Programs → OpenOffice → OpenOffice Writer

From Star Center (Welcome Screen):

  1. Double-click on “OpenOffice” icon the desktop
  2. Now, a welcome screen appears as shown in the following figure
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 8

Question 5.
Write about control buttons in window.
Answer:
Control Buttons:
In the right corner of title bar, (1) minimize, (2) maximize/restore and (3) close control buttons are available as shown in the following figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 9

Minimize button :
When we click Minimize button, it shrinks our document window smaller in size and shows it as a small button on the task bar. To restore it in its original size, click on the button, our document is restored to its original size.

Maximize button :
When we click Maximize button, our document window is displayed in full screen. When it is in full screen, the maximize button is changed as “Restore”.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 10
When we click Restore button, the document window regains its original size.

Close button:
This button is called as “Close” button, when you click this button, the application is closed and OpenOffice returns back to the desktop. So, the red colored close button may be called as “Exit” or “Quit”.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 11
There is another X mark on the right most corner of the menu bar. This is actually used to close your document. When we click this X mark, our document will be closed, OpenOffice will be still opened.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 6.
Explain Tool Bar available in OpenOffice Writer window.
Answer:
Under the menu bar, there are two toolbars available by default. They are:

  • Standard Toolbar
  • Formatting Toolbar

Standard Tool Bar:
This tool bar is just below the menu bar which consists of shortcut icons for frequently performed tasks. There are many shortcut icons like cut, copy, paste, undo etc…
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 12

Formatting Tool Bar: The formatting tool bar is below the standard tool bar which consists of icons used for formatting the text like bold, underline, italics, font type, font color etc.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 13

Question 7.
Write short note on closing unsaved document.
Answer:
When we dose an unsaved file using the dose control button, Writer shows a warning message as shown in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 14
If we accept the warning message, dick the “Save” button. When we click the “Save” button, it proceeds to save the file. If we are not willing to save the file, then click “Discard”, or if we want to cancel this warning and continue working in the same document click “Cancel”.

Question 8.
What are the text insertion modes?
Answer:
Insert Mode: To insert a text in between if something is left out, the insertion can be made by taking the insertion pointer to the current location and Press the Insert Key the newly typed text is inserted, so that the existing text moves to the right. This is Insert mode,

Type over mode: Press the Insert Key again, the text is over written on the existing text. This is called Type over mode. We can toggle between the insert mode and type over mode by pressing the Insert key.

Question 9.
Write the procedure to move text.
Answer:
To move a text from one location to another:

  1. Select the text to be moved
  2. Click Ctrl + X or Cut Icon or Edit → Cut
  3. The text is removed from the source location and placed in the clipboard
  4. Take the insertion pointer to the new location to be moved and
  5. Click Ctrl + V or Paste Icon or Edit → Paste

The required text Is moved to the required location.

Question 10.
Write the procedure to copy text.
Answer:
To copy a text from one location to another

  1. select the text to be copied
  2. Click Ctrl + C or Copy Icon or Edit → Copy
  3. A duplicate copy of the text is made and send to the clipboard.
  4. Take the insertion pointer to the new location to be copied and
  5. Click Ctrl + V or Paste Icon or Edit → Paste

The required text is copied to the required location.

Question 11.
Write Cut, Copy and Paste Icons and Shortcut keys.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 15

Question 12.
Explain Paste special option to copy text.
Answer:
Paste Special:
When we move or copy information, the paste option is used to send the information as a whole. But, to move or copy only some aspects of the data, like only it’s formatting or only value, the Paste Special option is used. To use the paste special, select the text and apply move or copy, then at the destination location.

  1. Click Edit → Paste Special (or) press Ctrl+Shift+V, or Alt+E+S the Paste Special dialog box opens
  2. The Paste Special menu varies depending upon the origin and formatting of the text (or object) to be pasted.
  3. Select DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link from the Paste special dialog box.
  4. Select the type of application and click on the OK button.
  5. The copied data is pasted into the document with a link.

Questions 13.
Explain Help system in OpenOffice Writer.
Answer:
Open Office Writer provides several forms of help. By pressing F1 or select Help from the menu bar the help window appears as shown in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 16

  • To activate tooltips, extended tips, and the help Agent, click Tools → Options → OpenOffice General.
  • Enable Tips and Extended Tips check boxes.
  • For a more detailed explanation, select Help → What’s This? and hold the mouse pointer over the icon where you want more help with.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 14.
What are the basic text formatting shortcuts?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 17

Question 15.
How will you change the text case? Explain. Changing Case
Answer:
Normally any text can be typed in upper or lower case. The text can be changed to different cases like:

  • Uppercase (Capital letters)
  • Toggle case (reverse case),
  • Sentence case (first letter of each sentence Capital),
  • Capitalize every word (first letter of each word capital),
  • Lower case. (Small letters)

This can be done by:

  • Select the text to change case
  • Select Format → Change case and select the required one.

Question 16.
How will you change the fine space?
Answer:
Line spacing determines the amount of vertical space between lines of text in a paragraph. By default, the lines are single-spaced.

In Open Office, setting line spacing is quite easy through the context menu, select the line or word or phrase, right-click → line spacing, select the type single, 1.5, double etc. (OR)

  1. Select the entire document by
  2. Edit → Select All
  3. Format → Paragraph
  4. The paragraph dialog box appears, click Indents & Spacing tab
  5. In the line spacing option, select the type and click OK button.

Question 17.
How will you cancel or turning off bullets and numbering?
Answer:
The bullets and numbers can be removed easily.

  1. Select the text where the bullets and numbers are to be removed.
  2. Click on the bullets icon Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 18again to remove bullets.
  3. Click on the numbering icon Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 19 remove numbering.

Question 18.
How will you change the page size?
Answer:
The default page size in Writer is 8.5″ x 11″. However, for different types of documents, we may need to change the page size. To change the paper size:

  1. Select the page whose page size is to be changed.
  2. Select Format → Page, the page style dialog box appears.
  3. Select Page Tab.
  4. In the paper format group, select the format like A4, legal ……
  5. Or the width and height option can be used to set the page size.

Question 19.
How will you change page colour and borders?
Answer:
Changing Page colour:
Changing the page color is not quite common. To do so, in the Page style dialog box, select Background tab, In As option click on color and select the “color” from the color palette or select “graphic” to apply an image as a page background.

Changing borders:
Borders can be applied to an entire document, an entire page, paragraph, or just to certain sections of the document, From the Page style dialog box, select the Border tab, the user defined area helps to define the area of borders, the line style of borders, color of borders can be selected.

Question 20.
Write note on Auto spell check.
Answer:
Auto spell check option checks each word as it is typed and displays a wavy red line under any misspelled words. Once the word is corrected, the red wavy line disappears. This can be done through clicking the icon.

Question 21.
Write note on spell check program.
Answer:
Spell check is a software program that corrects spelling errors in word processing, email and documents. Spell check identifies and corrects misspelled words and the grammatical error is displayed with a green wavy line under the wrong word.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 22.
How will you insert rows/columns in a table?
Answer:
Inserting rows and columns: To insert rows or columns inside a table:
1. Place the insertion pointer in the row or in the column where we would like to add new rows or columns and right-click.

2. Choose Row → Insert – to insert a row or Column → Insert – to insert a column. A dialog box will appear, from which we can select the number of rows or columns to insert. We can also set the position of the new rows or columns to Before or After as shown in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 20

Question 23.
How will you delete rows and columns in a table?
Answer:
To delete rows or columns inside a table:

  1. Place the insertion pointer in the row or column to be deleted and right-click,
  2. Choose Row → Delete – to delete a row or Column → Delete – to delete a column.
  3. The selected row / column is deleted.

Question 24.
How will you split a cell in to more than one in a table?
Answer:
To split a cell:
1. Place the insertion pointer inside the cell.

2. Right click and choose Cell → Split, or choose Table → Split Cells from the menu bar.

3. Select the direction of the split, horizontally (for rows), or vertically (for columns), as well as the total number of cells to create.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 21

Question 25.
How will you insert special characters in a document?
Answer:
Inserting Special Characters:
Many symbols which are used in a mathematical equation like alpha(α), beta(ß), pi(π) etc., are not available on the standard keyboard. To insert such characters, the procedure given below is followed:

  1. Place the insertion pointer in your document where you want the character to appear.
  2. Click on the Insert → Special characters.
  3. The Special characters dialog box appears from which the desired symbol can be selected by clicking on the character.
  4. As we select each character, it is shown on the lower right, along with the numerical code for that character
  5. If we do not find a particular special character we want, try changing the font selection.
  6. Click the OK button and the character is inserted at the current location.

Question 26.
Explain document preview before printing. Preview the document to be printed
Answer:
It Is a good practice to preview the document before taking the print out. The steps to be followed to preview the document:

  1. Click File → Page Preview/, or click the Page Preview/ button. The Writer displays the Page Preview toolbar
  2. In the page preview tool bar dick Multiple Pages Icon to display multiple pages.
  3. To close the preview, click the Close Preview button.

Question 27.
How will you print a document with printer settings?
Answer:
The following are the steps to change the printer setting :
1. Click File → Print or Ctrl + P or Print File Icon which opens the Print dialog box as shown in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 22
2. Click General Tab.

3. Select the required printer from the list of printers.

4. Under Range and copies section : select All Pages option to print all pages, select Pages option to specify the particular page or page range.

5. Specify Number of Copies using spin arrows.

6. Click Print button.

Part – IV

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
Draw and explain the parts of OpenOffice writer window.
Answer:
The following figure shows the contents of OpenOffice Writer window such as Title bar, Menu bar, Standard Toolbar, Formatting Tool bar, Ruler, Work space and Status bar. The components of a openoffice writer window are explained below the figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 23

Title Bar:
The title bar is displayed at the top most part of the window, which displays the name of the document and the name of the application. By default, the initial document is given the name as Untitledl.

Control Buttons: In the right corner of title bar, (1) minimize, (2) maximize/restore and (3) close control buttons are available

Menu Bar: The menu bar is just below the title bar which comprises of various menus consisting of various options.

Tool Bar: Under the menu bar, there are two toolbars available by default.

They are:
(1) Standard Toolbar
(2) Formatting Toolbar

Ruler:
The ruler is a scale below the formatting tool bar which shows the margins. There are two set of rulers (1) Horizontal ruler and (2) Vertical ruler. Horizontal ruler is used to set left and right margins of a page and vertical ruler for top and bottom setting.

Work Space :
The work space is the blank area which is used to type the content of the file, A flashing vertical bar appears at the beginning of the screen which is called as “Insertion pointer”.

Status Bar:
The status bar is at the bottom of the window which shows the current status of the document such as number of pages, current page number, default language etc.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 2.
Explain various menus in the menu bar.
Answer:
Menu Bar:
The menu bar is just below the title bar which comprises of various menus consisting of various options.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 24
File : The File menu contains various option for file management tasks: New, Open, Close, Save, Save As, Print, Export etc.

Edit: The Edit menu contains the editing options like, cut, copy, paste, Undo, Redo etc.

View: The View menu contains the options which are used to modify the environment of writer like display of toolbars, web layout, print layout, navigator etc. ,

Insert: The Insert menu contains commands for inserting various elements such as pictures, tables, charts, comments, headers, footers, special characters etc.

Format : The Format menu contains the options of various text and page formatting features like page size, layout, font characteristics, bullets and numbering etc.

Tables : The Table menu contains various tools to manage and manipulate tables such as create table, insert rows, insert columns, split cells, merge cells etc.

Tools: The Tools menu contains various tools and functions such as spell check, macros, mail merge, end notes/footnotes etc.

Window : The window menu shows display options such as New Window, Close Windows, Split and Freeze.

Help : The Help menu lists out the inbuilt help features available with OpenOffice.

Question 3.
What are the various shortcut keys to move easily within the document?
Answer:
There are different ways of moving within a document. There are many shortcut keys given in the following Table which are used to move easily within a document.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 25

Question 4.
Explain the different methods of selecting the text.
Answer:
Selection using Mouse:

To select the text using mouse:

  • Take the insertion pointer to the start of the text.
  • Hold down the Left mouse button and drag it across the text.
  • Release the mouse button when the required portion of text is selected.
  • The selected text will be highlighted.

Selection using Keyboard:

  • Take the insertion pointer to the start of the text.
  • Hold the Shift key and use the movement keys to drag across the required portion.
  • When the required portion is selected release the Shift key.
  • The selected text will be highlighted.

Selection using Shortcut keys:

  • Shortcut keys help to select the text quickly and easily.
  • To select a word – Double dick on the word
  • To select the entire document – Press Ctrl + A

Question 5.
What are the font formatting options? Explain.
Answer:
a) Changing font type: The default font type is Times New Roman and the type of font can be changed by clicking on the Font Type icon

b) Changing font size: The default size of font is 12 points which can be changed by clicking on the Font Size icon

c) Changing font colour: The default font color is black and the font color can be changed by clicking on the Font colour icon which shows the color palette from which the required color can be selected. The other formatting Options can be selected by using Format → Character.

The Character dialog box is displayed as shown in the following Figure using which ail the formatting can be done at a single stretch with an online preview.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 29

Question 6.
Explain the various paragraph alignments. Paragraph Alignment
Answer:
A paragraph is any text that ends with a hard return. Paragraph Alignment refers to the way in which the lines of a paragraph are aligned. There are four types of alignment available in Open office Writer – left – alignment, Right – alignment, Center – alignment, and Justify – alignment.

Left-alignment: A paragraph’s text is LEFT aligned when it is aligned evenly along the left margin and uneven along the right margin. This is the default alignment when a paragraph is typed.

Right-alignment: A paragraph’s text is RIGHT aligned when it is aligned evenly along the right margin and uneven along the left margin.

Center-alignment: All the lines in the paragraph are aligned to the center of the page size.

Justified-alignment: All the lines in the paragraph, are arranged evenly both on the left and right margins. This is achieved in writer by automatically inserting additional space between the words.

Paragraph formatting can be applied by Format → Paragraph, the paragraph dialog box appears as displayed in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 30
The paragraph formatting can also be done by icons using the formatting tool bar as shown in the following Figure and shortcut keys as shown in the following Table.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 31
Paragraph Alignment Icons and shortcut Keys
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 32
An example showing all the four paragraph alignment:

Left Aligned Text: All power is with in you take up one idea, make that one idea your life. Think of it dream of it, live on that idea let the brain, muscles, nerves, every part of your body be full of that idea.

Right Aligned Text: All power is with in you take up one idea, make that one idea your life. That of it dream of it, live on that idea let the brain, muscles, nerves, every part of your body be full of that idea.

Center Aligned Text: All power is with in you take up one idea, make that one idea your life. Think of it dream of it, live on that idea let the brain, muscles, nerves, every part of your body be full of that idea.

Justified Aligned Text: All power is with in you take up one idea, make that one idea your life. Think of it dream of it, live on that idea let the brain, muscles, nerves, every part of your body be full of that idea.

Question 7.
What is indenting text? Explain the various methods.
Answer:
Indent is the distance from the left and right margin of a paragraph. It is used to improve the efficiency and readability of the paragraph and makes the paragraph look more attractive. There are four types of indents:

  • Left Indent
  • Right Indent
  • First Line Indent and
  • Hanging Indent

Left indent: The Left indent controls the space between the paragraph and the left margin. This is the default indent. Each click on the Increase indent icon moves the paragraph Vi inch away from the left margin.

The left indent can also be applied by Format → Paragraph → Indents & Spacing tab, enter a value in the “before text” spin box. This results in a left indent.

Right Indent: The Right indent controls the space between the paragraph and the right margin. Each click on the decrease indent icon removes the indent applied by the Increase indent. The Right indent can be applied by the dialog box method. Select Format → Paragraph → Indents & Spacing tab, enter a value in “after text” spin box. This results in a right indent.

First Line Indent: A first-line indentation indents the first line of the paragraph. It is the most common way to start a new paragraph. This indent can be applied by Format → Paragraph → Indents & Spacing tab, select first line option in the Indent group, enter a positive value which results in first line indent.

Hanging indent: This is a special kind of indent where the first line of the paragraph alone hangs outside leaving the rest of the text. To apply Hanging indent, a negative value is given in the “first line” option of the paragraph dialog box.

Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 33

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 8.
Explain Bullets and Numbering text with suitable example.
Answer:
Bullets and numbering are used to emphasize list of things and make list easy to read and follow. It provides an excellent way to segregate, list and organize information for a reader.

Bullets: This is a paragraph level attribute that applies a bullet character to the start of the paragraph. In bulleted lists, each paragraph begins with a bullet character.

This is suitable when the text has to be presented as a list of items preceded by a bullet symbol and no sequence has to be followed. Bullets are quickly created by clicking on the bullet icon Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 26

Numbering : This attribute applies a numeral to the start of the paragraph. Numbering is more suitable when the text has to be presented as a sequence. In numbered list, each paragraph begins with an expression that includes a number or letter and a separator such as a period or parenthesis.

The numbers in a numbered list are updated automatically when we add or remove paragraphs in the list. Numbering is quickly created by clicking on the numbering icon Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 27.

Style of Bullets and Numbering:
The default type of bullet is ( . ) and the default type of numbering is (1, 2, 3 …. ). The style of bullets and numbering can be changed by applying the following steps:

  • Select the text to be bulleted
  • Format → Bullets and Numbering
  • Select Bullets Tab
  • The Bullets and Numbering dialog box appears where different styles of bullets are displayed
  • Click on the required style
  • Click Ok button
  • The selected text is bulleted.

Example:

  • CHENNAI
  • MADURAI
  • TIRUNELVELI

To apply Numbering:

  • Select the text to be numbered
  • Format → Bullets and Numbering
  • Select Numbering Type Tab
  • The Bullets and Numbering dialog box appears where different styles of numbering are displayed
  • Click on the particular style
  • Click Ok button
  • The selected text is numbered.

Example:

  • CHENNAI
  • MADURAI
  • TIRUNELVELI

Question 9.
Explain the methods of changing page margins.
Answer:
Page margins are the white space around the top, bottom, left, and right of your document. Margins let Writer know where to start placing the text at the top of a document, when to move on to the next page at the bottom, where to start typing text on the left side, and where to stop and move to the next line on the right.

Changing or setting page margins in Open office writer can be done in two ways:

  • Using the Rulers – quick and easy, but does not have precise values.
  • Using the Page Style dialog box – can specify precise values for the margins.

Changing Page Margins – using Ruler

  • The shaded sections of the rulers are the margins.
  • Hold the mouse pointer over the line between the gray and white sections.
  • The mouse pointer turns into a double-headed arrow.
  • Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to move the margin and release it at the required point.
  • The new margin is set.

Changing Page Margins – using the Page Style dialog box:

To change margins using the Page Style dialog box

  • Right-click anywhere on the page and select Page from the popup menu and select page tab of page style dialog box.
  • In the Margins boxes, specify the values for left, right, top and bottom margins.
  • Click on ok button.

Question 10.
What is meant by Automatic correction? How will you add an entry in the Auto correct list.
Answer:
Auto Correct function has the facility to correct the common misspellings and typing errors, automatically. For example, “hte” will be changed  to “the” which can be done through the menu option, Tools → Auto Correct to open the Auto Correct dialog box which provides the chance to change the misspelled word by a default name.

1. To stop the Writer to replace specific spellings, use Tools → Auto Correct, highlight the word pair and click Delete.

2. To add a new spelling to correct, type it into the Replace and With boxes and click New.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 34

Procedure to add an entry in Auto correct list:
The following steps to correct the word “computer” into “computer” automatically by adding entry in the auto correct list.

  • Goto Tools → Auto correct Options
  • Click the Replace tab and type “computer” in Replace text box and “computer” in With text box. Then Click OK.
  • The word “Computer” is replaced with “Computer” and displayed in the list.
  • After entering this, when you type “computer” in the document, it will be automatically changed to the correct spelling “computer”.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer)

Question 11.
Explain the different methods of inserting a table in a document.
Answer:
There are two methods to create a table :
1. Using Table Icon Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 28To insert a table quickly from the standard tool bar:

  • Place the insertion pointer where we want the table to appear.
  • Click the arrow to the right side of the Table icon.
  • In the drop down grid, select the number of rows and columns for the table.
  • The table will appear at the location of our insertion pointer.

2. Using Insert table dialog box – Select Table → Insert → Table or Ctrl + F12 or left-click the Table icon. From the dialog box, we can:

  • Select the number of rows and columns of the table.
  • Give a Name to the table to later distinguish it in the Navigator.
  • Select the Heading option to define the first row in the table as the heading.
  • Select the Repeat heading option to repeat the heading row if the table spans more than one page.
  • Select the Don’t split table option to prevent the table from spanning more than one page.
  • Select the Border option to surround each cell of the table with a border.
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 35

The Auto Format button at the bottom of the dialog box opens the Auto Format dialog box. From here it is possible to choose among different predefined formats.

Questions 12.
How will you insert shapes in a document by drawing it?
Answer:
Inserting Shapes:
OpenOffice writer uses the drawing tools, to create various shapes by using the Drawing toolbar. The drawing tool bar can be obtained by clicking View → Toolbars → Drawing as displayed on the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 6 Word Processor Basics (OpenOffice Writer) 36
To use a drawing tool, the steps are as given below:

  • Click In the document where we want the drawing to be anchored.
  • Select the Tool from the Drawing toolbar as shown in the above Figure. The mouse pointer changes to a drawing-functions pointer.
  • Move the cross-hair pointer to the place in the document where we want the graphic to appear and then click-and-drag to create the drawing object.
  • Release the mouse button. The selected drawing function remains active, so we can draw another object of the same type.
  • To cancel the selected drawing function, press the Esc key or dick on the Select icon on the Drawing toolbar.

Question 13.
Explain Auto Text in detail.
Answer:
Inserting Auto Text: Auto Text allows you to assign text, tables, graphics and other items to a key or key combination. For example, rather than typing “TamilNadu” every time you use that phrase, we might just type “tn” and press F3. We can also save a formatted Tip as Auto Text and then insert a copy by typing “tip” and pressing F3.

To assign Auto Text shortcut to some text, the steps are as follows:

  • Type the text into our document.
  • Select the text so that it is highlighted.
  • Select Edit → Auto Text (or press Ctrl+F3).
  • Enter a name for our shortcut. Writer will suggest a one-letter shortcut, which you can change.
  • Click on the inverted arrow of the Auto Text button on the right and select New (text only) from the menu.
  • Click Close to return to our document.
  • Once the entry is created, to insert the auto text into the document, place the cursor where the text is to be inserted and dick Ctrl+F3,
  • Select the name from the list of entries and click Insert button.
  • The auto text is inserted into our text.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 3 Computer Organisation Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

11th Computer Applications Guide Computer Organisation Text Book Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
Which of the following is said to be the brain of a computer?
a) Input devices
b) Output devices
c) Memory device
d) Microprocessor
Answer:
d) Microprocessor

Question 2.
Which of the following is not the part of a microprocessor unit?
a) ALU
b) Control unit
c) Cache memory
d) register
Answer:
c) Cache memory

Question 3.
How many bits constitute a word?
a) 8
b) 16
c) 32
d) determined by the processor used
Answer:
d) determined by the processor used

Question 4.
Which of the following device identifies the location when address is placed in the memory address register?
a) Locator
b) encoder
c) decoder
d) multiplexer
Answer:
c) decoder

Question 5.
Which of the following is a CISC processor?
a) Intel P6
b) AMD K6
c) Pentium III
d) Pentium IV
Answer:
c) Pentium III

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 6.
Which is the fastest memory?
a) Hard disk
b) Main memory
c) Cache memory
d) Blue – Ray dist
Answer:
c) Cache memory

Question 7.
How many memory locations are identified by a processor with 8 bits address bus at a time?
a) 28
b) 1024
c) 256
d) 8000
Answer:
c) 256

Question 8.
What is the capacity of 12 cm diameter DVD with single bided and single layer?
a) 4.7 GB
b) 5.5 GB
c) 7.8 GB
d) 2.2 GB
Answer:
a) 4.7 GB

Question 9.
What is the smallest size of data represented in a CD?
a) blocks
b) sectors
c) pits
d) tracks
Answer:
c) pits

Question 10.
Display devices are connected to the computer through.
a) USB port
b) Ps/2 port
c) SCSI port
d) VGA connector
Answer:
d) VGA connector

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the parameters which influence the ‘ characteristics of a microprocessor?
Answer:
A Microprocessor’s performance depends on the following characteristics:

  1. Clock speed
  2. Instruction set
  3. Word size

Question 2.
What is an instruction?
Answer:
A command which is given to a computer to perform an operation on data is called an instruction.

Question 3.
What is a program counter?
Answer:
The Program Counter (PC) is a special register in the CPU which always keeps the address of the next instruction to be executed.

Question 4.
What is HDMI?
Answer:
High-Definition Multimedia Interface is an audio/ video interface which transfers the uncompressed video and audio data from a video controller, to a compatible computer monitor, LCD projector, digital television etc.

Question 5.
Which source is used to erase the content of a EPROM?
Answer:
EPROM retains its contents until it is exposed to ultraviolet light. The ultraviolet light clears its contents.

Part – III

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
Differentiate Computer Organization from Computer Architecture.
Answer:

  1. The computer architecture deals with the engineering considerations involved in designing a computer.
  2. The Computer Organization deals with the hardware components that are transparent to the programmer.

Question 2.
Classify the microprocessor based on the size of the data.
Answer:
Depending on the data width, microprocessors can process instructions. The microprocessors can be classified as follows:

  1. 8 – bit microprocessor
  2. 16 – bit microprocessor
  3. 32 – bit microprocessor
  4. 64 – bit microprocessor

Question 3.
Write down the classifications of microprocessors based on the instruction set.
Answer:
The two types of microprocessors based on their instruction sets are –
(i) Reduced Instruction Set Computers (RISC):
RISC stands for Reduced Instruction Set Computers. They have a small set of highly optimized instructions. Complex instructions are also implemented using simple instructions, thus reducing the size of the instruction set.

Examples of RISC processors are Pentium IV, Intel P6, AMD K6 and K7.

(ii) Complex Instruction Set Computers (CISC) –
CISC stands for Complex Instruction Set Computers. They support hundreds of instructions. Computers supporting CISC can accomplish a wide variety of tasks, making them ideal for personal computers.

Examples of CISC processors are Intel 386 & 486, Pentium, Pentium II and III, and Motorola 68000.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 4.
Differentiate PROM arid EPROM.
Answer:
An EPROM differs from a PROM. PROM can be written only once and cannot be erased. EPROMs are used widely in personal computers because they enable the manufacturer to change the contents of the PROM to replace with updated versions or erase the contents before the computer is delivered.

Question 5.
Write down the interfaces and ports available In a computer.
Answer:
The various types of ports interfaces are:

  1. Serial Port: To connect the external devices, found in old computers.
  2. Parallel Port: To connect the printers, found in old computers.
  3. USB Ports: To connect external devices like cameras, scanners, mobile phones, external hard disks and printers to the computer.
  4. VGA Connector: To connect a monitor or any display device like LCD projector.
  5. Audio Plugs: To connect sound speakers, microphone and headphones.
  6. PS/2 Port: To connect mouse and keyboard to PC.
  7. SCSI Port: To connect the hard disk drives and network connectors.

Question 6.
Differentiate CD and DVD.
Answer:
CD-ROM:

  • Compact Disk Read Only Memory
  • The capacity of an ordinary CD- ROM is 700MB.
  • Data Transfer rate 1.4 to 1.6 MB/Sec
  • Pits length is 0.83 Micron
  • Distance between disc surface and data surface is 1.1 mm
  • It can not play DVDs

DVD-ROM:

  • Digital Versatile Disc Read Only Memory
  • Single layer has capable of storing up to 4.7 GB of data, more than six times what a CD can hold. Double layer has 8.5 GB capacity.
  • Data Transfer rate 11 MB/Sec
  • Pits length is 0.4 Micron
  • Distance between disc surface and data surface is 0.6 mm
  • It can play CDs also

Question 7.
How will you differentiate a flash memory and an EEPROM?
Answer:
Flash Memory:

  • It offers fast access times.
  • The capacity of the flash memories vary from 1 Gigabytes (GB) to 2 Terabytes (TB).
  • It offers between 100 and 1000 rewrites in 78K

EEPROM:

  • It offers lower access time
  • EEPROM with Megabyte capacity is available.
  • EEPROM usually guarantees at least 100,000 rewrites

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Part – IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain the characteristics of a microprocessor.
Answer:
A Microprocessor’s performance depends on the following characteristics:
(a) Clock speed
(b) Instruction set
(c) Word size
(a) Clock Speed:
Every microprocessor has an internal clock that regulates the speed at which it executes instructions. The speed at which the microprocessor executes instructions is called the clock speed. Clock speed is measured in MHz (Mega Hertz) or in GHz (Giga Hertz).

(b) Instruction Set:
A command which is given to a computer to perform an operation on data is called an instruction. Basic set of machine level instructions that a microprocessor is designed to execute is called as an instruction set.

This instruction set carries out the following types of operations:

  • Data transfer
  • Arithmetic operations
  • Logical operations
  • Control flow
  • Input/output

(c) Word Size
The number of bits that can be processed by a processor in a single instruction is ailed its word size. Word size determines the amount of RAM that can be accessed by a microprocessor at one time and the total number of pins on the microprocessor, total number of input and output pins in urn determines the architecture of the microprocessor.

Question 2.
How the read and write operations are performed by a processor? Explain.
Answer:
The Central Processing Unit(CPU) has a Memory Data Register (MDR) and a Memory Address Register (MAR). The Memory Data Register (MDR) keeps the data which is transferred between the Memory and the CPU.

The Program Counter (PC) is a special register CPU which always keeps the address of the instruction to be executed. The Arithmetic [Logic unit of CPU places the address of the memory to be fetched, into the Memory Address Register.

A bus is a collection of wires used for communication between the internal components are computer. The address bus is used to point a memory location. A decoder, a digital circuit is used to point to the specific memory location where the word can be located.

The address register is connected with the address bus, which provides the address of the instruction. A data bus is used to transfer data between the memory and the CPU.

The data bus is bidirectional and the address unidirectional. The control bus controls both read and write. The read operation fetches data from by and transfers to MDR. A single control line performs two operations like Read/Write using 1 or 2. Also, the write operation transfers data from the MDR to memory. This organization is shown in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation 1
If the size of the MDR is eight bits, which can be connected with a word in the memory which is also eight bits size. The data bus has eight parallel wires to transfer data either from MDR to word or word to MDR based on the control(Read or write). This control line is labeled as R/W, which becomes 1 means READ operation and 0 means WRITE operation.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation 2
The read operation transfers the data(bits) from word to Memory Data Register. The write operation transfers the data(bits) from Memory Data Register to word.

Question 3.
Arrange the memory devices in ascending order based on the access time.
Answer:
Different memory devices are arranged according to the capacity, speed and cost as shown in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation 3
The memory devices in ascending order based on the access time:
a) Hard disk
b) Main memory (RAM)
c) Cache memory

Question 4.
Explain the types of ROM.
Answer:
Types of ROM
Read Only Memory (ROM):
Read Only Memory refers to special memory in a computer with pre-recorded data at manufacturing time which cannot be modified. The stored programs that start the computer and perform diagnostics are available in ROMs.

ROM stores critical programs such as the program that boots the computer. Once the data has been written onto a ROM chip, it cannot be modified or removed and can only be read. ROM retains its contents even when the computer is turned off. So, ROM is called as a non-volatile memory.

Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM):
Programmable read only memory is also a non-volatile memory on which data can be written only once. Once a program has been written onto a PROM, it remains there forever. Unlike the main memory, PROMs retain their contents even when the computer is turned off.

The PROM differs from ROM. PROM is manufactured as a blank memory, whereas a ROM is programmed during the manufacturing process itself. PROM programmer or a PROM burner is used to write data to a PROM chip. The process of programming a PROM is called burning the PROM.

Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM):
Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory is a special type of memory which serves as a PROM, but the content can be erased using ultraviolet rays. EPROM retains its contents until it is exposed to ultraviolet light. The ultraviolet light clears its contents, making it possible to reprogram the memory. An EPROM differs from a PROM, PROM can be written only once and cannot be erased.

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) :
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory is a special type of PROM that can be erased by exposing it to an electrical charge. Like other types of PROM, EEPROM retains its contents even when the power is turned off. Comparing with all other types of ROM, EEPROM is slower in performance.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

11th Computer Applications Guide Computer Organisation Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
Computer organization deals with the of a computer.
a) software
b) hardware
c) freeware
d) None of these
Answer:
b) hardware

Question 2.
Computer organization includes _______.
a) Input / Output devices
b) Central Processing Unit
c) storage devices and primary memory
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 3.
_______ deals with the engineering considerations involved in designing a computer.
a) Computer organization
b) Computer architecture
c) Computer Science
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Computer architecture

Question 4.
_______ deals with the hardware components that are transparent to the programmer.
a) Computer organization
b) Computer architecture
c) Computer Science
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Computer organization

Question 5.
The _______ is the major component of a computer.
a) Storage device
b) CPU
c) Cache memory
d) All the above
Answer:
b) CPU

Question 6.
In a computer, _______ performs all tasks.
a) ALU
b) CPU
c) Input devices
d) All the above
Answer:
b) CPU

Question 7.
The microprocessors were first introduced in early _______.
a) 1960
b) 1950
c) 1970
d) 1980
Answer:
c) 1970

Question 8.
The first general purpose microprocessor, 4004 was developed by _______
a) Intel Inc
b) Apple Inc
c) BBC Micro
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Intel Inc

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 9.
The _______ is a programmable multipurpose silicon chip.
a) Transistor
b) Vacuum tube
c) Microprocessor
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Microprocessor

Question 10.
_______ is driven by clock pulses,
a) Transistor
b) Vacuum tube
c) Microprocessor
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Microprocessor

Question 11.
The microprocessor is made up of _______ main units.
a) 5
b) 4
c) 2
d) 3
Answer:
d) 3

Question 12.
_______ is the main unit of a microprocessor.
a) ALU
b) registers
c) control unit
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 13.
_______ perform arithmetic and logical instructions based on computer instructions.
a) ALU
b) registers
c) control unit
d) All the above
Answer:
a) ALU

Question 14.
_________ control the overall operations of the computer through signals.
a) ALU
b) registers
c) control unit
d) All the above
Answer:
c) control unit

Question 15.
_______ is used to hold the instruction and data for the execution of the processor.
a) ALU
b) registers
c) control unit
d) All the above
Answer:
b) registers

Question 16.
The _________ is able to communicate with the memory units and the Input / Output devices.
a) transistor
b) vacuum tube
c) microprocessor
d) None of these
Answer:
c) microprocessor

Question 17.
The system _______ is a bunch of wires that serves as communication channels between the microprocessor and other devices.
a) bus
b) cable
c) port
d) none of these
Answer:
a) bus

Question 18.
_______ is a type of bus.
a) address bus
b) data bus
c) control bus
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 19.
A Microprocessor’s performance depends on the _______ characteristic.
a) Clock speed
b) Instruction set
c) Word size
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 20.
Hertz – abbreviated as _______.
a) Hz
b) Htz
c) Hrz
d) Hez
Answer:
a) Hz

Question 21.
_______ is the standard unit of measurement used for measuring frequency.
a) Hertz
b) Pixels
c) Bits
d) Bytes
Answer:
a) Hertz

Question 22.
Hertz is commonly used to measure _______ wave frequency.
a) sound waves
b) light waves
c) radio waves
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 23.
The average human ear can detect _______ Hz sound waves.
a) between 20 and 20,000 Hz
b) upto 10000 Hz
c) Less than 5000
d) None of these
Answer:
a) between 20 and 20,000 Hz

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 24.
Sound waves close to 20 Hz have a low pitch and are called _________ frequencies.
a) treble
b) bass
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) bass

Question 25.
Sound waves above 5,000 Hz have a high pitch and are called “treble” frequencies.
a) treble
b) bass
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) treble

Question 26.
_______ is also used to measure the speed of computer processors.
a) Hours
b) Seconds
c) Bytes
d) Hertz
Answer:
d) Hertz

Question 27.
Each CPU is rated at a specific _______ speed.
a) clock
b) bus
c) cable
d) wave
Answer:
a) clock

Question 28.
_______ indicates how many instruction cycles the processor can perform in every second.
a) clock speed
b) bus speed
c) wave speed
d) none of these
Answer:
a) clock speed

Question 29.
The modern processors can perform _______ instructions per second.
a) millions
b) billions
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 30.
The clock speeds are typically measured in _______.
a) megahertz
b) gigahertz
c) megahertz or gigahertz
d) None of these
Answer:
c) megahertz or gigahertz

Question 31.
Every microprocessor has a(n) _________ that regulates the speed at which it executes instructions.
a) internal clock
b) control bus
c) speed bus
d) none of these
Answer:
a) internal clock

Question 32.
The speed at which the microprocessor executes instructions is called the _______ .
a) cycle speed
b) clock speed
c) transfer rate
d) none of these
Answer:
b) clock speed

Question 33.
A command which is given to a computer to perform an operation on data is called an _______.
a) code
b) program
c) instruction
d) None of these
Answer:
c) instruction

Question 34.
Basic set of machine level instructions that a microprocessor is designed to execute is called as a(n) _______ .
a) algorithm
b) pseudo code
c) code
d) instruction set
Answer:
d) instruction set

Question 35.
The instruction set carries out the _________ operations.
a) Data transfer and Arithmetic operations
b) Logical operations and Control flow
c) Input/output
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 36.
The number of bits that can be processed by a processor in a single instruction is called its _______.
a) word size
b) clock speed
c) program execution
d) none of these
Answer:
a) word size

Question 37.
_______ determines the amount of RAM that can be accessed by a microprocessor.
a) word size
b) clock speed
c) program execution
d) none of these
Answer:
a) word size

Question 38.
Total number of _______ pins determines the architecture of the microprocessor.
a) input
b) output
c) input and output
d) None of these
Answer:
c) input and output

Question 39.
The first commercial microprocessor is _______.
a) Intel 3004
b) Intel 4044
c) Intel 4004
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Intel 4004

Question 40.
The microprocessor Intel 4004 is a _______ bit processor.
a) 32
b) 16
c) 8
d) 4
Answer:
d) 4

Question 41.
In a microprocessor, number of output pins is always equal to the number of _______ pins.
a) input
b) result
c) memory
d) none of these
Answer:
a) input

Question 42.
A microprocessor which consists of 4 input pins and 4 output pins can process _______ bit at a time.
a) 32
b) 16
c) 8
d) 4
Answer:
d) 4

Question 43.
A microprocessor which consists of 4 input pins and 4 output pins are called _______ bit micro processor.
a) 32
b) 16
c) 8
d) 4
Answer:
d) 4

Question 44.
Intel 8085 is a(n) _______ bit processor.
a) 32
b) 16
c) 8
d) 4
Answer:
c) 8

Question 45.
Intel 8086 is a(n) _______ bit processor.
a) 32
b) 16
c) 8
d) 4
Answer:
a) 32

Question 46.
Currently most of the microprocessors use _______ bit architecture.
a) 32
b) 64
c) 32 bit or 64
d) 32 bit or 16
Answer:
c) 32 bit or 64

Question 47.
The CPU has a _______.
a) MDR
b) MAR
c) MDR and MAR
d) None of these
Answer:
c) MDR and MAR

Question 48.
MDR stands for _______.
a) Memory Data Register
b) Memory Data Record
c) Memory Data Regulator
d) Memory Design Register
Answer:
a) Memory Data Register

Question 49.
MAR stands for _______.
a) Memory Access Register
b) Memory Accumulator Register
c) Memory Assign Register
d) Memory Address Register
Answer:
d) Memory Address Register

Question 50.
The _______ keeps the data which is transferred between the Memory and the CPU.
a) Memory Data Register
b) Memory Address Register
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Memory Data Register

Question 51.
_______ is a special register in the CPU which always keeps the address of the next instruction to be executed.
a) Page counter
b) Program counter
c) Program cycle
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Program counter

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 52.
The _______ places the address of the memory to be fetched, into the Memory Address Register,
a) Control unit
b) Arithmetic and Logic unit
c) Memory unit
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Arithmetic and Logic unit

Question 53.
A _______ is a collection of wires used for communication between the internal components of a computer.
a) driver
b) microprocessor
c) cable
d) bus
Answer:
d) bus

Question 54.
The _______ bus; is used to point a memory location.
a) data
b) address
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) address

Question 55.
A digital circuit is used to point to the specific memory location where the word can be located is called a _______.
a) decoder
b) encoder
c) locator
d) pointer
Answer:
a) decoder

Question 56.
A _______ bus is used to transfer data between the memory and the CPU.
a) address
b) data
c) instruction
d) word
Answer:
b) data

Question 57.
The _______ bus is bidirectional.
a) address
b) data
c) instruction
d) control
Answer:
b) data

Question 58.
The _______ bus is unidirectional.
a) address
b) data
c) instruction
d) control
Answer:
a) address

Question 59.
The _______ bus controls both read and write operations.
a) address
b) data
c) instruction
d) control
Answer:
d) control

Question 60.
The _________ operation fetches data from memory and transfers to MDR.
a) write
b) read
c) input/output
d) none of these
Answer:
b) read

Question 61.
The _______ operation transfers data from the MDR to memory.
a) write
b) read
c) input/output
d) none of these
Answer:
a) write

Question 62.
The word in the _______ has the same size (no. of bits) as the Memory Data Register (MDR).
a) ROM
b) RAM
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) RAM

Question 63.
If the processor is an 8-bit processor like Intel 8085, its MDR and the word in the RAM both have _______.
a) 4 bits each
b) 8 bits
c) 16 bits
d) None of these
Answer:
b) 8 bits

Question 64.
The microprocessors can be classified based on the _______ criteria.
a) width of data that can be processed
b) instruction set
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 65.
_______ is one of the microprocessors classifications.
a) 8/16 bit microprocessor
b) 32 bit microprocessor
c) 64 bit microprocessor
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 66.
_______ is classification of Microprocessors based on Instruction Set.
a) RISC
b) CISC
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 67.
RISC stands for _______.
a) Random Instruction Set Computers
b) Rich Instruction Set Computers
c) Reduced Instruction Sequence Computers
d) Reduced Instruction Set Computers
Answer:
d) Reduced Instruction Set Computers

Question 68.
CISC stands for _______.
a) Complex Instruction Set Computers
b) Compulsory Instruction Set Computers
c) Common Instruction Sequence Computers
d) Critical Instruction Set Computers
Answer:
a) Complex Instruction Set Computers

Question 69.
Identify the True statement from the following.
a) RISC processor have a small set of highly optimized instructions.
b) Computers supporting CISC can accomplish a wide variety of tasks, making them deal for personal computers.
c) Computer memory is the storage space in the computer, where data and instructions are stored)
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 70.
_______ is a RISC processor.
a) Pentium IV
b) Intel P6 and AMD K6
c) K7
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 71.
_______ is a CISC processor.
a) Intel 386 & 486
b) Pentium II and III
c) Motorola 68000
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 72.
A _______ is just like a human brain.
a) memory
b) processor
c) bus
d) none of these
Answer:
a) memory

Question 73.
_______ is used to store data and instructions.
a) memory
b) processor
c) bus
d) none of these
Answer:
a) memory

Question 74.
There are _______ types of accessing methods to access the memory.
a) four
b) three
c) two
d) none of these
Answer:
c) two

Question 75.
_______ is the memory operation.
a) read
b) write
c) read and write
d) none of these
Answer:
c) read and write

Question 76.
_______ is a memory accessing method.
a) sequential
b) random
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 77.
In _______ access, the memory is accessed in an orderly manner from starting to end.
a) sequential
b) random
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) sequential

Question 78.
In _______ access, any byte of memory can be accessed directly without navigating through previous bytes.
a) sequential
b) random
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) random

Question 79.
The main memory is otherwise called .
a) ROM
b) RAM
c) storage device
d) None of these
Answer:
b) RAM

Question 80.
RAM is available in computers in the form of _______.
a) integrated circuits
b) internal circuits
c) information circuits
d) none of these
Answer:
a) integrated circuits

Question 81.
The Operating System, Application Programs and the data in current use are kept in _______.
a) ROM
b) EPROM
c) DVD
d) RAM
Answer:
d) RAM

Question 82.
The processor can access data and program available in _______.
a) ROM
b) EPROM
c) DVD
d) RAM
Answer:
d) RAM

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 83.
The smallest unit of information that can be stored in the memory is called as a _______.
a) Byte
b) Bit
c) Nibble
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Bit

Question 84.
The memory can be accessed by a collection of 8 bits which is called as a _______.
a) Byte
b) Bit
c) Nibble
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Byte

Question 85.
1 megabyte of memory, then it can store _______ characters.
a) 10,48,576
b) 12,48,576
c) 10,24,576
d) 10,48,286
Answer:
a) 10,48,576

Question 86.
1 megabyte of memory, then it can store _______ of information.
a) 10,48,576 bytes
b) 10,48,576 bits
c) 10,24,576 bytes
d) 10,48,286 bytes
Answer:
a) 10,48,576 bytes

Question 87.
_________ is a volatile memory.
a) ROM
b) EPROM
c) RAM
d) CD-ROM
Answer:
c) RAM

Question 88.
The information stored in _______ is not permanent.
a) ROM
b) EPROM
c) RAM
d) CD-ROM
Answer:
c) RAM

Question 89.
As soon as the power is turned off, whatever data that resides in _______ is lost.
a) ROM
b) EPROM
c) RAM
d) CD-ROM
Answer:
c) RAM

Question 90.
_______ allows both read and write operations.
a) ROM
b) RAM
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) RAM

Question 91.
There are _______ basic types of RAM.
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) More than 4
Answer:
a) 2

Question 92.
_______ is a type of RAM.
a) SRAM
b) DRAM
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 93.
SRAM means _______.
a) Static RAM
b) Simple RAM
c) Serial RAM
d) Sensitive RAM
Answer:
a) Static RAM

Question 94.
DRAM means _______.
a) Dynamic RAM
b) Dual RAM
c) Digital RAM
d) Discrete RAM
Answer:
a) Dynamic RAM

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 95.
_______ RAM being a common type needs to be refreshed frequently.
a) SRAM
b) DRAM
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) DRAM

Question 96.
_______ RAM needs to be refreshed less often, which makes it faster.
a) SRAM
b) DRAM
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) SRAM

Question 97.
_______ RAM is more expensive.
a) SRAM
b) DRAM
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) SRAM

Question 98.
_______ memory in a computer with pre-recorded data at manufacturing time which cannot be modified.
a) ROM
b) EPROM
c) RAM
d) CD-ROM
Answer:
a) ROM

Question 99.
The stored programs that start the computer and perform diagnostics are available in _______.
a) ROM
b) EPROM
c) RAM
d) CD-ROM
Answer:
a) ROM

Question 100.
_________ stores critical programs such as the program that boots the computer.
a) ROM
b) EPROM
c) RAM
d) CD-ROM
Answer:
a) ROM

Question 101.
_______ retains its contents even when the computer is turned off.
a) ROM
b) RAM
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) ROM

Question 102.
_______ is called as a non-volatile memory.
a) ROM
b) RAM
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) ROM

Question 103.
_______ is manufactured as a blank memory.
a) ROM
b) PROM
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) PROM

Question 104.
_______ is programmed during the manufacturing process itself.
a) ROM
b) EPROM
C) RAM
d) CD-ROM
Answer:
a) ROM

Question 105.
_______ is used to write data to a PROM chip.
a) PROM programmer
b) PROM burner
d) None of these
Answer:
c) A or B

Question 106.
The process of programming a PROM is called _______ the PROM.
a) writing
b) storing
c) recording
d) burning
Answer:
d) burning

Question 107.
_______ serves as a PROM, but the content can be erased using ultraviolet rays.
a) EPROM
b) RAM
c) CD-ROM
d) None of these
Answer:
a) EPROM

Question 108.
_______ retains its contents until it is exposed to ultraviolet light.
a) EPROM
b) RAM
c) CD-ROM
d) None of these
Answer:
a) EPROM

Question 109.
_______ is a special type of PROM that can be erased by exposing it to an electrical charge.
a) EPROM
b) RAM
c) EEPROM
d) None of these
Answer:
c) EEPROM

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 110.
Comparing with all other types of ROM, _______ is slower in performance.
a) EPROM
b) RAM
c) EEPROM
d) None of these
Answer:
c) EEPROM

Question 111.
The _______ memory is a very high speed.
a) EPROM
b) RAM
c) EEPROM
d) Cache
Answer:
d) Cache

Question 112.
The _______ memory is an expensive memory.
a) EPROM
b) RAM
c) EEPROM
d) Cache
Answer:
d) Cache

Question 113.
________ memory is used to speed up the memory retrieval process.
a) ROM
b) RAM
c) DVD
d) Cache
Answer:
d) Cache

Question 114.
________ memory helps to achieve the fast response time.
a) ROM
b) RAM
c) DVD
d) Cache
Answer:
d) Cache

Question 115.
________ refers to how quickly the memory can respond to a read / write request.
a) Access time
b) Fetch time
c) Execute time
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Access time

Question 116.
________ memory is expensive and volatile.
a) Main memory
b) Secondary memory
c) Axillary memory
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Main memory

Question 117.
To store data and programs permanently, _______ devices are used.
a) Main memory
b) Secondary storage
c) ROM
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Secondary storage

Question 118.
_______ devices serve as a supportive storage to main memory.
a) ROM
b) Secondary storage
c) printing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Secondary storage

Question 119.
________ devices are non-volatile in nature.
a) Main memory
b) Secondary storage
c) Cache memory
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Secondary storage

Question 120.
________ device is also called as Backup storage.
a) Main memory
b) Secondary storage
c) Cache memory
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Secondary storage

Question 121.
_______ is a magnetic disk on which you can store data.
a) Hard disk
b) CD-ROM
c) RAM
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Hard disk

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 122.
The _______ has the stacked arrangement of disks accessed by a pair of heads for each of the disks.
a) Hard disk
b) CD-ROM
c) RAM
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Hard disk

Question 123.
The _______ come with a single or double sided disk.
a) Hard disk
b) CD-ROM
c) RAM
d) All the above.
Answer:
a) Hard disk

Question 124.
CD-ROM is made from _______ millimeters thick, polycarbonate plastic material.
a) 1.2
b) 1.4
c) 0.2
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 1.2

Question 125.
CD data is represented as tiny indentations known as _______.
a) pixels
b) bits
c) block
d) pics
Answer:
d) pics

Question 126.
The areas between pits are known as _______.
a) fields
b) rings
c) blocks
d) lands
Answer:
d) lands

Question 127.
The capacity of an ordinary CD – ROM is _______ MB.
a) 720
b) 700
c) 320
d) 640
Answer:
b) 700

Question 128.
DVDstands for _______.
a) Digital Versatile Disc
b) Digital Video Disc
c) Digital Virtual Disc
d) Either A or B
Answer:
a) Digital Versatile Disc

Question 129.
________ are often used to store movies at a better quality.
a) Hard disk
b) DVD
c) Floppy
d) All the above
Answer:
b) DVD

Question 130.
________ are read with a laser.
a) CD
b) DVD
c) RAM
d) both A and
Answer:
d) both A and

Question 131.
The DVD can have _______ of data per side.
a) one or two sides
b) one or two layers
c) both A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A or B

Question 132.
The _______ determines how much it can hold in a DVD.
a) number of sides
b) layers
c) number of sides and layers
d) None of these
Answer:
c) number of sides and layers

Question 133.
A 12 cm diameter DVD with single sided, single layer has _______ GB capacity.
a) 4.7
b) 8.5
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 4.7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 134.
A 12 cm diameter DVD with single sided, double layer has _______ GB capacity.
a) 4.7
b) 8.5
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) 8.5

Question 135.
The 8 cm DVD has _______ GB capacity.
a) 4.7
b) 8.5
c) 1.5
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 1.5

Question 136.
The capacity of a DVD-ROM can be visually determined by noting the number of _______ of the disc.
a) data sides
b) concentric rings
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) data sides

Question 137.
DVDs with Double-layered sides are usually _______ coloured.
a) silver
b) gray
c) blue
d) gold
Answer:
d) gold

Question 138.
DVDs with Single-layered sides are usually _______ coloured.
a) silver
b) gray
c) blue
d) gold
Answer:
a) silver

Question 139.
_______ memory is an electronic non-volatile computer storage medium that can be electrically erased and reprogrammed.
a) RAM
b) ROM
c) Flash
d) DVD
Answer:
c) Flash

Question 140.
Flash memory is _______.
a) EEPROM
b) EPROM
c) Either EEPROM or EPROM
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either EEPROM or EPROM

Question 141.
Example for Flash memory is _______.
a) pendrives
b) memory cards
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 142.
Flash memories can be used in _______.
a) Personal Computers and Personal Digital Assistants (PDA)
b) digital audio players and digital cameras
c) mobile phones
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 143.
Flash memory offers fast _______.
a) access time
b) evaluation time
c) completion time
d) None of these
Answer:
a) access time

Question 144.
The time taken to read or write a character in memory is called _______.
a) access time
b) evaluation time
c) completion time
d) None of these
Answer:
c) completion time

Question 145.
The capacity of the flash memories vary from _______.
a) 1GB to 2 TB
b) 1 GB to 4 TB
c) 1 MB to 2 MB
d) 1 MB to 2 GB
Answer:
a) 1GB to 2 TB

Question 146.
_______ disc is a high-density optical disc similar to DVD.
a) Hard
b) Floppy
c) Blu-Ray
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Blu-Ray

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 147.
Blu-Ray is the type of disc used for _______.
a) Play Station games
b) Playing High-Definition (HD) movies.
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 148.
A double-layer Blu-Ray disc can store up to _______ GB of data.
a) 150
b) 50
c) 100
d) 5
Answer:
b) 50

Question 149.
A double-layer Blu-Ray disc can store more than ________ times the capacity of a DVD.
a) 5
b) 15
c) 70
d) 72
Answer:
a) 5

Question 150.
A double-layer Blu-Ray disc can store more than _______ times the capacity of a CD.
a) 5
b) 15
c) 70
d) 72
Answer:
c) 70

Question 151.
The Blu-Ray disc format was developed to enable _______ of high-definition video.
a) recording
b) rewriting
c) playback
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 152.
The _______ format was developed for storing large amount of data.
a) Bly-Ray disc
b) Flash memory
c) CD
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Bly-Ray disc

Question 153.
_______ uses a red laser to read and write data.
a) Blu-Ray disc
b) Flash memory
c) DVD
d) None of these
Answer:
c) DVD

Question 154.
________ uses a biue-violet laser to write.
a) Blu-Ray disc
b) Flash memory
c) DVD
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Blu-Ray disc

Question 155.
The external devices can be connected to the _______.
a) ports
b) interfaces
c) ports and interfaces
d) none of these
Answer:
c) ports and interfaces

Question 156.
_______ is used to connect the external devices, found in old computers.
a) Serial port
b) USB port
c) Parallel port
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
a) Serial port

Question 157.
_______ is used to connect the printers, found in old computers.
a) Serial port
b) USB port
c) Parallel port
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
c) Parallel port

Question 158.
_______ is used to connect external devices like cameras, scanners, mobile phones, external hard disks and printers to the computer.
a) Serial port
b) USB port
c) Parallel port
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
b) USB port

Question 159.
USB means _______.
a) Universal Serial Bus
b) Unique Serial Bus
c) Universal Serial Board
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Universal Serial Bus

Question 160.
_______ is the third major version of the Universal Serial Bus standdiu.
a) USB 0.3
b) USB 3.0
c) USB 3.3
d) USB 0.33
Answer:
b) USB 3.0

Question 161.
USB 3.0 can transfer data up to _______ Giga byte/second.
a) 3
b) 3.5
c) 5.3
d) 5
Answer:
d) 5

Question 162.
Recently released USB version is _______.
a) USB 3.1
b) USB 3.2
c) USB 3.3
d) Both A and B
Answer:
d) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 163.
_____ is used to connect a monitor or any display device like LCD projector.
a) GVA Connector
b) AGV connector
c) VGA Connector
d) None of these
Answer:
c) VGA Connector

Question 164.
_______ is used to connect sound speakers, microphone and headphones.
a) VGA connector
b) Audio Plugs
c) SCSI port
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Audio Plugs

Question 165.
_______ is used to connect mouse and keyboard to PC.
a) VGA connector
b) Audio Plugs
c) SCSI port
d) PS/2 Port
Answer:
d) PS/2 Port

Question 166.
_______ is used to connect the hard disk drives and network connectors.
a) VGA connector
b) Audio Plugs
c) SCSI port
d) PS/2 Port
Answer:
c) SCSI port

Question 167.
HDMI means _______.
a) High Definition Multimedia Interleave
b) High Definition Multipurpose Interface
c) High Definition Multitech Interface
d) High Definition Multimedia Interface
Answer:
d) High Definition Multimedia Interface

Question 168.
_________ is an audio/videc interface.
a) HDMI
b) VGA connector
c) SCSI port
d) None of these
Answer:
a) HDMI

Question 169.
_______ transfers the uncompressed video and audio data from a video controller, to a compatible computer monitor, LCD projector, digital television etc.
a) HDMI
b) VGA connector
c) SCSI port
d) None of these
Answer:
a) HDMI

Question 170.
________ is an American multinational corporation and technology company involving in hardware manufacturing, especially mother board and processors.
a) Microsoft
b) Intel Corporation
c) Sun Micro System
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Intel Corporation

Question 171.
_______ means moving data from one component to another.
a) Data transfer
b) Data migration
c) Data Mitigation
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Data transfer

Question 172.
Match the following:
A. Logical operator – (1) Mother board
B. Computer Hardware – (2) Speaker
C. Catch memory – (3) NOT
D. Output device – (4) High Speed
a) 1, 2, 3, 4
b) 3, 1, 4, 2
c) 4, 2, 1, 2
d) 3, 1, 2, 4
Answer:
b) 3, 1, 4, 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Write note on computer organization.
Answer:
Computer organization deals with the hardware components of a computer system. It is concerned with how the various components of computer hardware operate.

Question 2.
Write note on computer architecture.
Answer:
The computer architecture deals with the engineering considerations involved in designing a computer.

Question 3.
What is Microprocessor?
Answer:
The microprocessor is a programmable multipurpose silicon chip. It is driven by clock pulses. It accepts input as a binary data and after processing, it provides the output data as per the instructions stored in the memory.

Question 4.
What is “bass”?
Answer:
Sound waves close to 20 Hz have a low pitch and are called “bass” frequencies.

Question 5.
What is “treble”?
Answer:
Sound waves above 5,000 Hz have a high pitch and are called “treble” frequencies.

Question 6.
Write note on Hertz.
Answer:
The hertz can be used to measure wave frequencies. It is also used to measure the speed of computer processors.

Question 7.
What is the use of internal clock?
Answer:
Every microprocessor has an internal clock that regulates the speed at which it executes instructions.

Question 8.
What is clock speed? How it is measured?
Answer:
The speed at which the microprocessor executes instructions is called the clock speed. Clock speed is measured in MHz.

Question 9.
What is an instruction?
Answer:
A command which is given to a computer to perform an operation on data is called an instruction.

Question 10.
What is an instruction set?
Answer:
Basic set of machine level instructions that a microprocessor is designed to execute is called as an instruction set.

Question 11.
What are the various operation carried out by instruction set?
Answer:
The instruction set carries out the following types of operations:

  1. Data transfer
  2. Arithmetic operations
  3. Logical operations
  4. Control flow
  5. Input/output

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 12.
Define Word Size.
Answer:
The number of bits that can be processed by a processor in a single instruction is called its word size.

Question 13.
Write note on first commercial microprocessor.
Answer:
The first commercial microprocessor, Intel 4004 is a 4 bit processor. It has 4 input pins and 4 output pins. It can process 4 bits at a time. So it is called as a 4 bit processor.

Question 14.
What is the function of Memory Data Register?
Answer:
The Memory Data Register (MDR) keeps the data which is transferred between the Memory and the CPU.

Question 15.
Write note on program counter.
Answer:
The Program Counter (PC) is a special register in the CPU which always keeps the address of the next instruction to be executed.

Question 16.
What is a bus?
Answer:
A bus is a collection of wires used for communication between the internal components of a computer.

Question 17.
What is the function of address bus?
Answer:
The address bus is used to point a memory location. The address bus is unidirectional.

Question 18.
What is the function of decoder?
Answer:
It is a digital circuit is used to point to the specific memory location where the word can be located.

Question 19.
What is the function of a data bus?
Answer:
A data bus is used to transfer data between the memory and the CPU. The data bus is bidirectional.

Question 20.
What is function of a control bus?
Answer:
The control bus controls both read and write operations. The read operation fetches data from memory and transfers to MDR. The write operation transfers data from the MDR to memory.

Question 21.
Draw diagram to represent Bus connectivity between CPU and Memory..
Answer:
Bus connectivity between CPU and Memory
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation 1

Question 22.
What is read operation?
Answer:
The read operation transfers the data(bits) from word to Memory Data Register.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 23.
What is write operation?
Answer:
The write operation transfers the data (bits) from Memory Data Register to word.

Question 24.
What are the criteria to classify the microprocessor?
Answer:
Microprocessors can be classified based on the following criteria:

The width of data that can be processed.
The instruction set.

Question 25.
What is computer memory?
Answer:
Computer memory is the storage space in the computer, where data and instructions are stored.

Question 26.
What is silicon chip?
Answer:
Silicon chip is an integrated set of electronic circuits on one small flat piece of semiconductor material, silicon.

Question 27.
What are the types of RAM?
Answer:
RAM types are –

Static RAM
Dynamic RAM

Question 28.
Write note on SRAM.
Answer:
Static RAM needs to be refreshed less often, which makes it faster. Hence, Static RAM is more expensive than Dynamic RAM.

Question 29.
Write note on DRAM.
Answer:
Dynamic RAM being a common type needs to be refreshed frequently. Less expensive than the SRAM.

Question 30.
What programs are stored in ROM?
Answer:
ROM stores critical programs such as the program that boots the computer.

Question 31.
What are the characteristics of ROM?
Answer:
Once the data has been written onto a ROM chip, it cannot be modified or removed and can only be read. ROM retains its contents even when the computer is turned off.

Question 32.
Write short note on PROM.
Answer:
Programmable read only memory is also a non-volatile memory on which data can be written only once. Once a program has been written onto a PROM, it remains there forever.

Question 33.
What is the difference between ROM and PROM?
Answer:
PROM is manufactured as a blank memory, whereas a ROM is programmed during the manufacturing process itself.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 34.
What is the use of PROM burner?
Answer:
PROM programmer or a PROM burner is used to write data to a PROM chip.

Question 35.
What do yo mean by burning the PROM?
Answer:
The process of programming a PROM is called burning the PROM.

Question 35.
Write note on EPROM.
Answer:
Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory is a special type of memory which serves as a PROM, but the content can be erased using ultraviolet rays. EPROM retains its contents until it is exposed to ultraviolet light. The ultraviolet light clears its contents, making it possible to reprogram the memory.

Question 36.
Write note on EEPROM.
Answer:
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory is a special type of PROM that can be erased by exposing it to an electrical charge. EEPROM is slower in performance.

Question 37.
Write about cache memory.
Answer:
The cache memory is a very high speed and expensive memory, which is used to speed up the memory retrieval process.

Question 38.
What is access time?
Answer:
It refers to how quickly the memory can respond to a read / write request.

Question 39.
Draw a diagram to indicate the arrangement of cache memory between the CPU and the main memory.
Answer:
Cache Memory Arrangement
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation 4

Question 40.
What is the purpose of using secondary storage devices?
Answer:
To store data and programs permanently, secondary storage devices are used.

Question 41.
Write about Hard disk.
Answer:
Hard disk is a magnetic disk on which you can store data. The hard disk has the stacked arrangement of disks accessed by a pair of heads for each of the disks. The hard disks come with a single or double sided disk.

Question 42.
Write note on serial port.
Answer:
Serial Port : To connect the external devices, found in old computers.

Question 43.
Write note on parallel port.
Answer:
Parallel Port: To connect the printers, found in old computers.

Question 44.
Write note on VGA Connector.
Answer:
VGA Connector: To connect a monitor or any display device like LCD projector.

Question 45.
Write about Audio Plugs.
Answer:
Audio Plugs: To connect sound speakers, microphone and headphones.

Question 46.
Write about PS/2 port.
Answer:
PS/2 Port: To connect mouse and keyboard to PC.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 47.
Write about SCSI port.
Answer:
SCSI Port: To connect the hard disk drives and network connectors.

Question 48.
Justify the name of Blu-Ray disc.
Answer:
Blu-ray uses a blue-violet laser to write. Hence, it is called as Blu-Ray.

Question 49.
How external devices are connected to the CPU?
Answer:
The external devices can be connected to the ports and interfaces.

Part – III

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
Explain Microprocessor units.
Answer:
The microprocessor is made up of 3 main units.

They are:

  1. Arithmetic and Logic unit (ALU) : To perform arithmetic and logical instructions based on computer instructions.
  2. Control unit: To control the overall operations of the computer through signals.
  3. Registers (Internal Memory) : They are used to hold the instruction and data for the execution of the processor.

Question 2.
Explain how Microprocessor interconnecting with other devices.
Answer:
The microprocessor is able to communicate with the memory units and the Input / Output devices as shown in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation 5
The system bus is a bunch of wires which is the ‘ collection of address bus, data bus and control bus that serves as communication channels between the Microprocessor and other devices.

Question 3.
Draw diagram to represent the content of MDR and the word after the READ operation.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation 6

Question 4.
What are the memory access methods?
Answer:
The memory access methods are –

  1. Sequential Access : The memory is accessed in an orderly manner from starting to end.
  2. Random Access : Any byte of memory can be accessed directly without navigating through previous bytes.

Question 5.
Write note on Main Memory.
Answer:
The main memory is otherwise called as Random Access Memory. This is available in computers in the form of Integrated Circuits (ICs). It is the place in a computer where the Operating System, Application Programs and the data in current use are kept temporarily so that they can be accessed by the computer’s processor.

RAM is a volatile memory, which means that the information stored in it is not permanent. As soon as the power is turned off, whatever data that resides in RAM is lost. It allows both read and write operations.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 6.
Compare Bit and Byte.
Answer:

  1. Bit: The smallest unit of information that can be stored in the memory is called as a bit. 0 or 1 represents a bit. Bit stands for Binary Digit.
  2. Byte: The memory can be accessed by a collection of 8 bits which is called as a byte.

Question 7.
What is the impact of a cache memory?
Answer:
Without cache memory, every time the CPU requests the data, it has to be fetched from the main memory which will consume more time. The idea of Introducing a cache is that, this extremely fast memory would store data that is frequently accessed and if possible, the data that is closer to it. This helps to achieve the fast response time.

Question 8.
Write about USB port.
Answer:
USB Ports: To connect external devices like cameras, scanners, mobile phones, external hard disks and printers to the computer. USB 3.0 is the third major version of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) standard to connect computers with other electronic gadgets. USB 3.0 can transfer data up to 5 Giga byte/second. USB 3.1 and USB 3.2 are also released.

Question 9.
Explain about HDMX.
Answer:
High Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) – High-Definition Multimedia Interface is an audio/ video interface which transfers the uncompressed video and audio data from a video controller, to a compatible computer monitor, LCD projector, digital television etc.

Question 10.
Draw the diagram of Ports and Interfaces.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation 7

Part – IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain CD-ROM and DVD-ROM.
Answer:
CD-ROM :
A CD or CD-ROM is made from 1.2 millimeters thick, polycarbonate plastic material. A thin layer of aluminum or gold is applied to the surface. CD data is represented as tiny indentations known as “pits”, encoded in a spiral track moulded into the top of the polycarbonate layer. The areas between pits are known as “lands”. A motor within the CD player rotates the disk. The capacity of an ordinary CD- ROM is 700MB.

DVD-ROM :
A DVD (Digital Versatile Disc or Digital Video Disc) is an optical disc capable of storing up to 4.7 GB of data, more than six times what a CD can hold. DVDs are often used to store movies at a better quality. Like CDs, DVDs are read with a laser.

The disc can have one or two sides, and one or two layers of data per side; the number of sides and layers determines how much it can hold. A 12 cm diameter disc with single sided, single layer has 4.7 GB capacity, whereas the single sided, double layer has 8.5 GB capacity. The 8 cm DVD has 1.5 GB capacity.

The capacity of a DVD-ROM can be visually determined by noting the number of data sides of the disc. Double-layered sides are usually gold – coloured, while single-layered sides are usually silver-coloured, like a CD.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 2.
Explain Flash memory in detail.
Answer:
Flash memory is an electronic (solid-state) non-volatile computer storage medium that can be electrically erased and reprogrammed. They are either EEPROM or EPROM. Examples for Flash memories are pendrives, memory cards etc.

Flash memories can be used in personal computers, Personal Digital Assistants (PDA), digital audio players, digital cameras and mobile phones. Flash memory offers fast access times.

The time taken to read or write a character in memory is called access time. The capacity of the flash memories vary from 1 Gigabytes (GB) to 2 Terabytes (TB).

A sample of flash memory:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 3 Computer Organisation

Question 3.
Explain briefly about Blu-Ray disc.
Answer:
Blu-Ray Disc is a high-density optical disc similar to DVD. Blu-ray is the type of disc used for PlayStation games and for playing High-Definition (HD) movies. A double-layer Blu-Ray disc can store up to 50GB (gigabytes) of data. This is more than 5 times the capacity of a DVD, and above 70 times of a CD.

The format was developed to enable recording, rewriting and playback of high-definition video, as well as storing large amount of data. DVD uses a red laser to read and write data. But, Blu-ray uses a blue-violet laser to write. Hence, it is called as Blu-Ray.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 2 Number Systems Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 Number Systems

11th Computer Applications Guide Number Systems Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
Which refers to the number of bits processed by a computer’s CPU?
a) Byte
b) Nibble
c) Word length
d) Bit
Answer:
c) Word length

Question 2.
How many bytes does 1 KiloByte contain?
a) 1000
b) 8
c) 4
d) 1024
Answer:
d) 1024

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 3.
Expansion for ASCII _________.
a) American School Code for Information Interchange
b) American Standard Code for Information Interchange
c) All Standard Code for Information Interchange
d) American Society Code for Information Interchange
Answer:
b) American Standard Code for Information Interchange

Question 4.
2^50 is referred as _________.
a) Kilo
b) Tera
c) Peta
d) Zetta
Answer:
c) Peta

Question 5.
How many characters can be handled in Binary Coded Decima System?
a) 64
b) 255
c) 256
d) 128
Answer:
a) 64

Question 6.
For 11012 what is the Hexadecimal equivalent?
a) F
b) E
c) D
d) B
Answer:
c) D

Question 7.
What is the 1’s complement of 00100110?
a) 00100110
b) 11011001
c) 11010001
d) 00101001
Answer:
b) 11011001

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 8.
Which amongst this is not an Octal number?
a) 645
b) 234
c) 876
d) 123
Answer:
c) 876

Part – II

II. Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is data?
Answer:
The data is a fact about people, places or some object. In a program, a value assigned to a variable is called a data.

Question 2.
Write the 1’s complement procedure.
Answer:
The steps to be followed to find l’s complement of a number:

  • Step 1: Convert given Decimal number into Binary
  • Step 2 : Check if the binary number contains 8 bits , if less add 0 at the left most bit, to make it as 8 bits.
  • Step 3 : Invert all bits(i.e. change 1 as 0 and 0 as 1)
    Example : Find 1’s complement for (-24)10
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 1

Question 3.
Convert (46)10 into Binary number.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 2

Question 4.
We cannot find 1’s complement for (28)10. State reason.
Answer:
Complement is only for negative number. (28)10 is a positive number . So we can’t find 1’s complement.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 5.
List the encoding systems for characters in memory.
Answer:
There are several encoding systems used for computer. They are

  1. BCD – Binary Coded Decimal
  2. EBCDIC – Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
  3. ASCII – American Standard Code for Information Interchange
  4. Unicode
  5. ISCII – Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is radix of a number system? Give
example.
Each number system is uniquely identified by its base value or radix. Radix or base ¡s the count of number of digits in each number system. Radix or base is the general idea behind positional numbering system.

Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 3

Question 2.
Write note on binary number system.
Answer:
There are only two digits in the Binary system, namely, 0 and 1. The numbers in the binary system are represented to the base 2 and the positional multipliers are the powers of 2.

The left most bit in the binary number is called as the Most Significant Bit (MSB) and it has the largest positional weight. The right most bit is the Least Significant Bit (LSB) and has the smallest positional weight.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 4

Question 3.
Convert (150)10 into Binary, then convert that Binary number to Octal.
Answer:
Decimal to Binary conversion 150
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 4a
(150)10 = (10010110)2
Binary to octal conversion
LSB to MSB divide the number into three digit binary and write the equivalent octal digit
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 5

Question 4.
Write short note on ISCII.
Answer:
Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange (ISCII):
ISCII is the system of handling the character of Indian local languages. This is an 8-bit coding system. Therefore it can handle 256 (28) characters.

This system is formulated by the department of Electronics in India in the year 1986-88 and recognized by Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS). Now this coding system is integrated with Unicode.

Question 5.
Add : a) -2210 + 1510
b) 2010 + 2510.
Answer:
a) -2210 + 1510
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 6
Answer in 2’s complement form . 11111001 is 2’s complement of 7 which is the answer.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Part – IV

Detail Answers

Question 1.
a) Write the procedure to convert fractional
Answer:
Decimal to Binary:
Conversion of fractional Decimal to Binary – The method of repeated multiplication by 2 has to be used to convert such kind of decimal fractions.

The steps involved in the method of repeated multiplication by 2:
Step 1 : Multiply the decimal fraction by 2 and note the integer part. The integer part is either O or 1.

Step 2: Discard the integer part of the previous product. Multiply the fractional part of the previous product by 2. Repeat Step 1 until the same fraction repeats or terminates (O).

Step 3 : The resulting integer part forms a sequence of Os and Is that become the binary equivalent of decimal fraction.

Step 4 : The final answer is to be written from first integer part obtained till the last integer part obtained.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 7
Write the integer parts from top to bottom to obtain the equivalent fractional binary number.
Hence
(0.2)10 = (0.00110011…)2 = (0.00110011)2.

b) Convert (98.46)10 to Binary.
Convert (98.46)10 to Binary
Procedure : Conversion of integral part:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 8

Question 2.
Find 1’s Complement and 2’s Complement for the following Decimal number.
a) – 98
b) – 135
Answer:
a) Conversion of (98)10 into binary
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 9

b) Conversion of (135)10 into binary
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 10

Question 3.
a) Add 11010102 + 1011012.
Answer:
a) Add 11010102 + 1011012
Procedure :
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 11
11010102 + 1011012 = 100101112

b) Subtract 11010112 – 1110102.
Subtract 11010112 – 1110102
Procedure :
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 12

11th Computer Applications Guide Number Systems Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
Computer handles data in the form of _________.
a) 1
b) 0
c) alphabets
d) both A and B
Answer:
d) both A and B

Question 2.
Computer understand _________ language.
a) High level
b) Assembly
c) Machine
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Machine

Question 3.
0 and 1 are called _________.
a) BIT
b) BYTE
c) NIBBLE
d) WORD
Answer:
a) BIT

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 4.
_________ is the basic unit of data in computer.
a) BIT
b) BYTE
c) NIBBLE
d) WORD
Answer:
a) BIT

Question 5.
A _________ is the short form of Binary digit.
a) BIT
b) BYTE
c) NIBBLE
d) WORD
Answer:
a) BIT

Question 6.
Binary digit means _________.
a) 0
b) 1
c) either 0 or 1
d) None of these
Answer:
c) either 0 or 1

Question 7.
A _________ is a collection of 4 bits.
a) BIT
b) BYTE
c) NIBBLE
d) WORD
Answer:
c) NIBBLE

Question 8.
A collection of 8 bits is called _________.
a) BIT
b) BYTE
C) NIBBLE
d) WORD
Answer:
b) BYTE

Question 9.
The memory size of the computer is measured in the unit called _________.
a) BIT
b) BYTE
c) NIBBLE
d) WORD
Answer:
b) BYTE

Question 10.
_________ refers to the number of bits processed by a computer’s CPU.
a) Word length
b) Nibble
c) Word size
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Word length

Question 11.
The word length of the present day computer is _________ bits.
a) 32
b) 64
c) 8
d) 32 or 64
Answer:
d) 32 or 64

Question 12.
_________ is a valid word length of a computer.
a) 64
b) 32
c) 16
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 13.
_________ is not a valid word length of a computer.
a) 8
b) 12
c) 4
d) both B and C
Answer:
d) both B and C

Question 14.
1 KiloByte equals to _________ bytes.
a) 1024
b) 256
c) 1000
d) 128
Answer:
a) 1024

Question 15.
1 MegaByte equals to _________ KiloBytes.
a) 1024
b) 256
c) 1000
d) 128
Answer:
a) 1024

Question 16.
1024 MegaBytes equals to _________.
a) 1 GigaByte
b) 1 TeraByte
c) 1 YottaByte
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 1 GigaByte

Question 17.
1024 GigaByte equals to _________.
a) 1 GigaByte
b) 1 TeraByte
c) 1 YottaByte
d) None of these
Answer:
b) 1 TeraByte

Question 18.
1Kb equals to _________ bytes.
a) 210
b) 220
c) 230
d) 240
Answer:
a) 210

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 19.
1 MB equals to _________ bytes.
a) 210
b) 220
c) 230
d) 240
Answer:
b) 220

Question 20.
1 GB equals to _________ bytes.
a) 210
b) 220
c) 230
d) 240
Answer:
c) 230

Question 21.
1 TB equals to _________ bytes.
a) 210
b) 220
c) 230
d) 240
Answer:
d) 240

Question 22.
1 PetaByte(PB) equals to _________ bytes.
a) 250
b) 260
c) 270
d) 280
Answer:
a) 250

Question 23.
1 ExaByte (1EB) equals to _________ bytes.
a) 250
b) 260
c) 270
d) 280
Answer:
b) 260

Question 24.
1 ZettaByte (1ZB) equals to _________ bytes.
a) 250
b) 260
c) 270
d) 280
Answer:
c) 270

Question 25.
1 YottaByte equals to _________ bytes.
a) 250
b) 260
c) 270
d) 280
Answer:
d) 280

Question 26.
Computer memory is normally represented in terms of _________ bytes.
a) Kilo
b) Mega
c) Kilo or Mega
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Kilo or Mega

Question 27.
_________ are used to represent characters in a text.
a) Bytes
b) Bits
c) Nibbles
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Bytes

Question 28.
The most commonly used codig scheme to represent character set and number is __________.
a) BCD
b) ASCII
c) EBCDIC
d) All the above
Answer:
b) ASCII

Question 29.
ASCII is a _________ bit ccde.
a) 8
b) 7
c) 16
d) 32
Answer:
b) 7

Question 30.
The ASCII value for blank space is _________.
a) 43
b) 42
c) 32
d) 62
Answer:
c) 32

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 31.
The ASCII value for Numeric 0(zero) is _________.
a) 48
b) 38
c) 128
d) 32
Answer:
a) 48

Question 32.
The most commonly used numbering system in real life is ________ number system.
a) Hexadecimal
b) Octal
c) Binary
d) Decimal
Answer:
d) Decimal

Question 33.
Each number system is uniquely identified by its ________.
a) base value
b) radix
c) base value or radix
d) symbols
Answer:
c) base value or radix

Question 34.
________ is the count of number of digits in each number system.
a) base
b) radix
c) base or radix
d) symbols
Answer:
c) base or radix

Question 35.
________ is the general idea behind positional numbering system.
a) base value
b) radix
c) base or radix
d) symbols
Answer:
c) base or radix

Question 36.
Identify the true statement from the following.
a) In the positional number system, each decimal digit is weighted relative to its position in the number.
b) A numbering system is a way of representing numbers.
c) The speed of a computer depends on the number of bits it can process at once.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 37.
The left most bit in the binary number is called as the ________.
a) MSB
b) LSB
c) FSB
d) None of these
Answer:
a) MSB

Question 38.
The right most bit in the binary number is called as the ________.
a) MSB
b) LSB
c) FSB
d) None of these
Answer:
b) LSB

Question 39.
Each octal digit has its own positional value or weight as a power of ________.
a) 8
b) 16
c) 4
d) 10
Answer:
a) 8

Question 40.
________ numbers are used as a shorthand form of binary sequence.
a) Hexadecimal
b) Octal
c) Decimal
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Hexadecimal

Question 41.
________ system is used to represent data in a more compact manner.
a) Hexadecimal
b) Octal
c) Decimal
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Hexadecimal

Question 42.
In hexadecimal number system letter ‘E’ represents ________.
a) 12
b) 13
c) 14
d) 15
Answer:
c) 14

Question 43.
How many methods are there to convert decimal number to binary number?
a) only one
b) 2
c) 3
d) many
Answer:
b) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 44.
________ is a method to convert decimal number to binary number.
a) Repeated division by 2
b) Sum of powers of 2
c) Repeated addition by 2
d) Either A or B
Answer:
d) Either A or B

Question 45.
Computer can handle ________ numbers.
a) positive
b) negative
c) positive and negative
d) None of these
Answer:
c) positive and negative

Question 46.
Computer can handle ________ numbers.
a) signed
b) unsigned
c) signed and unsigned
d) None of these
Answer:
c) signed and unsigned

Question 47.
The simplest method to represent negative binary numbers is called ________ method.
a) 1’s complement
b) 2’s complement
c) signed magnitude
d) All the above
Answer:
c) signed magnitude

Question 48.
In signed magnitude method, the left most bit is called ________ bit.
a) sign
b) parity
c) sign or parity
d) None of these
Answer:
c) sign or parity

Question 49.
How many ways a number can be represented in computers?
a) 3
b) 2
c) only one
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 3

Question 50.
The numbers are represented in computers in ________ method.
a) Signed magnitude representation
b) 1’s complement
c) 2’s complement
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 51.
If the number has ________ sign, it will be considered as positive in signed magnitute representation.
a) +
b) no
c) + or ++
d) A or B
Answer:
d) A or B

Question 52.
If the number has ________ sign , it will be considered as negative in signed magnitute representation.
a) +
b) no
c) –
d) A or B
Answer:
c) –

Question 53.
1’s complement of (00011000)2 is ________.
a) 11100111
b) 00011001
c) 00000011
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 11100111

Question 54.
2’s complement of (0001i000)2 is ________.
a) 11100111
b) 00011001
c) 11101000
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 11101000

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 55.
The binary numbers permits ________ computation.
a) addition and subtraction
b) multiplication
c) division
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 56.
When two binary numbers are added ________ will be the output.
a) sum
b) carry
c) sum and carry
d) None of these
Answer:
c) sum and carry

Question 57.
When subtracting 1 from 0, borrow 1 from the next ________.
a) LSB
b) MSB
c) either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) MSB

Question 58.
All the characters in the character set are denoted through ________ only.
a) numbers
b) alpha numeric
c) alphabet
d) None of these
Answer:
a) numbers

Question 59.
________ is the character encoding system.
a) BCD and ISCII
b) EBCDIC
c) ASCII and Unicode
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 60.
BCD stands for ________.
a) Binary Coded Decimal
b) Binary Character Decoding
c) Basic Coded Decimal
d) Bit Coded Decimal
Answer:
a) Binary Coded Decimal

Question 61.
EBCDIC stands for ________.
a) Extensive Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
b) Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
c) Extended Binary Coded Digit Interchange Code
d) Extended Bit Coded Decimal Interchange Code.
Answer:
b) Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code

Question 62.
ASCII stands for ________.
a) Arithmetic Standard Code for Information Interchange
b) American Structured Code for Information Interchange
c) American Standard Code for Information Interchange
d) American Standard Code for Instant Interchange
Answer:
c) American Standard Code for Information Interchange

Question 63.
ISCII stands for ________.
a) International Standard Code for Information Interchange
b) Indian Structured Code for Information Interchange
c) India’s Standard Code for Information Interchange
d) Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange
Answer:
d) Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange

Question 64.
BCD is ________ bit code.
a) 6
b) 7
c) 8
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 6

Question 65.
EBCDIC is ________ bit code.
a) 6
b) 7
c) 8
d) None of these bit code
Answer:
c) 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 66.
ASCII is ___________ bit code.
a) 6
b) 7
c) 8
d) None of these
Answer:
b) 7

Question 67.
Unicode is _________ bit code.
a) 16
b) 7
c) 8
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 16

Question 68.
ISCII is ________ bit code.
a) 16
b) 7
c) 8
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 8

Question 69.
________ coding system is formulated by IBM.
a) BCD
b) EBCDIC
c) ISCII
d) None of these
Answer:
b) EBCDIC

Question 70.
IBM stands for ________.
a) Indian Business Machine
b) International Basic Machine
c) International Business Method
d) International Business Machine
Answer:
d) International Business Machine

Question 71.
________ is the system of handling the characters of Indian local languages.
a) ASCII
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
d) ISCII

Question 72.
ISCII system is formulated fay the ________ in India.
a) Department of Electronics
b) Department of Electricity
c) Department of E-commerce
d) Department of Economics
Answer:
a) Department of Electronics

Question 73.
BCO system can handle ________ characters.
a) 64
b) 128
c) 256
d) 65536
Answer:
a) 64

Question 74.
EBCDIC system can handle characters.
a) 64
b) 128
c) 256
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 256

Question 75.
ASCII system can handle ________ characters.
a) 64
b) 128
c) 256
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 256

Question 76.
Unicode system can handle ________ characters.
a) 64
b) 128
c) 256
d) 65536
Answer:
d) 65536

Question 77.
ISCII system can handle ________ characters.
a) 64
b) 128
c) 256
d) 65535
Answer:
c) 256

Question 78.
__________ language characters are not represented by ASCII.
a) Tamil
b) Malayalam
c) Telugu and Kannada
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 79.
Tamil, Malayalam, Telugu and kannda languages characters are represented by ________ code.
a) ASCII
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
b) Unicode

Question 80.
________ scheme is denoted by heaxdecimal numbers.
a) ASCII
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
b) Unicode

Question 81.
ISCII code was formulated in the year ________.
a) 1986 – 88
b) 1984 – 86
c) 1988
d) 1987
Answer:
a) 1986 – 88

Question 82.
________ coding system is integrated with Unicode.
a) ASCII
b) EBCDIC
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
d) ISCII

Question 83.
________ was generated to handle all the coding system of Universal languages.
a) ASCII
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
b) Unicode

Question 84.
The popular coding scheme after ASCII is ________.
a) EBCDIC
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
b) Unicode

Question 85.
BCD system is bit encoding system.
a) 28
b) 216
c) 26
d) 24
Answer:
c) 26

Question 86.
EBCDIC svstem is ________ bit encoding system.
a) 28
b) 216
c) 26
d) 27
Answer:
a) 28

Question 87.
ASCII system is ________ bit encoding system.
a) 28
b) 216
c) 26
d) 27
Answer:
d) 27

Question 88.
Unicode system is ________ bit encoding system.
a) 28
b) 216
c) 26
d) 27
Answer:
b) 216

Question 89.
ISCII system is ________ bit encoding system.
a) 28
b) 216
c) 26
d) 27
Answer:
a) 28

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 90.
The input code in ASCII can be converted into ________ system.
a) EBCDIC
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
a) EBCDIC

Question 91.
What is ASCII value for ‘A’ in decimal number,
a) 97
b) 65
c) 98
d) 32
Answer:
b) 65

Question 92.
What is ASCII value for ‘A’ in binary number.
a) 01100001
b) 01000001
c) 01100010
d) 00100000
Answer:
b) 01000001

Question 93.
What is ASCII value for ‘A’ in octal number.
a) 141
b) 101
c) 142
d) 40
Answer:
b) 101

Question 94.
What is ASCII value for ‘A’ in hexadeicmal number.
a) 61
b) 41
c) 62
d) 20
Answer:
b) 41

Question 95.
Find the false statement in the following.
a) Computers can handle positive and negative numbers.
b) MSB is called as sign bit
c) LSB is called as parity bit
d) All the above
Answer:
c) LSB is called as parity bit

Question 96.
Match the following.
a) 78 – (1) Binary number
b) 1111 – (2) Octal number
c) CAFE – (3) Decimal number
d) 71 – (4) Hexadecimal number
a) 3, 1, 4, 2
b) 4, 3, 2, 1
c) 1,3, 2,4
d) 3, 1,2,4
Answer:
a) 3, 1, 4, 2

Question 97.
In signed magnitude representation, ________ in the sign bit represents negative number.
a) 0
b) 1
c) No symbol
d) None of these
Answer:
b) 1

Question 98.
In signed magnitude representation, ________ in the sign bit represents positive number.
a) 0
b) 1
c) No symbol
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 0

Question 99.
The term data comes from the word ________.
a) datum
b) date
c) fact
d) None of these
Answer:
a) datum

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
Define data.
Answer:
Data is an unprocessed collection of facts given as input to the computer. In a program, the values assigned to the variables are called data.

Question 2.
Define information.
Answer:
Information is a processed facts and obtained from the computer as output. It convey meaning.

Question 3.
What you mean by nibble?
Answer:
A nibble is a collection of 4 bits Binary digits.

Question 4.
Define Bit and Byte.
Answer:

  • Bit : A bit is the short form of Binary digit which can be ‘0’ or ‘1’. It is the basic unit of data in computers.
  • Byte : A collection of 8 bits is called Byte. It is the basic unit of measuring the memory size in the computer.

Question 5.
What do you mean by word length?
Answer:
Word length refers to the number of bits processed by a Computer’s CPU. For example, a word length can have 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits and 64 bits.

Question 6.
What are the different types of coding schemes to represent character set?
Answer:
The different coding schemes are

  1. BCD – Binary Coded Decimal
  2. EBCDIC – Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
  3. ASCII – American Standard Code for Information Interchange
  4. Unicode
  5. ISCII – Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange.

Question 7.
Write note on number system.
Answer:
A numbering system is a way of representing numbers. The most commonly used numbering system in real life is Decimal number system. Other number systems are Binary, Octal, and Hexadecimal Number System.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 8.
What does base or radix mean?
Answer:
Radix or base is the count of number of digits in each number system. Radix or base is the general idea behind positional numbering system.

Question 9.
Why the computers are working with different speed?
Answer:
The speed of a computer depends on the number of bits it can process at once. For example, a 64- bit computer can process 64-bit numbers in one operation, while a 32-bit computer break 64- bit numbers down into smaller pieces, making it slower.

Question 10.
Write note on decimal number system.
Answer:
It consists of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 (10 digits). It is the oldest and most popular number system used in our day to day life. In the positional number system, each decimal digit is weighted relative to its position in the number. Its base or radix is 10.

Question 11.
Write about octal number system.
Answer:
Octal number system uses digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 (8 digits). Each octal digit has its own positional value or weight as a power of 8. Its base or radix is 8.

Question 12.
How will you convert decimal to hexadecimal?
Answer:
To convert Decimal to Hexadecimal, “Repeated division by 16” method can be used) In this method, we have to divide the given number by 16.

Example : Convert (31)10 into its equivalent hexadecimal number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 13

Question 13.
Give the procedure to Octal to Binary.
Answer:
Procedure: For each octal digit in the given number write its 3 digits binary equivalent using positional notation.

Example:
Convert (6213)8 to equivalent Binary number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 14

Question 14.
How will you convert Hexadecimal to Binary?
Answer:
Procedure : Write 4 bits Binary equivalent for each Hexadecimal digit for the given number using positional notation method.

Example:
Convert (8BC)16 into equivalent Binary number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 15

Question 15.
Write short note on Binary Coded Decimal (BCD).
Answer:
This is 26 bit encoding system. This can handle 26 = 64 characters only. This encoding system is not in the practice right now.

Question 16.
Write note on EBCDIC encoding system.
Answer:
Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code (EBCDIC) is similar to ASCII Code with 8 bit representation. This coding system is formulated by International Business Machine (IBM). The coding system can handle 256 characters. The input code in ASCII can be converted to EBCDIC system and vice – versa.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 17.
Write note on ISCXI encoding system.
Answer:
ISCII is the system of handling the character of Indian local languages. This as a 8-bit coding system. Therefore it can handle 256 (28) characters. This system is formulated by the department of Electronics in India in the year 1986-88 and recognized by Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS). Now this coding system is integrated with Unicode.

Part – III

Short Answer

Question 1.
Write about binary number system.
Answer:
There are only two digits in the Binary system, namely, 0 and 1. The numbers in the binary system are represented to the base 2 and the positional multipliers are the powers of 2.

The left most bit in the binary number is called as the Most Significant Bit (MSB) and it has the largest positional weight. The right most bit is the Least Significant Bit (LSB) and has the smallest positional weight.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 16

Question 2.
Explain Hexadecimal number system.
Answer:
A hexadecimal number is represented using base 16. Hexadecimal or Hex numbers are used as a shorthand form of binary sequence. This system is used to represent data in a more compact manner. Since 16 symbols are used, 0 to F, the notation is called hexadecimal.

The first 10 symbols are the same as in the decimal system, 0 to 9 and the remaining 6 symbols are taken from the first 6 letters of the alphabet sequence, A to F, where A represents 10, B is 11, C is 12, D is 13, E is 14 and F is 15.

Question 3.
Give the procedure to convert decimal to octal.
Answer:
To convert Decimal to Octal, “Repeated Division by 8” method can be used) In this method, we have to divide the given number by 8.

Example:
Convert (65)10 into its equivalent Octal number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 17

Question 4.
Give the procedure to convert Octal to Decimal
Answer:
To convert Octal to Decimal, we can use positional notation method:

  1. Write down the Octal digits and list the powers of 8 from right to left (Positional Notation).
  2. For each positional notation of the digit write the equivalent weight.
  3. Multiply each digit with its corresponding weight.
  4. Add all the, values.

Example:
Convert (1265)8 to equivalent Decimal number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 18
(1265)8 = 512 x 1 + 64 x 2 + 8 x 6 + 1 x 5 = 512 + 128 + 48 + 5
(1265)8 = (693)10

Question 5.
How will you convert Hexadecimal to Decimal?
Answer:
To convert Hexadecimal to Decimal we can use positional notation method:

  1. Write down the Hexadecimal digits and list the powers of 16 from right to left (Positional Notation)
  2. For each positional notation written for the digit, now write the equivalent weight.
  3. Multiply each digit with its corresponding weight
  4. Add all the values to get one final value.

Example:
Convert (25F)16 into its equivalent Decimal number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 19
(25F)16 = 2 x 256 + 5 x 16 + 15 x 1 = 512 + 80 + 15
(25F)16 = (607)10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 6.
Write about binary representation for signed numbers.
Answer:
Computers can handle both positive (unsigned) and negative (signed) numbers. The simplest method to represent negative binary numbers is called Signed Magnitude. In signed magnitude method, the left most bit is Most Significant Bit (MSB), is called sign bit or parity bit.

The numbers are represented in computers in different ways:

  1. Signed Magnitude representation
  2. 1’s Complement
  3. 2’s Complement

Question 7.
Explain ASCII code in detail.
Answer:
This is the most popular encoding system recognized by United States. Most of the computers use this system. Remember this encoding system can handle English characters only. This can handle 27 bit which means 128 characters.

In this system, each character has individual number .The new edition ASCII -8, has 28 bits and can handle 256 characters are represented from 0 to 255 unique numbers.

The ASCII code equivalent to the uppercase letter ‘A’ is 65. The binary representation of ASCII (7 bit) value is 1000001. Also 01000001 in ASCII-8 bit.

Question 8.
Explain Unicode in detail.
Answer:
This coding system is used in most of the modern computers. The popular coding scheme after ASCII is Unicode. ASCII can represent only 256 characters. Therefore English and European Languages alone can be handled by ASCII.

Particularly there was a situation, when the languages like Tamil, Malayalam, Kannada and Telugu could not be represented by ASCII.

Hence, the Unicode was generated to handle all the coding system of Universal languages. This is 16 bit code and can handle 65536 characters. Unicode scheme is denoted by hexadecimal numbers.

PART – IV

Book Evaluation

Question 1.
Explain decimal to binary conversion using Repeated Division by 2 method.
Answer:
To convert Decimal to Binary “Repeated Division by 2” method can be used. Any Decimal number divided by 2 will leave a remainder of 0 or 1. Repeated division by 2 will leave a sequence of 0s and Is that become the binary equivalent of the decimal number.

Suppose it is required to convert the decimal number N into binary form, dividing N by 2 in the decimal system, we will obtain a quotient N1 and a remainder R1, where R1 can have a value of either 0 or 1. The process is repeated until the quotient becomes 0 or 1. When the quotient is ‘O’ or ‘1’, it is the final remainder value. Write the final answer starting from final remainder value obtained to the first remainder value obtained.

Example:
Convert (65)10 into its equivalent binary number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 20

Question 2.
Explain decimal to binary conversion using Sum of powers of 2 method.
Answer:
A decimal number can be converted into a binary number by adding up the powers of 2 and then adding bits as needed to obtain the total value of the number.

a) Find the largest power of 2 that is smaller than or equal to 65.
6510 > 6410

b) Set the 64’s bit to 1 and subtract 64 from the original number
65 – 64 = 1

c) 32 is greater than the remaining total.
Therefore, set the 32’s bit to 0.

d) 16 is greater than the remaining total.
Therefore, set the 16’s bit to 0.

e) 8 is greater than the remaining total.
Therefore, set the 8’s bit to 0.

f) 4 is greater than the remaining total.
Therefore, set the 4’s bit to 0.

g) 2 is greater than the remaining total.
Therefore, set the 2’s bit to 0.

h) As the remaining value is equivalent to l’s bit, set it to 1.
1 – 1 = 0
Conversion is complete 6510 = (1000001)2

Example:
The conversion steps can be given as follows:
Given Number : 65
Equivalent or value less than power of 2 is : 64
(1) 65 – 64 = 1
(2) 1 – 1 = 0
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 21
6510 = (1000001)2.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 3.
Explain the procedure to convert fractional decimal to Binary.
Answer:
The method of repeated multiplication by 2 has to be used to convert such kind of decimal fractions. The steps involved in the method of repeated multiplication by 2:

Step 1: Multiply the decimal fraction by 2 and note the integer part. The integer part is either 0 or 1.

Step 2: Discard the integer part of the previous product. Multiply the fractional part of the previous product by 2. Repeat Step 1 until the same fraction repeats or terminates (0).

Step 3: The resulting integer part forms a sequence of Os and Is that become the binary equivalent of decimal fraction.

Step 4: The final answer is to be written from first integer part obtained till the last integer part obtained.

Integer part
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 22
Write the integer parts from top to bottom to obtain the equivalent fractional binary number. Hence (0.2)10 = (0.00110011…)2 = 0.00110011)2

Question 4.
How will you convert Binary to Decimal?
Answer:
To convert Binary to Decimal we can use positional notation method.

  • Step 1: Write down the Binary digits and list the powers of 2 from right to left (Positional Notation)
  • Step 2: For each positional notation written for the digit, now write the equivalent weight.
  • Step 3: Multiply each digit with its corresponding weight
  • Step 4: Add all the values.

Example:
Convert (111011)2 into its equivalent decimal number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 23
32 + 16 + 8 + 0 + 2 + 1 = (59)10
(111011)2 = (59)10

Question 5.
How will you convert Binary to Octal?
Answer:

  • Step 1: Group the given binary number into 3 bits from right to left.
  • Step 2: You can add preceding 0 to make a group of 3 bits if the left most group has less than 3 bits.
  • Step 3: Convert equivalent octal value using “2’s power positional weight method”

Example:
Convert (11010110)2 into octal equivalent number

Step 1: Group the given number into 3 bits from right to left.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 24
The left most groups have less than 3 bits, so 0 is added to its left to make a group of 3 bits.

Step 2: Find Octal equivalent of each group.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 25

Question 6.
Give the procedure to convert Binary to Hexadecimal.
Answer:

  • Step 1: Group the given number into 4 bits from right to left.
  • Step 2: You can add preceding 0’s to make a group of 4 bits if the left most group has less than 4 bits.
  • Step 3: Convert equivalent Hexadecimal value using “2’s power positional weight method”.

Example
Convert (1111010110)2 into Hexadecimal number

Step 1: Group the given number into 4 bits from right to left.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 26
0’s are added to the left most group to make it a group of 4 bits.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 27

Question 7.
Give the procedure to convert fractional Binary to Decimal equivalent.
Answer:
The steps to convert fractional Binary number to its Decimal equivalent:
Step 1 : Convert integral part of Binary to Decimal equivalent using positional notation method.

Step 2 : To convert the fractional part of binary to its decimal equivalent.

  • Write down the Binary digits in the fractional part.
  • For all the digits write powers of 2 from left to right starting from 2-1, 2-2, 2-3 ….. 2-n, now write the equivalent weight.
  • Multiply each digit with its corresponding weight.
  • Add all the values which you obtained in Step 2.3.

Step 3 : To get final answer write the integral part (after conversion), followed by a decimal point(.) and the answer arrived at Step 2.4

Example:
Convert the given Binary number (11.011)2 into its decimal equivalent Integer part (11)2 = 3

Question 8.
Explain the method of represent signed binary number in Signed Magnitude representation.
Answer:
The value of the whole numbers can be determined by the sign used before it. If the number has ‘+’ sign or no sign it will be considered as positive. If the number has sign it will be considered as negative.

Example:

  1. + 43 or 43 is a positive number
  2. – 43 is a negative number

In signed binary representation, the left most bit is considered as sign bit. If this bit is 0, it is a positive number and if it 1, it is a negative number. Therefore a signed binary number has 8 bits, only 7 bits used for storing values (magnitude) and the 1 bit is used for sign.

1. +43 is represented in memory as follows:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 29

2. -43 can be represented in memory as follows.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 30

Question 9.
Explain the method of represent signed binary number in l’s complement representation.
Answer:
This is an easier approach to represent signed numbers. This is for negative numbers only i.e. the number whose MSB is 1.
The steps to be followed to find l’s complement of a number:

  • Step 1 : Convert given Decimal number into Binary
  • Step 2 : Check if the binary number contains 8 bits, if less add 0 at the left most bit, to make it as 8 bits.
  • Step 3 : Invert all bits (i.e. Change 1 as 0 and 0 as 1)
    Example: Find l’s complement for (-24)10
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 31

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 10.
Explain the method of represent signed binary number in 2’s complement representation.
Answer:
The 2’s-complement method for negative number is as follows:
a) Invert all the bits in the binary sequence (i.e., change every 0 to 1 and every 1 to 0 i.e., 1’s complement)

b) Add 1 to the result to the Least Significant Bit (LSB).
Example:
2’s Complement represent of (-24)10
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 32

Question 11.
Explain binary addition with suitable example.
Answer:
The following table is useful when adding two binary numbers.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 33
In 1 + 1 = 10, is considered as sum 0 and the 1 as carry bit. This carry bit is added with the previous position of the bit pattern.

Example: Add: 10112 + 10012
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 34

Step 1 : Convert 23 and 12 into binary from
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 35
Step 2: Binary addition of 23 and 12:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 36

Question 11.
Explain binary subtraction with suitable example.
Answer:
The table for Binary Subtraction is as follows:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 37
When subtracting 1 from 0, borrow 1 from the next Most Significant Bit, when borrowing from the next Most Significant Bit, if it is 1, replace it with 0. If the next Most Significant Bit is 0, you must borrow from a more significant bit that contains 1 and replace it with 0 and 0s upto that point become Is.

Example : Subtract 10010102 – 101002.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 38
Example : Perform Binary addition for the following:
(-21)10 + (5)10

Step 1 :
Convert – 21 and 5 into binary form
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 39

Step 2 :
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 40

Step 3 :
Binary Addition of – 21 and 5 :
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 41

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress) Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

11th Computer Applications Guide Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress) Text Book Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
Which is used to move quickly from one slide to another?
a) Compass
b) Navigator
c) Fill color
d) Page border
Answer:
b) Navigator

Question 2.
Which is the shortcut key to view the slideshow?
a) F6
b) F9
c) F5
d) F10
Answer:
c) F5

Question 3.
In Impress, which views shows thumbnail versions of all your slides arranged in horizontal rows.
a) Notes
b) Outline
c) Handout
d) Slide Sorter
Answer:
d) Slide Sorter

Question 4.
Identify the default view in Impress.
a) Normal
b) Slide Sorter
c) Handout
d) Notes
Answer:
a) Normal

Question 5.
Which menu contains the Slide Transition option?
a) Slide Show
b) View
c) Tools
d) Format
Answer:
a) Slide Show

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 6.
Identify the extension of the Impress presentation.
a) .odp
b) .ppt
c) .odb
d) .ood
Answer:
a) .odp

Question 7.
In presentation tools, the entry effect as one slide replaces another slide in a slide show. Identify the option that suits after reading the statement.
a) Animation
b) Slide Transition
c) Custom animation
d) Rehearse Timing
Answer:
b) Slide Transition

Question 8.
Vanya has made a presentation on “Global Warming”. She wants to progress her slide show automatically while speaks on the topic in the class. Which features of Impress would she use?
a) Custom Animation
b) Rehearse Timing
c) Slide Transition
d) Either (a) or (b)
Answer:
b) Rehearse Timing

Part – II

II. Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is the difference between a slide and a slide show?
Answer:
A slide is a single page of a presentation. A collection of pages arranged in sequence that contain multimedia elements like text, sound video and images for presenting to an audience is called a slide show.

Question 2.
How many in-built slide layouts does impress consist of?
Answer:
Open Office Impress consists of 12 in-built slide layouts.

Question 3.
What do you understand by a presentation?
Answer:
A presentation is the process of presenting a topic to an audience. It is typically a demonstration, introduction, lecture, or speech meant to inform, inspire, motivate, or to build good will or to present a new idea or product.

Question 4.
Define a template in Impress.
Answer:
A template is a predefined design of a presentation on a particular topic which is created as the basis for a new presentation.

Question 5.
What do you understand by the slide layout?
Answer:
Slide layouts contain formatting, positioning, and placeholders for all of the content that appears on a slide. Placeholders are the containers in layouts that hold such content as text, tables, charts, videos, sounds, pictures, and clip art.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Part – III

III. Short Answers

Question 1.
How many types of views are provided by impress to its users?
Answer:
There are five types of views provided by Impress.

They are:

  • Normal View
  • Outline View
  • Notes View
  • Slide Sorter View
  • Handout View

Question 2.
Who uses the presentation software and why?
Answer:

  1. People make use of presentation software to support them when they have to give a presentation to others.
  2. Sales people give presentation to their customers, clients or managers.
  3. Teachers use presentations for effective teaching with multimedia content.
  4. Presentations are normally used to attract the large gathering of audience in a meeting or conference.

Question 3.
Define the Slide Sorter view and its significance.
Answer:
Slide Sorter view shows a thumbnail of each slide in order. Use this view to rearrange the order of slides, produce a timed slide show, or add transitions between selected slides. The Slide Sorter view contains all of the slide thumbnails. Use this view to work with a group of slides or with only one slide. Change the number of slides per row, if desired.

Question 4.
What is a Normal view? Explain.
Answer:
Normal view is the main view for creating individual slides. Use this view to format and design slides and to add text, graphics and animation effects. There are two ways to place a slide in the Slide Design area of the Normal view: clicking the slide thumbnail in the Slides pane or using the Navigator.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 5.
How are transition effects helpful in creating an effective presentation in Impress?
Answer:
Transition effects are special effects that play when we view a presentation in slide show. The transition effects appear after the current slide and before the appearance of the next slide. These effects are used to enhance the appearance of the slides.

Part – IV

IV. Explain In Brief

1. Valarmathi’s teacher asks her to create a presentation in OpenOffice Impress. As Valarmathi has never worked in Impress before, help her to perform the following tasks:

Question a.
She wants that except for the first slide, all the slides should have the same design. For this, what does she need to do?
Answer:
Using style do the required design in Master Slide. It will extend to all the slides. She can modify the style for the required slide.

Question b.
To easily communicate with her audience, she wants to provide them with a hard copy of the slides of the presentation. What should she create for it?
Answer:
To provide a hard copy to the audience, print slides in the slide show as Handout. presentation. How can he rectify this mistake in all the slides in one-shot?

Question c.
She wants to insert some pictures and movie files in some slides. How can she do that?
Answer:
She can insert pictures in the slides in two ways:

By selecting the desired slide layout which includes picture from the Layouts pane to directly insert a picture.
By clicking Insert → Picture → From File from the Menu.

Question d.
Suggest her view that would be the most suitable for showing the presentation to the audience.
Answer:
In a slide show, she can run her presentation in full screen mode and also view all the slides in a • slide show on after another.

Question e.
To make her presentation more attractive, she wants to add some effects in it. How cars she do it? Suggest.
Answer:
To make her presentation more attractive, she needs to add animation and transition effects to the slides where ever required.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 2.
Explain how a presentation can help a sales person to promote his/her products.
Answer:

  1. It helps in promoting business and increasing the sale of products.
  2. Sales persons can give presentation to their clients for effectively explain their product features.
  3. Sales persons can better convey their ideas and products details to customers as well as performance-related facts and figures to their higher officials.
  4. Instead of verbal communication, multimedia presentation may satisfy the customer and induce them towards their purchase list.

Question 3.
Siva balan created a presentation to be shown at his school’s Annual Function. Just 5 minutes before the presentation, he noticed that he has miss pelt the name of the school, which is appearing in all the 30 slides of the presentation. How can he rectify this mistake in all the slides in one-shot?
Answer:
Changing a style in a slide master result in changes to ail the slides based on that slide master. So, Sivabalan may use the Slide Master to solve the problem. He may correct the school name in the Slide Master, then changes will be reflected in all the slides of his presentation.

Question 4.
List some advantages of using templates.
Answer:
Templates uses a template design already created as the basis for a new presentation.

Advantages:

  1. We can save time and effort if we base our new presentation on a template.
  2. A template defines the background, font styles, colours and sizes for our placeholders, as well as selected bullets that match the template.
  3. Templates are designed to give our slide presentations a consistent appearance.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

11th Computer Applications Guide Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress) Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
A _______ software is a computer software package used to show information, in the form of a slide show.
a) Spreadsheet
b) Presentation
c) Database
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Presentation

Question 2.
A presentation software includes _______ major functions.
a) three
b) four
c) two
d) five
Answer:
a) three

Question 3.
A presentation software includes _______ function.
a) An editor that allows the text to be inserted and formatted
b) A method for inserting and manipulating graphic images
c) A slide-show system to display the content.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 4.
Identify the correct statement from the following:
a) Presentation software is used to create presentations, quizzes, e-iearning packages and multimedia products.
b) Most presentation software packages will create your multimedia product using a series of slides.
c) Text, images, video, animations, links and sound can be combined on each slide to create a final product.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 5.
The most commonly known presentation program is _______
a) OpenOffice.org Impress
b) Microsoft PowerPoint
c) Apple’s Keynote
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 6.
_______is OpenOffice.org’s presentations module.
a) Impress
b) Word processor
c) Spreadsheet
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Impress

Question 7.
_______ contains different elements like text, bulleted and numbered lists, tables, charts, clip art and a range of graphic objects.
a) chart
b) slide
c) spreadsheet
d) all the above
Answer:
b) slide

Question 8.
_______ has access to the spelling checker and thesaurus.
a) Slide
b) Chart
c) Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Impress

Question 9.
Impress comes with pre-packaged _______.
a) text styles
b) background styles
c) online help
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 10.
We can create a presentation by _______ method.
a) By selecting an Empty presentation
b) By selecting From template
c) By selecting from Open existing presentation
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 11.
_______ creates a presentation from scratch.
a) Empty presentation
b) From template
c) Open existing presentation
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Empty presentation

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 12.
The slide design section gives us _______ main choices.
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) five
Answer:
a) two

Question 13.
The slide design section gives us _______ choice.
a) Presentation Backgrounds
b) Presentation
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 14.
_______ is presentation output medium.
a) Screen
b) Overhead sheet
c) Paper
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 15.
How many predefined presentations exist?
a) three
b) four
c) five
d) many
Answer:
a) three

Question 16.
_______ is a predefined presentation.
a)
b) Introducing a New Product
c) Recommendation of a Strategy
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 17.
How many presentation type exist?
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
a) 2

Question 18.
_______ is a presentation type.
a) Default
b) Automatic
c) Rehearse time
d) Both A and B
Answer:
d) Both A and B

Question 19.
_______ is slide transition speed option.
a) Slow
b) Medium
c) Fast
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 20.
_______ is a pre-packaged presentation templates.
a) Introducing a New Product
b) Recommendation of a Strategy
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 21.
_______ option helps in continuing the work on a previously created presentation.
a) Empty presentation
b) From template
c) Open existing presentation
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Open existing presentation

Question 22.
How many ways are there to start Impress?
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
c) 3

Question 23.
_______ is a way to start Impress.
a) We can select the presentation from the system menu or the OpenOffice.org Quickstarter.
b) We can click the triangle to the right of the New icon on the main toolbar and select Presentation from the drop-down menu
c) choose File → New → Presentation
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 24.
The main Impress window has _______ parts.
a) three
b) four
c) five
d) six
Answer:
a) three

Question 25.
The main Impress window has _______ part.
a) Slides pane
b) The Workspace
c) The Task pane
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 26.
We can remove the Slides pane or Tasks pane from view by clicking the _______ option in the upper right corner of the window.
a) Close
b) Minimize
c) Restore
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Close

Question 27.
We can show or hide these panes using _______.
a) View → Slide Pane
b) View → Task Pane/Side bar
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 28.
_______ operation can be performed on one or more slides in the Slides pane.
a) Add new slides at any place within the presentation after the first slide.
b) Mark a slide as hidden so that it will not be shown as part of the slide show.
c) Delete a slide from the presentation if it is no longer needed.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 29.
_______ operation can be performed on one or more slides in the Slides pane.
a) Rename a slide
b) Copy the contents of one slide to another
c) Move the contents of one slide to another
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 30.
_______ operation is possible other than using slide pane.
a) Change the slide transition
b) Change the sequence of slides in the presentation.
c) Change the slide design and Change slide layout
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 31.
We define the page style for our presentation using _______.
a) Custom Animation
b) Master Pages
c) Rehearse Timing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Master Pages

Question 32.
Impress contains pre-packaged Master Pages called _______.
a) Custom Animation
b) Slide Masters
c) Rehearse Timing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Slide Masters

Question 33.
How many pre-package layouts are there in layout page.
layouts are there in
a) 12
b) 14
c) 16
d) 10
Answer:
a) 12

Question 34.
At present, it isnot possible to create _______.
a) Custom layouts
b) Custom animation
c) Custom slide show
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Custom layouts

Question 35.
Animation can be added to selected elements of a slide using ______.
a) Custom layouts
b) Custom animation
c) Custom slide show
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Custom animation

Question 36.
Transitions are available, including ______.
a) No Transition
b) Delete Transition
c) Void Transition
d) None of these
Answer:
a) No Transition

Question 37.
How many view buttons are there In Impress?
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) 5
Answer:
d) 5

Question 38.
__________ ¡s a slide view tab.
a) Normal View
b) Outline and Notes view
c) Slide sorter and Handout view
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 39.
We can hide the information in Status bar using __________ command.
a) View → Status Bar
b) Insert → StatusBar
c) Tools → Status Bar
d) Noneof these
Answer:
a) View → Status Bar

Question 40.
The ________ displays all objects contained in a document.
a) Navigator
b) Status Bar
c) Title Bar
d) Scroll Bar
Answer:
a) Navigator

Question 41.
_________ provides convenient way to move around a document and find items in it.
a) Navigator
b) Status Bar
c) Title Bar
d) Scroll Bar
Answer:
a) Navigator

Question 42.
The Navigator button Is located on the _______ toolbar.
a) Object
b) Formula
c) Function
d) Standard
Answer:
d) Standard

Question 43.
We can display the Navigator by ________.
a) Edit → Navigator
b) pressing Cttl+Shift+F5
c) Both A and B
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 44.
The default name of the object in Navigator window Is ___________
a) Picture 1
b) Object 1
c) Image 1
d) Untitled 1
Answer:
b) Object 1

Question 45.
________ view s the main view for creating individual slides.
a) Normal
b) Outline
c) Slide sorter
d) Handout
Answer:
a) Normal

Question 46.
Use _________ view to format and design slides and to add text, graphics and animation effects.
a) Normal
b) Outline
c) Slide sorter
d) Handout
Answer:
a) Normal

Question 47.
________ view shows topic titles, bulleted lists and numbered lists for each slide In outline format.
a) Normal
b) Outline
c) Slide sorter
d) Handout
Answer:
b) Outline

Question 48.
Use ______ view to rearrange the order of slides, edit titles ind headlng, rearrange the order of items In a list and add new slides.
a) Normal
b) Outline
c) Slide sorter
d) Handout
Answer:
b) Outline

Question 49.
______ view lets you add notes to each slide that are not seen when the presentation is shown.
a) Notes
b) Outline
c) Slide sorter
d) Handout
Answer:
a) Notes

Question 50.
_________ vIew shows a thumbnail of each slide in order.
a) Notes
b) Outline
c) Slide sorter
d) Handout
Answer:
c) Slide sorter

Question 51.
Use _______ view to rearrange the order of slides, produce a timed slide show, or add transitions between selected slides.
a) Notes
b) Outline
c) Slide sorter
d) Handout
Answer:
c) Slide sorter

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 52.
_______ view lets you print your slides for a handout.
a) Notes
b) Outline
c) Slide sorter
d) Handout
Answer:
d) Handout

Question 53.
There are _______ ways to place a slide in the Slide Design area of the Normal view.
a) three
b) two
C) four
d) many
Answer:
b) two

Question 54.
_______ is a way to place a slide in the Slide Design area of the Normal view.
a) Clicking the slide thumbnail in the Slides pane
b) Using the Navigator
c) Both A and B
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 55.
Only the text in each slide is shown _______ view.
a) Notes
b) Outline
c) Slide sorter
d) Handout
Answer:
b) Outline

Question 56.
Outline view serves for _________ purposes.
a) three
b) two
c) four
d) many
Answer:
b) two

Question 57.
Outline view serves for _________ purpose.
a) Making changes in the text of a slide
b) Comparing the slides with our outline
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 58.
Promote or Demote the outline level for any of the paragraphs In a slide using the __________ arrow buttons.
a) Left and Right
b) Up and Down
c) PgUp and PgDn
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Left and Right

Question 59.
Press the _________ key to open the Styles and Formatting window.
a) F12
b) F9
c) F7
d) F11
Answer:
d) F11

Question 60.
To select a group of slides, use __________ method.
a) Click on the first slide and, while pressing Ctrl, select the other desired slides
b) Click on the first slide, and while pressing the Shift key, select the final slide in the group
c) Click on the first slide to be selected. Hold down the left mouse button and Drag the cursor to the last slide thumbnail
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 61.
To make changes, right-click a slide and do the ________ using the pop-up menu.
a) Add a new slide after the selected slide
b) Delete or rename the selected slide.
c) Change the Slide Layout
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 62.
To make changes, right-click a slide and do the _______, using the pop-up menu.
a) Mark a slide as hidden
b) Copy or Cut and Paste a slide
c) Change the Slide Transition
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 63.
The first slide is normally a _______ slide.
a) Title
b) Home
c) Default
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Title

Question 64.
If we do not know the names for the pre¬packaged layouts, you can use the _______ feature.
a) Help
b) Extended Tips
c) Online Tips
d) Tooltip
Answer:
d) Tooltip

Question 65.
We will get more detailed tooltip information using _______.
a) Help
b) Extended Tips
c) Online Tips
d) Tooltip
Answer:
b) Extended Tips

Question 66.
Insert a new slide use .
a) Insert → Slide / Click the Slide icon
b) Right-click on the present slide, and select Slide -> New Slide
c) Click the empty space after the last slide also to create a new slide by right clicking New Slide
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 67.
We can delete a slide using _______.
a) Click Edit → Delete slide
b) Right dick the slide and choose Delete slide
c) Both A and B
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 68.
_______ view also to delete a single slide or multiple slides.
a) Notes
b) Outline
c) Slide Sorter
d) Handout
Answer:
c) Slide Sorter

Question 69.
To run the slide show, do
a) Click Slide Show → Siide Show
b) Click the Slide Show button
c) Press F5
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 70.
If the slide transition is On mouse dick, do _______ to move from one slide to the next.
a) Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to go to the next slide or to go back to the previous one.
b) Click the mouse button to advance to the next slide.
c) Press the Spacebar on the keyboard to advance to the next slide.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 71.
When we advance past the last slide, the message _______ appears.
a) Click to exit presentation
b) End of presentation
c) Click to restart the presentation
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Click to exit presentation

Question 72.
When we advance past the last slide, to exit the presentation.
a) Click the mouse
b) Press any key
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 73.
To exit the slide show at any time, including at the end, press the _______ key.
a) Esc
b) Ctrl
c) Alt
d) Shift
Answer:
a) Esc

Question 74.
The default file extension for Impress is
a) .odp
b) .odi
c) .ppt
d) none of these
Answer:
a) .odp

Question 75.
Identify the correct statement from the following.
a) We can save the presentation as a PPT presentation also
b) We can also export the presentation directly as pdf
c) The difference between Save and Save As is Save option will save the presentation in the folder specified by us.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 76.
A _______ is a slide that is used as the starting point for other slides.
a) Home slide
b) Layout
c) Transition
d) Slide master
Answer:
d) Slide master

Question 77.
________ is similar to a page style in Writer.
a) Home slide
b) Layout
c) Transition
d) Slide master
Answer:
d) Slide master

Question 78.
_______ controls the basic formatting of ail slides based on ft.
a) Home slide
b) Layout
c) Transition
d) Slide master
Answer:
d) Slide master

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 79.
A slide show can have ________ slide master.
a) only one
b) more than one
c) only two
d) none of these
Answer:
b) more than one

Question 80.
_______ refers to a slide which is used to create other slides.
a) Master Slide
b) Slide Master
c) Master Page
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 81.
A slide master has a defined set of characteristics, including _______.
a) The background color, graphic, or gradient
b) Objects in the background
c) Headers and Footers
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 82.
A slide master has a defined set of characteristics, including _______.
a) Placement and size of text frames
b) The formatting of text
c) Headers and Footers
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 83.
All of the characteristics of slide masters are controlled by _______.
a) Styles
b) Home Slide
c) Layout
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Styles

Question 84.
Identify the correct statement from the following.
a) Changing a style in a slide master result in changes to all the slides based on that slide master.
b) The styles of the slide master are available and applied to all slides created from that slide master.
c) The pre-packaged presentation styles can be modified, but new presentation styles cannot be created.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 85.
It is possible to view the Master slides in _______ styles.
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) five
Answer:
a) two

Question 86.
It is possible to view the Master slides in _______ style.
a) Slide Master
b) Notes Master
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 87.
New Master slide can be created by using _______.
a) The Master View dialog box
b) By right clicking slides in the Slides pane
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 88.
To insert an image in OpenOffice impress _______ is used.
a) Insert → Picture → From File
b) Tools → Picture → From file
c) Edit → Picture → From File
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Insert → Picture → From File

Question 89.
The audio and movie files can be inserted using _______.
a) Tools → Movie and Sound
b) Insert → Movie and Sound
c) Edit → Movie From File
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Insert → Movie and Sound

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 90.
The movie or audio fife inserted will be played during the slide show by _______.
a) Clicking the mouse over it
b) Right clicking the mouse over it
c) Double clicking the mouse over it
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Clicking the mouse over it

Question 91.
OLE stands for _______.
a) Object Loaded and Embedding
b) Object Linking and Exploring
c) Object Liking and Embedding
d) Object Linking and Embedding
Answer:
c) Object Liking and Embedding

Part – II

II. Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is an invariant?
Answer:
An invariant is a condition that can be relied upon to be true during the execution of a program, or during some portion of it.

Question 2.
What are the commonly used presentation programs?
Answer:
The most commonly known presentation programs are OpenOffice.org Impress, Microsoft PowerPoint and Apple’s Keynote.

Question 3.
What are the contents of a slide?
Answer:
It contains elements like text, bulleted and numbered lists, tables, charts, clip art and a range of graphic objects.

Question 4.
What are the special features are included in Impress?
Answer:
Impress has access to the spelling checker and thesaurus. Also, it comes with pre-packaged text styles, background styles with online help.

Question 5.
What are the Parts of the main Impress window?
Answer:
The main Impress window has three parts: the Slides pane, the Workspace and the Task pane.

Question 6.
How will you delete a slide in a presentation?
Answer:

  1. Select the slide you want to delete.
  2. Click Edit Delete slide.
  3. Or else, right click the slide and choose Delete slide from the pop-up menu.

Question 7.
How will you rearrange slides in a slide show?
Answer:

  1. Select the slide that you want to rearrange.
  2. Drag that slide to the desired position by holding the mouse using left click.
  3. Release the mouse once you drag the slide to the desired place.

Question 8.
How will you save a presentation?
Answer:
In order to save a presentation
Click File → Save

  1. After giving save option, Impress will open a dialog box asking the name in which this file should be saved.
  2. The default file extension for Impress is .odp.
  3. Type the name of the file you want to give in the text box space after File Name in the dialog box.
  4. We can save the presentation as a PPT presentation also.

Question 9.
What is the difference between Save and Save As option?
Answer:

  1. The difference between Save and Save As is Save option will save the presentation in the folder specified by us.
  2. Save As will save another copy of the same file either in the same folder or in a different folder specified by us.

Question 10.
Which is used to create other slides?
Answer:
Three terms Master slide, Slide master and Master page all refer to a slide which is used to create other slides.

Question 11.
How many ways Master slide can be viewed?
Answer:
It is possible to view the Master slides in two styles:

  1. Slide Master
  2. Notes Master

Question 12.
How will you create own graphics in Impress?
Answer:
We can create our own graphics using the drawing tools available in Impress. Impress contains a number of advanced drawing functions. To create more advanced graphic objects, we can use OpenOffice.org to draw and import the graphic object created into an Impress slide.

Part – III

III. Short Answers

Question 1.
Write about presentation software.
Answer:

  1. Presentation software is a computer software package used to show information, in the form of a slide show.
  2. Presentation software is used to create presentations, quizzes, e-learning packages and multimedia products.
  3. Most presentation software packages will create our multimedia product using a series of slides.
  4. Text, images, video, animations, links and sound can be combined on each slide to create a final product.

Question 2.
How methods are there to create a presentation?
Answer:
We can create a presentation by any one of the following methods.

  1. By selecting an Empty presentation
  2. By selecting From Template
  3. By selecting from Open existing presentation

Question 3.
Explain the Various ways of Starting Impress.
Answer:
We can start Impress in the following methods:

  1. We can select the presentation from the system menu or the OpenOffice.org Quick starter.
  2. Or We can click the triangle to the right of the New icon on the main toolbar and select Presentation from the drop-down menu
  3. Or else, choose File → New → Presentation.

Question 4.
What are the operations can be performed in the slide?
Answer:
It is also possible to perform the following operations:

  1. Change the slide transition following the selected slide or after each slide in a group of slides.
  2. Change the sequence of slides in the presentation.
  3. Change the slide design
  4. Change slide layout for a group of slides simultaneously.

Question 5.
Write the procedure to insert a slide.
Answer:
Step 1:
Insert a new slide. This can be done in a variety of ways:

  1. Insert → Slide.
  2. Right-click on the present slide, and select
  3. Slide → New Slide from the pop-up menu.
  4. Click the empty space after the last slide also to create a new slide by right clicking New Slide.
  5. Click the Slide icon in the Presentation toolbar.

Step 2:
Select the layout slide that best fits your needs.

Step 3:
Modify the elements of the slide like removing unneeded elements, adding needed elements (such as pictures), and inserting text.

Question 6.
How will you create, rename and dose a Master slide?
Answer:

  1. A New Master slide can be created either by using the Master View dialog box or by right clicking slides in the Slides pane.
  2. The renaming of the Master Slide is also done by the same procedure.
  3. Master Slide will be closed by using the Close Master View in the Master View dialog box.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 7.
How will you insert an image in Impress?
Answer:
In order to insert an image in OpenOffice Impress, place the cursor in the place where we want the image to be inserted. Then,Click Insert → Picture → From File option from the menu. OpenOffice Impress will display the dialog box, where we can select the image from the specific location and select open. The image will be inserted in the specified location.

Question 8.
How will you insert audio and video in a slide?
Answer:
The audio and movie/video files can be inserted by clicking Insert → Movie and Sound option from the menu. Select the audio or movie file from the specified‘location and open. It will be opened in the slide. The movie or audio file inserted will be played during the slide show by clicking the mouse over it.

Part – IV

IV. Explain In Brief

Question 1.
What are the operations can be performed in the slide pane?
Answer:
Several operations can be performed on one or more slides in the Slides pane;

  1. Add new slides at any place within the presentation after the first slide,
  2. Mark a slide as hidden so that it will not be shown as part of the slide show,
  3. Delete a slide from the presentation if it is no longer needed.
  4. Rename a slide.
  5. Copy or move the contents of one slide to another

Question 2.
Explain the procedure to print slide show as handout.
Answer:
Handout view is for setting up the layout of your slides for a printed handout Click the Handout tab in the workspace, then choose Layout in the tasks pane. We can then choose to print one, two,three, four, or six slides per page.

To print a handout.

  1. Select the slides using the Slide Sorter,
  2. Select File → Print or press Ctrl + P to open the Print dialog box,
  3. Select Options in.the bottom left corner of the Print dialog box.
  4. Check Handouts in the Contents section, and then click OK,
  5. Click OK to close the Print dialog box.

Question 3.
How will you run/stop a slide show?
Answer:
To run the slide show, do one of the following;

  1. Click Slide Show → Slide Show on the main menu bar,
  2. Click the Slide Show button on the Presentation toolbar or the Slide Sorter toolbar
  3. Press F5 or F9,
  4. If the slide transition Is automatically after x seconds, let the slide show run by itself.
  5. If the slide transition is on mouse click, do one of the following to move from one slide to the next. –
  6. Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to go to the next slide or to go back to the previous one.
  7. Click the mouse button to advance to the next slide.
  8. Press the Spacebar on the keyboard to advance to the next slide.
  9. When we advance past the last slide, the message “Click to exit presentation…” appears. Click the mouse or press any key to exit the presentation.
  10. To exit the slide show at any time, including at the end, press the Esc key.

Question 4.
Explain briefly about slide master.
Answer:
A slide master is a slide that is used as the starting point for other slides. It is similar to a page style in Writer. It controls the basic formatting of all slides based on it. A slide show can have more than one slide master.

A slide master has a defined set of characteristics, including the background color, graphic, or gradient; objects in the background; headers and footers; placement and size,of text frames, and the formatting of text.

All of the characteristics of slide masters are controlled by -styles. The styles of any new slide you create are inherited from the slide master from whom it was created. In other words, the styles of the slide master are available and applied to all slides created from that slide master. Changing a style in a slide master result in changes to all the slides based on that slide master.

It is, however, possible to modify each individual slide without affecting the slide master.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress)

Question 5.
Explain the various tools available in the Drawing toolbar.
Answer:
The Drawing toolbar contains tools that are used to create graphic objects. If this toolbar is not showing, select View Toolbars Drawing from the main menu bar.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 8 Presentation Basics (OpenOffice Impress) 1
Select : selects objects. We can select multiple objects by dragging the mouse.

Line : draws a straight line.

Arrow : draws a straight line ending with an arrowhead. The arrowhead will be placed where we release the mouse button.

Rectangle : draws a rectangle. Press the Shift button to draw a square.

Ellipse : draws an ellipse. Press the Shift button to draw a circle.

Text : creates a text box with the text aligned horizontally.

Vertical text : creates a text box with the text aligned vertically.

Curve : draws a curve.

Connectors : draws a connector line between two figures. Click the black triangle for additional connectors.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

11th Computer Applications Guide Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Text Book Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
From the options given below, choose the operations managed by the operating system.
a) Memory
b) Processor
c) I/O devices
d) All of the above
Answer:
d) All of the above

Question 2.
Which is the default folder for many Windows Applications to save your file?
a) My Document
b) My Pictures
c) Documents and Settings
d) My Computer
Answer:
a) My Document

Question 3.
Under which of the following OS, the option Shift + Delete – permanently deletes a file or folder?
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) Windows 10
d) None of the OS
Answer:
a) Windows 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
What is the meaning of “Hibernate” in Windows XP/WSndows 7?
a) Restart the Computer in safe mode
b) Restart the Computer in hibernate mode
c) Shutdown the Computer terminating a!! the running applications
d) Shutdown the Computer without closing the running applications
Answer:
d) Shutdown the Computer without closing the running applications

Question 5.
Which of the following OS is not based on Linux?
a) Ubuntu
b) Redhat
c) CentOs
d) BSD
Answer:
d) BSD

Question 6.
Which of the following in Uountu OS is used to view the options for the devices installed?
a) Settings
b) Files
c) Dash
d) VBox_GAs_5.2.2
Answer:
b) Files

Question 7.
Identify the default email client in Ubuntu.
a) Thunderbird
b) Firefox
c) Internet Explorer
d) Chrome
Answer:
a) Thunderbird

Question 8.
Which is the default application for spreadsheets in Ubuntu? This is available in the software launcher.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOffice Calc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) LibreOffice Spreadsheet
Answer:
b) LibreOffice Calc

Question 9.
Which is the default browser for Ubuntu?
a) Firefox
b) Internet Explorer
c) Chrome
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
a) Firefox

Question 10.
Where will you select the option to log out, suspend, restart, or shut down from the desktop of Ubuntu OS?
a) Session Indicator
b) Launcher
c) Files
d) Search
Answer:
a) Session Indicator

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Differentiate cut and copy options.
Answer:
Copy:

  • Copy text will leave the source as it is and place a copy in the destination.
  • After copy, the text available in both source and destination locations.

Cut:

  • Move text will shift the source to the destination i.e., the text will change its position.
  • After move, the text available in destination location alone.

Question 2.
What is the use of a file extension?
Answer:
Computers use file extensions to determine a file’s type.

Example:

  • plus1.doc Here.doc represent a document file.
  • plus1.ppt Here.ppt represent a Power Point file.

Question 3.
Differentiate Files and Folders.
Answer:
Files:

  • The files store data of any kind.
  • Information stored in the computer only in the form of file.

Folders:

  • The folders store files and other sub-folders.
  • The folders, often referred to as directories, are used to organize files on your computer.

Question 4.
Differentiate Save and save As option.
Answer:

  1. Save – The save command automatically saves the file using the same name, format and location, as when it was last saved or opened from. Save command opens a dialog box only first time saved.
  2. Save As – The save as command opens a dialog box every time in which the user can change the name of the file, the format, as well as the location of where the file is saved if needed.

Question 5.
What is open source?
Answer:
The open source means that the original source code of a software is made freely available and may be redistributed and modified at free of cost.

Question 6.
What are the advantages of open source?
Answer:
The reasons individuals or organizations choose open source software are:

  1. lower cost
  2. security
  3. no vendor ‘lock in’
  4. better quality

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 7.
Mention the different server distributions in Linux OS.
Answer:
The most popular Linux server distributors are:

  1. Ubuntu Linux
  2. Linux Mint
  3. Arch Linux
  4. Deepin
  5. Fedora
  6. Debian
  7. CentOS

Question 8.
How will you log off from Ubuntu OS?
Answer:
When you have finished working on your computer, you can choose to Log Out through the Session Indicator on the far right side of the top panel.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Part – III

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
Analyse: Why the drives are segregated? Advantages of partitioning the drive:
Answer:
Better organize your data : Partitioning a hard disk will provide us with several separate logical drives. Hence, in this way, we will be able to organize our data on every partition much more precisely.

Run different operating systems on one PC : If you desire to run several different operating systems on your computer, having separate drive partitions is mandatory in this case. It is because every operating system demands independent partition for its own.

Reduce the threats of data loss : There are multiple potential threats around our computer, such as virus infection, hardware failure, software malfunctions and so on. Therefore, we have at least two partitions on one PC, one for operating system and one for personal data. In this case, even when we need to reinstall operating system, our personal data will remain intact.

More convenient for backup and restore – It will be much easier to back up all the partitions separately than to back up a whole disk.

Improve performance – The hard disk will be able to work better on small chunks of data rather than one large drive.

Question 2.
If you are working on multiple files at a time, sometimes the system may hang. What is the reason behind it. How can you reduce it?
Answer:
Too Many Applications Running : Each application open on the system takes some internal and hardware resources to keep it running. If multiple apps and programs are running, your PC may run low on resources as memory is used by a number of applications.

Device Driver Issues : Outdated or damaged drivers can also be the reason behind frequent computer freezes. If video drivers being installed on your system are not updated, the computer might hang up while you attempt to play a video or game on the system.

Operating System Issues : To ensure smooth functionality of the machine, make sure that all updates are installed. To be able to keep the system updated, it is vital that you use a legal copy of the operating system.

Excess Heating Up : If the temperature of your system processor is higher than usual, the chances are that the computer may freeze.

Hardware Misconfiguration : One major reason behind computer freeze issue is hardware mis-configuration, This may have occurred due to mis-configured hardware component that you recently added to the computer. Alternatively, hardware component you added recently may be incompatible with the computer.

Question 3.
Are drives such as hard drive and floppy drives represented with drive letters? If so why, if not why?
Answer:
Yes.
Drives such as hard drive and floppy drives represented with drive letters.

Generally A, B: drives are assigned for floppy drives. C: is fixed for Hard Disk. D: is for next partition or another hard disk. E; and F: also can be another hard disks or another partition of same hard disk or partition on second hard disk.

D: or E; can be used for CD/DVD drives. We i can uses last drive letter upto Z; for mapping a j drive letter for another programming purposes. Also generally F: arid above drive letters are j used for network mapping purpose.

Question 4,
Write the specific use of Cortana.
Answer:
Cortana is your personal digital assistant on Windows 10 to help you find virtually anything on your device, track your packages and flights, inform you about weather and traffic information, manage your calendar and create reminders, and it can even tell you joke.

Question 5.
List out the major differences between Windows and Ubuntu OS.
Answer:
Windows:

  • Windows NT’ is the kernel used in Windows
  • Needs to pay for Windows
  • It support executable files (.exe), Virus threatening exists
  • Desktop OS does not support server
  • It does not support multiple desktop environment
  • Installation is very simple
  • Separately install MS Office in Windows
  • It does not have own software manager
  • Software installation does that by simple installation package and instructions.
  • User friendly

Ubuntu:

  • Linux is the kernel used in Ubuntu.
  • It is completely free and available as open source
  • It does not support executable files (.exe) so, mostly it is virus free OS
  • Desktop OS can also work as server
  • It supports multiple desktop environment
  • Installation is quite complex process
  • OS comes with many useful software like Office
  • It has its own software manager
  • It normally installs the software and tools by terminal
  • It is not user friendly

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 6.
Are there any difficulties you face while using Ubuntu? If so, mention it with reasons.
Answer:
Yes. There many difficulties we face while using Ubuntu.
The following are some of them.
1. Different desktop managers lead to a fragmented experience -If a user seeking help says they are on Ubuntu, you cannot be sure that they are on Unity -¬they may be on KDE, Gnome or something else which ultimately can lead to confusion.

2. Too many package managers makes Linux hard to learn and master – New Linux users wii! think the apt package manager is the only package manager. There are many other managers such as YUM and Pacman. These package managers use entirely different commands which can be confusing.

3. Lack of software – Linux users will eagerly point you to wonderful alternatives that can be acceptable. Need Adobe Photoshop? Use Gimp. Need Microsoft Office? Use LibreOffice. For basic users these alternatives may work. However, true professionals cannot trust their careers and reputations to alternative software.

4. Hardware compatibility – Hardware will be released after that kernel release and some accessory hardware will not have the needed software to interface.

Question 7.
Differentiate Thunderbird and Firefox in Ubuntu OS,
Answer:

  1. Firefox is a browser is access Internet.
  2. Thunderbird is an email client. We can install on our computer and view our emails.
  3. Both Firefox and Thunderbird are Mozilla products.

Question 8.
Differentiate Save, Save As and Save a Copy in Ubuntu OS.
Answer:
Save : This will save the document without asking for a new name or location. It will over-write the original.

Save As: This will prompt you to save the document using a dialog box. You will have the ability to change the file name and/or location.

Save A Copy: This will prompt you to save a ‘copy’ using the same dialog box as ‘save as’. You will ‘ have the ability to change the file name and/or location. If you choose the same file name and location it will over-write the original.

If you changed the name or location of the document you will be working on the original document not the copy. This means that if you make additional changes and then hit save the original will be overwritten with the new changes, but the copy you saved earlier will be left at the state of the Save A Copy.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Part – IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain the versions of ‘Windows Operating System.
Answer:
Versions of Windows Operating System.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 1
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 2

Question 2.
Draw and compare the icon equivalence in Windows and Ubuntu.
Answer:
Windows Icons:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 4
UBUNDU ICONS
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 3

Question 3.
Complete the following matrix.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 5
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 6

Question 4.
Observe the figure and mark all the window elements. Identify the version of the Windows OS.
Answer:
The element of a windows
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 7
Application Windows:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 8
Version of the Windows OS
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 9

Question 5.
Write the procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Ubuntu OS. Compare it with Windows OS.
Answer:
The procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Ubuntu OS
Creating Files :
1. We can create the files with the same procedure by clicking Files icon,

2. The following Figure shows the method of creating File by right clicking in the Desktop.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 10
3. A new File can also be created by using File menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 11
4. Deleting a File : A file created by us can be moved to trash by using right click or by using menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 12
5. Deleting a File : Deleting a File by using Edit menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 13

Rename a file:

  • Select the file.
  • Right dick on the selected file and select Rename.
  • Type the new filename and then, press Enter

The procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Windows OS

To create a file :

  • Open the application using Start button or through Icon or using Run command.
  • Enter the content.
  • Save the file using Ctrl + S.

Renaming Files : Using the FILE Menu

  • Select the File you wish to Rename.
  • Click File → Rename.
  • Type in the new name.
  • To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

To delete a file : Select the file or folder you wish to delete.

  • Right – dick the file or folder, select Delete option from the po-pup menu or Click File → Delete or press
  • Delete key from the keyboard.
  • The file will be deleted and moved to the Recycle bin.

To save a file :
Select Save option from File Menu OR press Ctrl + S and then enter the file name and press OK.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

11th Computer Applications Guide Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part – A

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
An Operating System is a(n) ________ software.
a) application
b) system
c) freeware
d) None of these
Answer:
b) system

Question 2.
________ enables the hardware to communicate and operate with other software.
a) Loader
b) Compiler
c) Interpreter
d) Operating System
Answer:
d) Operating System

Question 3.
________ acts as an interface between the user and the hardware.
a) Loader
b) Compiler
c) Interpreter
d) Operating System
Answer:
d) Operating System

Question 4.
________ controls the overall execution of the computer.
a) Loader
b) Compiler
c) Interpreter
d) Operating System
Answer:
d) Operating System

Question 5.
________ is the important functions of an Operating System.
a) Control overall system performance
b) Error detecting aids
c) Coordination between other software and users
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 6.
The most popular Operating System for desktop and laptop computers.
a) Windows Series
b) Android
c) iOS
d) Linux
Answer:
a) Windows Series

Question 7.
The most popular Operating System for smart phones.
a) Windows Series
b) Android
c) iOS
d) Linux
Answer:
b) Android

Question 8.
The most popular Operating System for Apple phones, i-Pad and i -Pod.
a) Windows Series
b) Android
c) iOS
d) Linux
Answer:
c) iOS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 9.
The most popular Open source Operating System for desktop and server.
a) Windows Series
b) Android
c) iOS
d) Linux
Answer:
d) Linux

Question 10.
Multiple applications can execute simultaneously in Windows, and this is known as ________.
a) Multitasking
b) Multiuser
c) Parallel processing
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Multitasking

Question 11.
Microsoft Windows is one of the most popular ________.
a) GUI
b) Command interpreter
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) GUI

Question 12.
Windows Operating System uses ________ as input device.
a) Keyboard
b) Mouse
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 13.
________ is used to interact with Windows by clicking its icons.
a) Keyboard
b) Mouse
c) Scanner
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Mouse

Question 14.
________ is used to enter alphabets, numerals and special characters.
a) Keyboard
b) Mouse
c) Scanner
d) Optical Character Reader
Answer:
a) Keyboard

Question 15.
________ access the applications on the computer.
a) Loader
b) Compiler
c) Interpreter
d) Operating System
Answer:
d) Operating System

Question 16.
________ program is an application program.
a) Word processing
b) Games and Spread sheets
c) Calculator
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 17.
________ is a hardware.
a) Printers and Scanners
b) Mouse
c) Digital Camera
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 18.
________ is a file mangement activity.
a) Creating and Modifying file
b) Saving a file
c) Deleting a file
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 19.
The operating system change the ________ computer setting.
a) colour scheme
b) screen saver
c) both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 20.
Windows 1.x introduced in the year ________.
a) 1992
b) 1987
c) 1985
d) 1982
Answer:
c) 1985

Question 21.
Windows 2.x introduced in the year ________.
a) 1992
b) 1987
c) 1985
d) 1982
Answer:
b) 1987

Question 22.
Windows 3.x Introduced in the year ________.
a) 1992
b) 1987
c) 1985
d) 1982
Answer:
a) 1992

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 23.
Windows 95 introduced in the year ________.
a) 1992
b) 1987
c) 1985
d) 1995
Answer:
d) 1995

Question 24.
Windows 98 introduced in the year ________.
a) 1992
b) 1988
c) 1998
d) 1995
Answer:
c) 1998

Question 25.
Windows Me introduced in the year ________.
a) 2002
b) 2000
c) 1990
d) 1995
Answer:
b) 2000

Question 26.
Wlndows-XP introduced in the year ________.
a) 2002
b) 2000
c) 1990
d) 2001
Answer:
d) 2001

Question 27.
Windows-Vista introduced in the year ________.
a) 2002
b) 2006
c) 1996
d) 2001
Answer:
b) 2006

Question 28.
Windows-7 introduced in the year ________.
a) 2002
b) 2007
c) 2009
d) 2010
Answer:
c) 2009

Question 29.
Windows-8 introduced in the year ________.
a) 2012
b) 2007
c) 2009
d) 2010
Answer:
a) 2012

Question 30.
Windows-10 Introduced in the year ________.
a) 2012
b) 2015
c) 2009
d) 2010
Answer:
b) 2015

Question 31.
In which Windows version multitaskIng concept introduced.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows 3.x
c) Windows 2.x
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Windows 3.x

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 32.
In which Windows version Start button Introduced.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows 3.x
c) Windows 2.x
d) Windows 95
Answer:
d) Windows 95

Question 33.
In Windows 95 _________feature is Introduced.
a) Task bar
b) Windows Explorer
c) Start Menu
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 34.
In Which Windows version plug and play was Introduced.
a) Wlndows-XP
b) Windows 98
c) Windows-Vista
d) WIndows 95
Answer:
b) Windows 98

Question 35.
Integration of Web browser introduced In Windows ___________ version.
a) Wlndows-XP
b) Windows 98
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows 95
Answer:
b) Windows 98

Question 36.
Which Windows version was designed to act as servers in network.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows 98
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
d) Windows-NT

Question 37.
Automated system diagnostics and recovery tools introduced in __________ Windows version.
a) Wiridows-XP
b) Windows Me
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
b) Windows Me

Question 38.
__________ versions of Windows 2000 were released.
a) 6
b) 5
c) 4
d) 3
Answer:
c) 4

Question 39.
WhIch version of Windows 2000 released for business desktop and laptop.
a) Professional
b) Data Centre Server
c) Advanced Server
d) Server
Answer:
a) Professional

Question 40.
Which version of Windows 2000 released for both a Web server and a office server.
a) Professional
b) Data Centre Server
c) Advanced Server
d) Server
Answer:
d) Server

Question 41.
Which version of Windows 2000 released for line-of-business applications.
a) Professional
b) Data Centre Server
c) Advanced Server
d) Server
Answer:
c) Advanced Server

Question 42.
Which version of Windows 2000 released for high-traffic computer networks.
a) Professional
b) Data Centre Server
c) Advanced Server
d) Server
Answer:
b) Data Centre Server

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 43.
WhIch version of Windows introduced as a stable version.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows Me
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
a) Windows-XP

Question 44.
In which version of Windows booting time was improved.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows Me
c) Windows-vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
a) Windows-7

Question 45.
_______ feature is introduced In Windows-7.
a) Aero peek
b) Pinning programms to taskbar
c) Kandwriting recognition
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 46.
Start button was removed In _________ verison of Windows.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows -8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
b) Windows -8

Question 47.
Which version of Windows served as common platform for mobile and computer.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows – 8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
b) Windows – 8

Question 48.
Windows-8 takes better advantage of _________.
a) multi-core processing
b) solid state drives
c) touch screens
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 49.
Start button was added again In _________ version of Windows.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows-8
c) Wlndows-Vista
d) Windows-10
Answer:
d) Windows-10

Question 50.
Multiple desktop feature Introduced in _________ version of Windows.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows-8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-10
Answer:
d) Windows-10

Question 51.
Cortana voice activated personal assistance Introduced In _________ version of Windows.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows-8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-10
Answer:
d) Windows-10

Question 52.
The opening saeen of Windows is called _________.
a) task bar
b) system tray
c) desktop
d) none of the above
Answer:
c) desktop

Question 53.
You can move to the Desktop any time by pressing the _________ key.
a) Winkey + D
b) Winkey + M
C) Winkey + L
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Winkey + D

Question 54.
________ is a graphic symbol representing the window elements like hies, folders, shortcuts etc.
a) Task bar
b) Icon
c) Shortcut key
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Icon

Question 55.
__________ play a vital role In GUI based applications.
a) Task bar
b) Icon
c) Shortcut key
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Icon

Question 56.
The icons which are available on desktop by default while installing Windows OS are called _________ icons.
a) quick launch
b) standard
c) default
d) desktop
Answer:
b) standard

Question 57.
The standard icon available in ail Windows OS is ________.
a) My Computer
b) My Documents
c) Recyle Bin
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 58.
________ icons can be created for any application or file or folder.
a) Standard
b) Default
c) Shortcut
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Shortcut

Question 59.
By double clicking the _________ icon, the related application or file or folder will open.
a) Standard
b) Default
c) Shortcut
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Shortcut

Question 60.
The disk drive icons graphically represent ________ disk drive options.
a) six
b) five
c) three
d) four
Answer:
b) five

Question 61.
The disk drive ¡cons available for _________.
a) Hard disk
b) CD/DVD drive
c) Pen drive
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 62.
The disk drive icons available for ________.
a) Removable storage
b) Network drive
c) Pen drive
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 63.
__________ is a typical rectangular area In an application or a document.
a) Cell pointer
b) Window
c) Table cell
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Window

Question 64.
________ is an area on the screen that displays information for a specific program.
a) Cell pointer
b) Window
c) Table cell
d) None & these
Answer:
b) Window

Question 65.
__________ is an area on a computer screen with defined boundanes, and within which information is displayed.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Application Window

Question 66.
ApplIcation window can be ________.
a) resized
b) maximized or minimized
c) placed side by side or overlap
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 67.
When two or more windows are open, only one of them is active and the rest are _________.
a) inactive
b) hidden
c) minimized
d) maximized
Answer:
a) inactive

Question 68.
A __________ ¡s a section of the screen used to display th, contents of a document.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
d) Document Window

Question 69.
When you open any application, the larger Window is called the ________.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
c) Application Window

Question 70.
__________ window ¡s used for typing, editing, drawing, and formatting the text and graphics.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
d) Document Window

Question 71.
_________ window helps the user to communicate with the Application program.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
c) Application Window

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 72.
The title bar of a window will contain __________ button.
a) minimize
b) maximize
c) close
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 73.
The __________ is seen under the title bar.
a) title bar
b) menu bar
c) tool bar
d) scroll bar
Answer:
b) menu bar

Question 74.
_________ in the menu bar can be accessed by pressing Alt key and the letter that appears underlined In the menu title.
a) Menu
b) Title
c) Tool
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Menu

Question 75.
In Windows 7, in the absence of the menu bar, click __________ and from the drop down menu, click the Layout option and select the desired item from that list.
a) System Properties
b) Install
c) IJninstall
d) Organize
Answer:
d) Organize

Question 76.
The __________ Is the area in the document window to enter or type the text of your document.
a) application space
b) text space
c) content space
d) workspace
Answer:
d) workspace

Question 77.
The scroll bars are used to scroll the workspace ________.
a) horizontally
b) vertically
c) either A or B
d) none of these
Answer:
c) either A or B

Question 78.
When we dick on the Start button, the ________ menu will appear.
a) Desktop
b) Start
c) Application
d) Explorer
Answer:
b) Start

Question 79.
UsIng the ________ menu, we can start any application.
a) Start
b) File
c) Format
d) Toots
Answer:
a) Start

Question 80.
At the bottom of the screen Is a horizontal bar called the ________.
a) scrollbar
b) taskbar
c) quick launch tool bar
d) system tray
Answer:
b) taskbar

Question 81.
Task bar contains ________.
a) Start button
b) shortcuts to various programs
c) minimized programs
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 82.
In the taskbar, the extreme right cornor we can see the ________.
a) Start button
b) shortcuts to various programs
c) minimized programs
d) system tray
Answer:
d) system tray

Question 83.
System trays contains ________.
a) volume control
b) network
c) date and time
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 84.
In the taskbar, ________ contains task for frequently used applications.
a) scroll bar
b) start button
c) quick launch tool bar
d) system tray
Answer:
c) quick launch tool bar

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 85.
By clicking ________ icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in windows-XP and Windows Vista.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
c) Computer

Question 86.
By clicking ________ icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in Windows-8.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
d) My Computer

Question 87.
The functionality of computer icon ________ in all versions of Windows.
a) differs
b) remains the same
c) slightly change
d) none of these
Answer:
b) remains the same

Question 88.
By clicking ________ icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in Windows-7.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
c) Computer

Question 89.
We can also open an application by clicking ________ on the Start menu, and the name of the application.
a) Run
b) All Programs
c) Accessories
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Run

Question 90.
To quit an application, click the ________ button in the upper right corner of the application window.
a) Minimize
b) Maximize
c) Resize
d) Close
Answer:
d) Close

Question 91.
We can also quit an application by clicking on ________ option in Windows 7.
a) File → Exit
b) File → Close
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 92.
In Windows-7, we can organize your documents and programs in the form of ________.
a) files
b) folder
c) Both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 93.
We can ________ the files and folders.
a) move and copy
b) rename and delete
c) search
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 94.
To better organise our files, we can store them in ________.
a) shortcut
b) folder
c) recycle bin
d) none of these
Answer:
b) folder

Question 95.
There are ________ ways in to create a new folder.
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
d) 2

Question 96.
________ is a command to create a new folder.
a) File → New → Directory
b) File → New → Folder
c) File → Open → Folder
d) File → New → New Folder
Answer:
b) File → New → Folder

Question 97.
The default name of the new folder is ________.
a) New folder
b) Untitled
c) No name
d) None of these
Answer:
a) New folder

Question 98.
To create a folder in the desktop ________ command is used.
a) left click → New → Folder
b) right click → New → Directory
c) double click → New → Folder
d) right click → New → Folder
Answer:
d) right click → New → Folder

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 99.
________ is an in-built word processor application in Windows OS.
a) Word
b) Wordstar
c) Wordpad
d) Notepad
Answer:
c) Wordpad

Question 100.
In Windows OS to create and manipulate text documents ________ is used by default.
a) Word
b) Wordstar
c) Wordpad
d) Notepad
Answer:
c) Wordpad

Question 101.
________ is used to open Wordpad.
a) Click Start → All Programs → Accessories → Wordpad.
b) Run → type Wordpad, click OK
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 102.
In Wordpad, save the file using ________.
a) File → Save
b) Ctrl + S
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 103.
In the Save As dialog box, select the location where you want to save the file by using ________ drop down list box.
a) file name
b) look in
c) file type
d) none of these
Answer:
b) look in

Question 104.
We can use the ________ box on the Start menu to quickly search a particular folder or file in the computer or in a specific drive.
a) Find
b) Search
c) Look in
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Search

Question 105.
The most common way of opening a file or a Folder is to ________ on it.
a) right click
b) double click
c) click and drag
d) move the mouse
Answer:
b) double click

Question 106.
How many methods are there to rename a file?
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) only one
Answer:
b) 3

Question 107.
________ is the command for cut operation.
a) Edit → Cut
b) File → Cut
c) Format → Cut
d) Window → Cut
Answer:
a) Edit → Cut

Question 108.
________ is the shortcut for cut operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
b) Ctrl + X

Question 109.
_________ is the command for copy operation.
a) Edit → Copy
b) File → Copy
c) Format → Copy
d) Window → Copy
Answer:
a) Edit → Copy

Question 110.
________ is the shortcut for copy operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
a) Ctrl + C

Question 111.
_________ is the command for paste operation.
a) Edit → Paste
b) File → Paste
c) Format → Paste
d) Window → Paste
Answer:
a) Edit → Paste

Question 112.
________ is the shortcut for paste operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
d) Ctrl + V

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 113.
________ is used for copy operation.
a) Click Edit Copy
b) Press Ctrl + C
c) Right click → Copy from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 114.
________ is used for cut operation.
a) Click Edit → Cut
b) Press Ctrl + X
c) Right click Cut from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 115.
________ is used for paste operation.
a) Click Edit → Paste
b) Press Ctrl + V
c) Right click → Paste from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 116.
There are ________ methods of transferring files to or from a removable disk.
a) 2
b) 3
c) only one
d) none of these
Answer:
a) 2

Question 117.
________ is a method of transferring files to or from a removable disk.
a) Copy and Paste
b) Send To
c) Both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 118.
If you want to select multiple files or folders, use ________.
a) Ctrl + Click
b) Shift + Click
c) Alt + Click
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Ctrl + Click

Question 119.
If you want to select consecutive files or folders, click on the first file and then use ________ at the last file.
a) Ctrl + Click
b) Shift + Click
c) Alt + Click
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Shift + Click

Question 120.
When we delete a file or folder, it will move into the ________.
a) My Document
b) My Computer
c) Recycle Bin
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Recycle Bin

Question 121.
To permanently delete a file or folder (i.e. to avoid sending a file or folder to the Recycle Bin), hold down the ________ key, and press delete on the keyboard.
a) ALT
b) SHIFT
c) CTRL
d) None of these
Answer:
b) SHIFT

Question 122.
________ is a special folder to keep the files or folders deleted by the user.
a) My Document
b) My Computer
c) Recycle Bin
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Recycle Bin

Question 123.
The user cannot access the files or folders available in the Recycle bin without ________ it.
a) deleting
b) copy
c) restoring
d) none of these
Answer:
c) restoring

Question 124.
To delete all files in the Recycle bin, select ________ option.
a) Empty the Recycle Bin
b) Clear the Recycle bin
c) Trash
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Empty the Recycle Bin

Question 125.
________ option is used to switch to another user account on the computer without closing our open programs and Windows processes.
a) log off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
b) switch user

Question 126.
_________ option is used tp switch to another user account on the computer after closing all your open programs and Windows processes.
a) log off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
a) log off

Question 127.
________ option is used to reboot the computer.
a) log off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
d) restart

Question 128.
________ option is often required as part of installing new software or Windows update.
a) log off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
d) restart

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 129.
________ option puts the computer into a low-power mode that retains all running programs and open Windows in computer memory for a super-quick restart.
a) log off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
c) sleep

Question 130.
________ option found only on laptop computers.
a) hibernate
b) shutdown
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
a) hibernate

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the functions of an operating system?
Answer:

  1. Memory Management
  2. Process Management
  3. Device Management
  4. File Management
  5. Security Management
  6. Control overall system performance
  7. Error detecting aids
  8. Coordination between other software and users

Question 2.
What are the most popular operating system suitable for desktop and laptop computers?
Answer:
All the Windows Series like Windows Vista, Windows-7 etc operating systems are suitable for desktop and laptop computers.

Question 3.
Which operating system suitable for smart phone?
Answer:
Android operating systems is suitable for smart phone.

Question 4.
Which operating system suitable for Apple phones, i-Pad and i -Pod?
Answer:
iOS operating systems is suitable for Apple phones, i-Pad and i -Pod.

Question 5.
Which open source operating system suitable for desktop and server?
Answer:
Linux operating systems is suitable for desktop and server.

Question 6.
What is multitasking?
Answer:
Multiple applications can execute simultaneously in Windows, and this is known as multitasking.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 7.
Which input and output devices used in Windows operating system?
Answer:
Windows Operating System uses both Keyboard and mouse as input devices. Mouse is used to interact with Windows by clicking its icons. Keyboard is used to enter alphabets, numerals and special characters.

Question 8.
What are the file management activities?
Answer:
File management activities are creating, modifying, saving, deleting files and folders.

Question 9.
What are the four versions of Windows 2000 and its application?
Answer:
The four versions of Windows 2000 are:

  1. Windows 2000 – Professional – for business desktop and laptop systems.
  2. Windows 2000 – Server – for both a Web server and an office server.
  3. Windows 2000 – Advanced Server – for line-of- business applications.
  4. Windows 2000 – Data Center Server – for high- traffic computer networks.

Question 10.
Write note on Windows-8.
Answer:
Windows 8 is faster than previous versions of Windows.

  1. Start button was removed.
  2. Windows 8 takes better advantage of multi core processing, solid state drives, touch screens and other alternate input methods.
  3. Served as common platform for mobile and computer.

Question 11.
What is desktop?
Answer:
The opening screen of Windows is called Desktop.

Question 12.
Write note on Icons.
Answer:
Icon is a graphic symbol representing the window elements like files, folders, shortcuts etc. Icons play a vital role in GUI based applications.

Question 13.
What do you mean by standard icon? Give an example.
Answer:
The icons which are available on desktop by default while installing Windows OS are called standard icons. The standard icons available in all Windows OS are My Computer, Documents and Recycle Bin.

Question 14.
How will you switch to desktop?
Answer:
We can move to the Desktop any time by pressing the Winkey + D or using Aero Peek while working in any application.

Question 15.
Define Window.
Answer:
Window is a typical rectangular area in an application or a document. It is an area on the screen that displays information for a specific program.

Question 16.
Write note on document window.
Answer:
A document window is a section of the screen used to display the contents of a document.

Question 17.
Write note on Recycle Bin.
Answer:
Recycle Bin : Recycle bin is a special folder to keep the files or folders deleted by the user, which means you still have an opportunity to recover them. The user cannot access the files or folders available in the Recycle bin without restoring it.

Question 18.
How will you restore file or folder from Recycle Bin?
Answer:
To restore file or folder from the Recycle Bin

  1. Open Recycle bin.
  2. Right click on a file or folder to be restored and select Restore option from the pop-up menu.
  3. To restore multiple files or folders, select Restore all items.
  4. To delete all files in the Recycle bin, select Empty the Recycle Bin.

Question 19.
How will you create a desktop shortcut?
Answer:
Creating Shortcuts on the Desktop – Shortcuts to your most often used folders and files may be created and placed on the Desktop to help automate your work.

  1. Select the file or folder that you wish to have as a shortcut on the Desktop.
  2. Right click on the file or folder.
  3. Select Send to from the shortcut menu, then select Desktop (Create Shortcut) from the sub-menu.
  4. A shortcut for the file or folder will now appear on your desktop and you can open it from the desktop in the same way as any other icon.

Question 20.
How will you log off/shutdown the computer? To Log off/Shut down the computer :
Answer:

  1. Click start → log off (click the arrow next to Shut down) or Start Shutdown.
  2. If you have any open programs, then you will be asked to close them or windows will Force shut down, you will lose any un-saved information if you do this.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 21.
Compare switch user and log off options.
Answer:

  1. Switch User : Switch to another user account on the computer without closing your open programs and Windows processes.
  2. Log Off : Switch to another user account on the computer after closing all your open programs and Windows processes.

Question 22.
When we use Lock and Restart option?
Answer:

  1. Lock : Lock the computer while you’re away from it.
  2. Restart : Reboot the computer. This option is often required as part of installing new software or Windows update.

Question 23.
Write note on Sleep mode option.
Answer:
Sleep : Puts the computer into a low-power mode that retains all running programs and open Windows in computer memory for a super-quick restart.

Question 24.
Write note on Hibernate mode option? Where it is available?
Answer:
The Hibernate option is found only on laptop computers. It puts the computer into a low-power mode after saving all running programs and open Windows on the machine’s hard drive for a quick restart.

Part – III

Explain Brief

Question 1.
What are the functions of Windows Operating System?
Answer:
The following are some of the functions of Windows Operating System.

  1. Access applications on the computer,
  2. Load any new program on the computer.
  3. Manage hardware such as printers, scanners, mouse, digital cameras etc.
  4. File management activities like creating, modifying, saving, deleting files and folders.
  5. Change computer settings such as colour scheme, screen savers of your monitor, etc.

Question 2.
What is shortcut icon? Mention its types.
Answer:
Shortcut icons can be created for any application or file or folder. By double clicking the icon, the related application or file or folder will open.

Type of shortcuts :

  • Desktop shortcut
  • Keyboard shortcut

Question 3.
Write note on disk drive icons.
Answer:
The disk drive icons graphically represent five disk drive options.

  1. Hard disk.
  2. CD-ROM/DVD Drive
  3. Pen drive
  4. Other removable storage such as mobile, smart phone, tablet etc.
  5. Network drives if your system is connected with other system.

Question 4.
What is application window? Explain with an example.
Answer:
It is an area on a computer screen with defined boundaries, and within which information is displayed. Such windows can be resized, maximized, minimized, placed side by side, overlap, and so on. An Application Window contains an open application i.e. current application such as Word or Paint. When two or more windows are open, only one of them is active and the rest are inactive.

Question 5.
Compare Application window and Document window.
Answer:
When we open any application, such as OpenOffice Writer, OpenOffice Impress or OpenOffice Calc etc, we will find two Windows on the screen. The larger Window is called the Application Window. This Window helps the user to communicate with the Application program.

The smaller window, which is inside the Application Window, is called the Document window. This Window is used for typing, editing, drawing, and formatting the text and graphics.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 6.
Write about Task bar.
Answer:
At the bottom of the screen there- is a horizontal bar called the taskbar. This bar contains the Start button(left side), shortcuts to various programs, minimized programs and in the extreme right corner you can see the system tray which consist of volume control, network, date and time etc. Next to the Start button is the quick Launch Toolbar which contains task for frequently used applications.

Task Bar:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 14

Question 7.
Explain Computer Icon.
Answer:
Computer Icon – By clicking this icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system. In windows XP, Vista, this icon is called “My computer” in Windows 8 and 10, it is called “This PC”. The functionality of computer icon reamins the same in all versions of windows as shown in the following Figure.

Computer icon in versions of Windows OS:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 15

Question 8.
Explain the method of starting and dosing applications.
Answer:
Starting and Closing Applications: Most of the applications installed on your computer are available through the start menu. Depending on the system setup, the applications in the Start menu varies.

To start an application :

  • Click the Start button and then point to All Programs. The Program menu appears.
  • Point to the group that contains the application you want to start, and then click the application name.
  • You can also open an application by clicking Run on the Start menu, and the name of the application.

To quit an application : To quit a application, click the Close button in the upper right corner of the application window.

Question 9.
How will you searching files or folders using Computer icon?
Answer:
Procedure:

  1. Click Computer Icon from desktop or from Start menu.
  2. The Computer disk drive screen will appear and at the top right corner of that screen, there is a search box option.
  3. Type the name of the file or the folder you want to search. Even if you give the part of the file or folder name, it will display the list of files or folders starting with the specified name.
  4. Just click and open that file or the folder.

Question 10.
How will you delete a file or folder?
Answer:
To delete a file or folder: Select the file or folder you wish to delete.

  1. Right-click the file or folder, select Delete j option from the po-pup menu or Click File → Delete or press.
  2. Delete key from the keyboard.
  3. The file will be deleted and moved to the Recycle bin.

Question 11.
Represent overview of an operating system using a diagram.
Answer:
Overview of an Operating System:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 16

Part – IV

Explain Detail

Question 1.
Explain the various mouse actions.
Answer:
The following are the mouse actions
Action:

  • Point to an item
  • Click
  • Right click
  • Double-click
  • Drag and drop

Reaction:

  • Move the mouse pointer over the item.
  • Point to the item on the screen, press and release the left mouse button.
  • Point to the item on the screen, press and release the right mouse button. Clicking the right mouse button displays a pop up menu with various options.
  • Point to the item on the screen, quickly press twice the left mouse button.
  • Point to an item then hold the left mouse button as you move the pointer press and you have reached the desired position, release the mouse button.

Question 2.
Draw and explain the Elements of a window.
Answer:
The elements of a window:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 17

Menu Bar :
The menu bar is seen under the title bar. Menus in the menu bar can be accessed by pressing Alt key and the letter that appears underlined in the menu title. Additionally, pressing Alt or F10 brings the focus on the first menu of the menu bar.

The Workspace:
The workspace is the area in the document window to enter or type the text of your document.

Scroll bars :
The scroll bars are used to scroll the workspace horizontally or vertically.

Corners and borders :
The corners and borders of the window help to drag and resize the windows. The mouse pointer changes to a double headed arrow when positioned over a border or a corner. Drag the border or corner in the direction indicated by the double headed arrow to the desired size. The window can be resized by dragging the corners diagonally across the screen.

Title bar :
The first line of the window is called as title bar. It contains the name of the application on its left and sizing buttons on its right.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 3.
How will you create a folder? Explain its methods with an example.
Answer:
There are two ways in which you can create a new folder:

Method I:

  • Step 1 : Open Computer Icon.
  • Step 2 : Open any drive where you want to create a new folder. (For example select D:.
  • Step 3 : Click on File → New Folder.
  • Step 4 : A new folder is created with the default name “New folder”.
  • Step 5 : Type in the folder name and press Enter key.

Method II:
In order to create a folder in the desktop:

  • Step 1 : In the Desktop, right click New → Folder.
  • Step 2 : A Folder appears with the default name “New folder” and it will be highlighted.
  • Step 3 : Type the name you want and press Enter Key.
  • Step 4 : The name of the folder will change.

Question 4.
How will you create a file in Wordpad?
Answer:
To create files in wordpad we need to follow the steps given below.

  1. Click Start → All Programs → Accessories → Wordpad or Run → type Wordpad, click OK. Wordpad window will be opened.
  2. Type the contents in the workspace and save the file using File → Save or Ctrl + S.
  3. Save As dialog box will be opened.
  4. In the dialog box, select the location where you want to save the file by using look in drop down list box.
  5. Type the name of the file in the file name text box.
  6. Click save button.

Question 5.
Explain the method of finding Files and Folders.
Answer:
You can use the search box on the Start menu to quickly search a particular folder or file in the computer or in a specific drive.

To find a file or folder:

  1. Click the Start button, the search box appears at the bottom of the start menu.
  2. Type the name of the file or the folder you want to search. Even if you give the part of the file or folder name, it will display the list of files or folders starting with the specified name.
  3. The files or the folders with the specified names will appear, if you click that file, it will directly open that file or the folder.
  4. There is another option called “See more results” which appears above the search box.
  5. If you click it, it will lead you to a Search Results dialog box where you can click and open that file or the folder.

Question 6.
Explain the various methods to Rename a file.
Answer:
You can rename using the File menu, left mouse button or right mouse button.

Method 1:
Using the FILE Menu

  • Select the File or Folder you wish to Rename.
  • Click File → Rename.
  • Type in the new name.
  • To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Method 2 :

  • Using the Right Mouse Button
  • Select the file or folder you wish to rename.
  • Click the right mouse button over the file or folder.
  • Select Rename from the pop-up menu.
  • Type in the new name.
  • To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Method 3 :
Using the Left Mouse Button

  • Select the file or folder you wish to rename.
  • Press F2 or click over the file or folder. A surrounding rectangle will appear around the name.
  • Type in the new name.
  • To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Question 7.
How will you move the files and folders? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Method I:
CUT and PASTE : To move a file or folder, first select the file or folder and then choose one of the following:

  • Click on the Edit → Cut or Ctrl + X Or right click → cut from the pop-up menu.
  • To move the file(s) or folder(s) in the new location, navigate to the new location and paste it using Click
  • Edit → Paste from edit menu or Ctrl + V using keyboard.
  • Or Right click → Paste from the pop-up menu. The file will be pasted in the new location.

Method II:
Drag and Drop : In the disk drive window, we have two panes called left and right panes. In the left pane, the files or folders are displayed like a tree structure. In the right pane, the files inside the specific folders in the left pane are displayed with various options.

  • In the right pane of the Disk drive window, select the file or folder we want to move.
  • Click and drag the selected file or folder from the right pane, to the folder list on the left pane.
  • Release the mouse button when the target folder is highlighted (active).
  • Our file or folder will now appear in the new area.

Question 8.
How will you copy the files and folders? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Copying Files and Folders:
Method I – COPY and PASTE – To copy a file or folder, first select the file or folder and then choose one of the following:

  • Click Edit Copy or Ctrl + C or right click Copy from the pop-up menu.
  • To paste the file(s) or folder(s) in the new location, navigate to the target location then do one of the following:
  • Click Edit Paste or Ctrl + V.
  • Or Right click → Paste from the pop-up menu.

Method II – Drag and Drop:

  • In the RIGHT pane, select the file or folder we want to copy.
  • Click and drag the selected file and/or folder to the folder list on the left, and drop it where you want to copy the file and/or folder.
  • Our file(s) and folder(s) will now appear in the new area.

Question 9.
How will you copy the files and folders to removable disk? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Copying Files and Folders to removable disk –

The following are methods of transferring files to or from a removable disk :

  1. Copy and Paste
  2. Send To

METHOD I : Copy and Paste:

  • Plug the USB flash drive directly into an available USB port.
  • If the USB flash drive or external drive folder does NOT open automatically, follow these steps:
  • Click Start → Computer.
  • Double-click on the Removable Disk associated with the USB flash drive.
  • Navigate to the folders in your computer containing files you want to transfer.
  • Right-click on the file you want to copy, then select Copy.
  • Return to the Removable Disk window, right- click within the window, then select Paste.

METHOD II : Send To:

  • Plug the USB flash drive directly into an available USB port.
  • Navigate to the folders in our computer containing files wou want to transfer.
  • Right-click on the file we want to transfer to your removable disk.
  • Click Send To and select the Removable Disk associated with the USB flash drive.

Part – B

Part – I

Question 1.
_________ refers to a program or software in which the source code ¡s available in the web to the general public free of cost.
a) malware
b) free source
c) open source
d) none of these
Answer:
c) open source

Question 2.
___________ is typically created as a collaborative effort in which programmers continuously improve upon the source code in the web and share the changes within the community.
a) malware
b) free source code
c) open source code
d) none of these
Answer:
c) open source code

Question 3.
_______ is one of the popular Open Source versions of the UNIX Operating System.
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Question 4.
_________ is open source as its source code is freely available.
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
C) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 5.
The most popular Linux server distributor is _______.
a) Ubuntu Linux
b) Linux Mint
c) Arch Linux
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 6.
The most popular Linux server distributor is _______.
a) Deepin and Fedora
b) Debian
c) Cent OS
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 7.
________ is a Linux-based operating system.
a) Ubundu
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ubundu

Question 8.
________ is designed for computers, smartphones, and network servers.
a) Ubundu
b) MSDOS
c) Orade
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ubundu

Question 9.
The Ubundu system is developed by a UK based company called _______.
a) Microsoft
b) Borland International
c) Cambridge
d) Canonical Ltd
Answer:
d) Canonical Ltd

Question 10.
Ubuntu was conceived in the year _______.
a) 1994
b) 2004
c) 2014
d) 2012
Answer:
b) 2004

Question 11.
Ubuntu was conceived by _______.
a) Mark Shuttleworth
b) Mark Sukerberg
c) Mark Shuttleberg
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Mark Shuttleworth

Question 12.
The desktop version of Ubuntu supports _______ software.
a) Firefox
b) chrome
c) VI.C
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 13.
Ubundu supports the office suite called _______.
a) MS-Office
b) Star Office
c) Libre Office
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Libre Office

Question 14.
Ubuntu has in-built email software called _______.
a) Firefox
b) Thunderfox
c) Firebird
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
d) Thunderbird

Question 15.
_________ gives the user access to email such as Exchange, email, Hotmail, etc.
a) Flrefox
b) Thunderfox
c) Firebird
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
d) Thunderbird

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 16.
The best feature of Ubundu is _______.
a) It is a free operating system
b) It Is backed by a huge open source community
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 17.
__________ is based on the concept of a Graphical User Interface.
a) Ubundu
b) Microsoft Windows
c) Apple
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 18.
__________ is the Icons in the Ubuntu OS.
a) Search your Computer
b) Files
c) Firefox Web browser
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 19.
__________ is a word processor software of Ubundu.
a) Libreoffice Miter
b) UbreOfficeCaic
C) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Libreoffice Miter

Question 20.
_________ Is a spreadsheet software of Ubundu.
a) UbreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) LibreOfficeCalc

Question 21.
__________ is a presentation software of Ubundu.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCaiC
c) UbreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
c) UbreOffice Impress

Question 22.
________ is the online shopping icon of Ubundu.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox
c) Bigshop
d) Walirnart
Answer:
a) Amazon

Question 23.
_________ is a Recyde Bin Icon of Libundu.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox
c) Files
d) Trash
Answer:
d) Trash

Question 24.
In Unundu, the frequently used icons in the menu bar are found on the _______.
a) left
b) middle
c) right
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
c) right

Question 25.
The most common indicators in the Menu bar are located in the _______.
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 26.
_________ manages network connections, allowing you to connect to a wired or wireless network.
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Either A or B
d) Network Indicator
Answer:
d) Network Indicator

Question 27.
__________ shows the current keyboard layout.
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Text Entry Settings
d) Network Indicator
Answer:
c) Text Entry Settings

Question 28.
The keyboard Indicator menu contains the _________ menu Items.
a) Character Map
b) Keyboard Layout Chart
c) Text Entry Settings
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 29.
_________ indicator incorporates your social applications.
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
a) Messaging

Question 30.
From Messaging Indicator, we can access ________.
a) instant messenger
b) email clients
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 31.
_________ indicator provides an easy way to adjust the volume as well as access your music player.
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
b) Sound

Question 32.
_________ indicator is a link to the system settings, Ubuntu Help, and session options
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
c) Session

Question 33.
_________ displays the current time and provides a link to your calendar and time and date settings.
a) Indator
b) Oodc
c) System Tray
d) Notification Area
Answer:
b) Oodc

Question 34.
_________ Is a session option.
a) locking your computer and user/guest session
b) logging out of a session
c) restarting the computer or shutting down completely
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 35.
The _________ shows the name of the currently selected directory.
a) Tide bar
b) System Tray
c) Notification Area
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Tide bar

Question 36.
The toolbar displays ________.
a) your directory browsing history
b) your location in the file system
c) a search button and options for your current directory view
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 37.
The default Ubuntu 16.04 theme known as ________.
a) Ambiance
b) Aspirant
c) Environment
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ambiance

Question 38.
The Launcher is equivalent to ________.
a) System Tray
b) Task bar
c) Desktop
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Task bar

Question 39.
The vertical bar of icons on the left side of the desktop Is called ________.
a) System Tray
b) Task bar
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Launcher

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 40.
The Launcher provides easy access to ________.
a) application
b) mounted devices
c) Trash
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 41.
All current applications on your system will place an con in the ________.
a) System Tray
b) Task bar
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Launcher

Question 42.
_________ icon Is equal to search button in, Windows OS.
a) Search Your Computer
b) Find
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Search Your Computer

Question 43.
_________ icon Is equivalent to My Computer Icon.
a) Your Computer
b) Files
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Files

Question 44.
We can directly go to Desktop, Documents using __________ icon.
a) You- Computer
b) Files
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Files

Question 45.
By clicking __________ Icon, we can directly browse the Internet.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Bigshop
d) Wallmart
Answer:
b) Firefox Web Browser

Question 46.
________ is equivalent to clicking the Web Browser in Task bar in Windows.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Bigshop
d) VIlmart
Answer:
b) Firefox Web Browser

Question 47.
_________ icon will directly take you to document preparation application like MS Word in Windows.
a) UbreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficecale
c) UbreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
a) UbreOffice Writer

Question 48.
_________ icon will open LibreOffice Calc application.
a) UbreOffice Writer
b) UbreOfficeCalc
c) UbreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) UbreOfficeCalc

Question 49.
_________ Is similar to MS Excel in Windows.
a) UbreOfflce Writer
b) LibreOfficeCaic
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) LibreOfficeCaic

Question 50.
__________ icon is used to prepare any presentations In Ubuntu like MS PowerPoint.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) UbreOfficecaic
c) libreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
c) libreOffice Impress

Question 51.
__________ ¡con will let you add any additional applications you want.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCaic
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) Ubundu Software
Answer:
d) Ubundu Software

Question 52.
Using ___________ icon user can buy and sell any products online.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Online Shopping
d) Walimart
Answer:
c) Online Shopping

Question 53.
___________ icon is similar to the Control panel in the Windows Operating System.
a) System Settings
b) Your Computer
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
a) System Settings

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 54.
Match the following:
a) Trash – (1) Online Shopping App
b) System Settings – (2) Recycle Bin
c) LibreOffice Impress – (3) Control Panel
d) Amazon – (4) Presentation software
a) 2, 1, 4, 3
b) 4, 3, 1, 2
c) 3, 1, 4, 2
d) 2, 3, 4, 1
Answer:
d) 2, 3, 4, 1

Question 55.
Identify the correct statement from the following:
a) In Ubundu, all the deleted Files and Folders are moved to Trash
b) Similar to Windows OS, we can create, delete the files and folders with the same procedure by clicking Files icon in Ubundu.
c) A new File or new Folder can also be created by using File menu in Ubundu
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 56.
Shutting down Ubuntu using Session ________ option.
a) Log out
b) Suspend
c) Shutdown
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What does open source code mean?
Answer:
Open Source code refers to a program or software in which the source code is available in the web to the general public free of cost.

Question 2.
What are the merits of open source code?
Answer:
Open Source code is typically created as a collaborative effort in which programmers continuously improve upon the source code in the web and share the changes within the community.

Question 3.
Write note on Linux.
Answer:
Linux was developed by Linus Torvalds – Linux is one of the popular Open Source versions of the UNIX Operating System. It is Open Source as its source code is freely available.

Question 4.
List the distributors of Linux.
Answer:
The most popular Linux server distributors are:

  1. Ubuntu Linux
  2. Linux Mint
  3. Arch Linux
  4. Deepin
  5. Fedora
  6. Debian
  7. CentOS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 5.
Write about Ubundu.
Answer:
Ubuntu is a Linux-based operating system. It is designed for computers, smartphones, and network servers. The system is developed by a UK based company called Canonical Ltd. Ubuntu was conceived in 2004 by Mark Shuttleworth, a successful South African entrepreneur.

Question 6.
Write note on Network indicator.
Answer:
Network indicator – This manages network connections, allowing you to connect to a wired or wireless network.

Question 7.
Write note on Messaging indicator.
Answer:
Messaging indicator – This incorporates our social applications. From here, we can access instant messenger and email clients.

Question 8.
Write note on Sound indicator.
Answer:
Sound indicator – This provides an easy way to adjust the volume as well as access your music player.

Question 9.
Write note on clock.
Answer:
Clock – This displays the current time and provides a link to your calendar and time and date settings.

Question 10.
Write about session indicator.
Answer:
Session indicator – This is a link to the system settings, Ubuntu Help, and session options like locking your computer, user/guest session, logging out of a session, restarting the computer, or shutting down completely.

Question 11.
Write about Title bar of Ubuntu.
Answer:
Title bar – The title bar shows the name of the currently selected directory. It also contains the Close, Minimize, and Maximize buttons.

Question 12.
Write about Tool bar of Ubuntu.
Answer:
Toolbar – The toolbar displays your directory browsing history, your location in the file system, a search button, and options for your current directory view.

Question 13.
Write about the Launcher.
Answer:
The vertical bar of icons on the left side of the desktop is called the Launcher. The Launcher provides easy access to applications, mounted devices, and the Trash. All current applications on your system will place an icon in the Launcher.

Part – III

Explain Brief

Question 1.
What are the features of Ubundu?
Answer:
Features of Ubuntu:

  1. The desktop version of Ubuntu supports all norma! software like Windows such as Firefox, Chrome, VLC, etc.
  2. It supports the office suite called LibreOffice.
  3. Ubuntu has in-built email software called Thunderbird, which gives the user access to email such as Exchange, Gmail, Hotmail, etc.
  4. There are free applications for users to view and edit photos, to manage and share videos.
  5. It is easy to find content on Ubuntu with the smart searching facility.
  6. The best feature is, it is a free operating system and is backed by a huge open source community.

Question 2.
What are the names of the icons in the Ubuntu OS?
Answer:

  1. Search your Computer.
  2. Files.
  3. Firefox Webbrowser.
  4. LibreOffice Writer.
  5. LibreOfficeCalc.
  6. LibreOffice Impress.
  7. Ubuntu Software.
  8. Amazon.
  9. System Settings.
  10. Trash.

Question 3.
Explain about Ubundu menu bar.
Answer:
Menu bar – The menu bar is located at the top of the screen, The menu bar Incorporates common functions used in Ubuntu. The frequently used icons in the menu bar are found on the right. The most common indicators in the Menu bar are located in the indicator or notification area.

Indicators in the Menu bar:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 18

Question 4.
Write note on Text entry settings.
Answer:
Text entry settings : This shows the current keyboard layout (such as En, Fr, Ku, and so on. If more than one keyboard layout is shown, it allows you to select a keyboard layout out of those choices. The keyboard indicator menu contains the following menu items: Character Map, Keyboard Layout Chart, and Text Entry Settings.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 5.
Write about Ubundu desktop background.
Answer:
The desktop background Below the menu bar at the top of the screen is an image covering the entire desktop. This is the default desktop background, or wallpaper;, belonging to the default Ubuntu 16.04 theme known as Ambiance.

The Ubuntu 16.04 default desktop:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 19

Question 6.
Explain Ubuntu Shutting down method.
Answer:
Shutting down Ubuntu using Session options:
When you have finished working on your computer, you can choose to Log Out, Suspend or Shut down through the Session Indicator on the far right side of the top panel.

Session Options:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 20

Part – IV

Explain Detail

Question 1.
Explain the elements of Ubuntu,
Answer:
Search your Computer Icon : This icon is equal to search button in Windows OS. Here, you have to give the name of the File or Folder for searching them.

Files : This icon is equivalent to My Computer icon. From here, you can directly go to Desktop, Documents and so on.

Firefox Web Browser : By clicking this icon, you can directly browse the Internet. This is equivalent to clicking the Web Browser in Task bar in Windows.

Online Shopping icon : Using this icon user can buy and sell any products online.

System Settings Icons : This icon is similar to the Control panel in the Windows Operating System. But here, you need to authenticate the changes by giving your password. You cannot simply change as you do in Windows.

Trash : This icon is the equivalent of Recycle bin of windows OS. All the deleted Flies and Folders are moved here.

Question 2.
Explain the method creating, deleting files/ folder in Ubuntu.
Answer:
Creating, Deleting Files/Folders: Similar to Windows OS, you can create, delete the files and folders with the same procedure by clicking Files icon. The following Figure shows the method of creating File or Folder by right clicking in the Desktop.

Creating a File or Folder by right clicking
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 21
A new File or new Folder can also be created by using File menu.

Creating a File or Folder by using File Menu:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 22
Deleting a File/Folder : A file / folder created by you can be moved to trash by using right click or by using menu.

Deleting a File or Folder by right clicking
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 23
Deleting a File or Folder by using Edit menu
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 24

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 3.
Explain LibreOffice Writer, LibreOffice Cacl and LibreOffice Impress.
Answer:
LibreOffice Writer: This icon will directly take you to document preparation application like MS Word in Windows.

LibreOffice Writer Window:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 24

Libre Office Cale : This icon will open LibreOffice Calc application. It is similar to MS Excel in Windows.

Libre Office Cale Window:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 26

LibreOffice Impress : By clicking this icon, you can open LibreOffice Impress to prepare any presentations in Ubuntu like MS PowerPoint.

LibreOffice Impress Window:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 28

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

11th Computer Applications Guide Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Text Book Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
Operating system is a ________.
a) Application Software
b) Hardware
c) System Software
d) Component
Answer:
c) System Software

Question 2.
Identify the usage of Operating Systems ________.
a) Easy interaction between the human and computer
b) Controlling input & output Devices
c) Managing use of main memory
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 3.
Which of the following is not a function of an Operating System?
a) Process Management
b) Memory Management
c) Security management
d) Complier Environment
Answer:
d) Complier Environment

Question 4.
Which of the following OS is a Commercially licensed Operating system?
a) Windows
b) UBUNTU
C) FEDORA
d) REDHAT
Answer:
a) Windows

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 5.
Which of the following Operating systems support Mobile Devices?
a) Windows 7
b) Linux
c) BOSS
d) IOS
Answer:
d) IOS

Question 6.
File Management manages ________.
a) Files
b) Folders
c) Directory systems
d) All the Above
Answer:
d) All the Above

Question 7.
Interactive Operating System provides ________.
a) Graphics User Interface (GUI)
b) Data Distribution
c) Security Management
d) Real Time Processing
Answer:
a) Graphics User Interface (GUI)

Question 8.
Android is a ________.
a) Mobile Operating system
b) Open Source
c) Developed by Google
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 9.
Which of the following refers to Android operating system’s version?
a) JELLY BEAN
b) UBUNTU
c) OS/2
d) MITTIKA
Answer:
a) JELLY BEAN

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the advantages of management in Operating System?
Answer:

  1. Keeping track of which portion of memory are currently being used and who is using them.
  2. Determining which and data to move in and out of memory.
  3. Allocation and de-allocation of memory blocks as needed by the program in main memory.

Question 2.
What is the multi-user Operating system?
Answer:
It is used in computers and laptops that allow same data and applications to be accessed by multiple users at the same time. The users can also communicate with each other. Windows, Linux and UNIX are examples for multi-user Operating System.

Question 3.
What is a GUI?
Answer:
The GUI is a window based system with a pointing device to direct I/O, choose from menus, make selections and a keyboard to enter text.

Question 4.
List out different distributions of Linux operating system.
Answer:
Linux distributors are Ubuntu, Mint, Fedora, RedHat, Debian, Google’s Android, Chrome OS, and Chromium OS.

Question 5.
What are the security management features available in Operating System?
Answer:
The Operating System provides three levels of securities to the user end. They are:

  1. File access level
  2. System level
  3. Network level

Question 6.
What is multi-processing?
Answer:
This is a one of the features of Operating System. It has two or more processors for a single running process.

Question 7.
What are the different Operating Systems used in computer?
Answer:

  1. Single User Operating Systems
  2. Multi-user Operating Systems
  3. Distributed Operating Systems

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Part – III

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
What are the advantages and disadvantages of Time-sharing features?
Answer:
Advantages:

  • Many applications can run at the same time.
  • The CPU is not idle.
  • Provides the advantage of quick response.

Disadvantages:

  • It consumes much resources.
  • Constraint on security and integrity of data.
  • Reliability constraint exists.

Question 2.
Explain and List out examples of mobile operating system.
Answer:
Mobile, devices such as phones, tablets and MP3 players are different from desktop and laptop computers and hence they need special Operating Systems. Examples of mobile Operating Systems are Apple iOS and Google Android. Operating systems for mobile devices generally are not as fully featured as those made for desktop and laptop computers and they are not able to run all software.

Question 3.
What are the differences between Windows and Linux Operating system?
Answer:
Windows:

  • It is a licensed OS
  • Vulnerable to viruses and malware attacks
  • Windows must boot from the primary- partition
  • Windows file name are not case sensitive
  • Windows uses the micro kernel which takes less space

Linux:

  • Linux is an open source operating system
  • More secure
  • It can be booted from either primary or logical partition
  • In Linux, file names are case sensitive
  • Linux uses the monolithic kernel which consumes more running space

Question 4.
Explain the process management algorithms in Operating System.
Answer:
The following process management algorithms are mainly used to allocate the job to the processor.

  1. FIFO – This algorithm is based on queuing technique.
  2. SJF – This algorithm works based on the size of the job being executed by the CPU.
  3. Round Robin – The Round Robin (RR) scheduling algorithm is designed especially for time sharing systems.
  4. Based on Priority – The given job (process) is assigned based on a Priority.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Part – IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain the concept of a Distributed Operating System.
Answer:
Distributed Operating System takes care of the data and application that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network (internet/intranet). The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world. The user can handle the data from different locations. The users can access as if it is available on their own computer.

The advantages of distributed Operating System are as follows:

  • A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
  • Many computer resources can be added easily in the network.
  • Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
  • Reduces the load on the host computer.

Question 2.
Explain the main purpose of an operating system.
Answer:
The main use of Operating System is:

  1. To ensure that a computer can be used to extract what the user wants it do.
  2. Easy interaction between the users and computers.
  3. Starting computer operation automatically when power is turned on (Booting).
  4. Controlling Input and Output Devices.
  5. Manage the utilization of main memory.
  6. Providing security to user programs.

Question 3.
Explain advantages and disadvantages of open source operating systems.
Answer:
Advantages of Open Source Software:

  • It is generally free and you do not have to pay for using it.
  • Created by skillful and talented people.
  • Highly reliable.
  • Help you become more flexible.
  • Open source software provides great platform for innovations and creativity.

Disadvantages of Open Source Software:

  • Vulnerable to malicious users.
  • Most interfaces are not so user-friendly and easy to use.
  • Don’t come with extensive support.
  • Open source software is hard to learn. It is not straightforward to use.
  • Many of the latest hardware that are being produced is incompatible.

11th Computer Applications Guide Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
________ is set of instructions that perform specific task.
a) hardware
b) freeware
c) software
d) none of these
Answer:
c) software

Question 2.
________ interacts basically with the hardware to generate the desired output.
a) hardware
b) freeware
c) software
d) None of these
Answer:
c) software

Question 3.
Software, is classified into ________ types.
a) three
b) two
c) four
d) many
Answer:
b) two

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 4.
________ is a software classification.
a) application software
b) system software
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 5.
________ is a set of programs to perform specific task.
a) application software
b) system software
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) application software

Question 6.
________ is an application software.
a) MS-Word
b) VLC player
c) MS-Excel
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 7.
________ is an application software to create text document.
a) MS-Word
b) VLC player
c) MS-Excel
d) All the above
Answer:
a) MS-Word

Question 8.
________ is an application software to play audio, video files.
a) MS-Word
b) VLC player
c) MS-Excel
d) All the above
Answer:
b) VLC player

Question 9.
________ is a type of computer program that is designed to run the computer’s hardware and application programs.
a) application software
b) system software
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) system software

Question 10.
________ is a system software.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 11.
A(n) ________ is a system software which serves as an interface between a us# and a computer.
a) Operating System
b) Language processes
c) VLC player
d) MS-Word
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 12.
________ controls input, output all other peripheral devices.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) VLC player
d) MS-Word
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 13.
The function of an Operating System includes ________
a) file management and memory management
b) process management
c) device management
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 14.
Without a(n) ________, a computer cannot effectively manage all the resources.
a) Operating System
b) Language
c) Both A and B
d) None of the above
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 15.
When a computer is switched on, loaded in to ________ memory automatically.
a) Operating System
b) Language
c) Application program
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 16.
A user cannot communicate directly computer ________.
a) software
b) hardware
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) hardware

Question 17.
The popular Operating System used in personal computers and laptops is ________.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) Linux
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 18.
The mobile devices mostly use ________ mobile OS.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 19.
Operating System manage ________
a) Software
b) Hardware
c) Both A and B
d) None of the above
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 20.
Operating System is basically – an interface between the ________.
a) user and hardware
b) user and memory
c) programmer and hardware
d) none of these
Answer:
a) user and hardware

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 21.
________ works as translator.
a) user and hardware
b) user and freeware
c) programmer and hardware
d) operating system
Answer:
d) operating system

Question 22.
________ translates the user request into machine language.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) Application program
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 23.
________ converts processed information into user readable form.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) Application program
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 24.
The main use of Operating system is ________
a) Controlling Input and Output Devices
b) Manage the utilization of main memory
c) Providing security to user programs
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 25.
An operating system allows only a single user to perform a task at a time is called as a ________ OS.
a) Single User
b) Single Task
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Single User

Question 26.
A user task is a ________ function.
a) printing a document
b) writing a file to disk
c) editing a file or downloading a file
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 27.
________ is an example for a single user and single task Operating System.
a) Unix
b) MS-DOS
c) Both A and B
d) None these
Answer:
b) MS-DOS

Question 28.
________ OS is used in computers and laptops.
a) Multi user
b) Multi task
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Multi user

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 29.
________ allows same data and applications to be accessed by multiple users at the same time.
a) Multi user
b) Multi task
c) Single user
d) MS-DOS
Answer:
a) Multi user

Question 30.
In ________ OS users can also communicate with each other.
a) Multi user
b) Multi task
c) Single user
d) MS-DOS
Answer:
a) Multi user

Question 31.
________ is an example for multi-user operating system.
a) Windows
b) Linux
c) UNIX
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 32.
A cheap computer can be build with ________
a) raspbion OS
b) Raspberry Pi
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 33.
________ is a platform that’s designed to teach how to build a computer.
a) raspbion OS
b) Raspberry Pi
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) raspbion OS

Question 34.
________ is a key feature of an OS.
a) User interface
b) Fault tolerance
c) Memory management
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 35.
________ is the only way that user can make interaction with a computer.
a) User interface
b) Fault tolerance
c) Memory management
d) All the above
Answer:
a) User interface

Question 36.
________ is the main reason for the key success of GUI.
a) User friendly
b) Fault tolerance
c) Robust
d) None of these
Answer:
a) User friendly

Question 37.
GUI means ________.
a) Graphical User Interlink
b) Good User Interface
c) Graph User Interface
d) Graphical User Interface
Answer:
d) Graphical User Interface

Question 38.
The ________ is a window based system.
a) command mode
b) GUI
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) GUI

Question 39.
________ are playing vital role of the particular application.
a) Icons
b) Commands
c) Navigations
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Icons

Question 40.
The ________ should satisfy the customer based on their needs.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 41.
The ________ should save user’s precious time.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Question 42.
The ________ is to satisfy the customer.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Question 43.
The ________ should reduce number of errors committed by the user.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) none of these
Answer:
d) none of these

Question 44.
________ is the process of controlling and coordinating computer’s main memory.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory/ management
d) none of these
Answer:
c) memory/ management

Question 45.
________ is the process of assigning memory space to various running programs to optimize overall computer performance.
a) user interface
b) memory management
c) fault tolerance
d) all the above
Answer:
b) memory management

Question 46.
________ involves the allocation of specific memory blocks to individual programs based on user demands.
a) user interface
b) memory management
c) fault tolerance
d) all the above
Answer:
b) memory management

Question 47.
________ ensures the availability of adequate memory for each running program at all times.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) none of these
Answer:
c) memory management

Question 48.
The objective of Memory Management process is to improve ________.
a) the utilization of the CPU
b) the speed of the computer’s response
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 49.
The Operating System is responsible for the ________.
a) Keeping track of which portion of memory are currently being used and who is using them.
b) Determining which processes and data to move in and out of memory.
c) Allocation and de-allocation of memory blocks as needed by the program in main memory.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 50.
________ is function that includes creating and deleting processes.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) none of these
Answer:
a) process management

Question 51.
________ providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) none of these
Answer:
a) process management

Question 52.
A(n) ________ is the unit of work in a computer.
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) none of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 53.
A word-processor program being run by an individual user on computer is a ________.
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) none of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 54.
A system task, such as sending output to a printer or screen, can also be called as a ________ .
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) none of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 55.
A computer processes are classified as _________ categories.
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
d) 2

Question 56.
A category of computer process is ________ .
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 57.
________ process is executed by system code.
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) operating system process

Question 58.
________ process is execute by user code.
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) user process

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 59.
All the computer processes can potentially execute concurrently on a ________ CPU.
a) single
b) parallel
c) linear
d) none of these
Answer:
a) single

Question 60.
A process needs certain resources including _________ to finish its task.
a) CPU time
b) Memory
c) Files and I/O devices
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 61.
The Operating System is responsible for the ________ activity.
a) Scheduling processes and threads on the CPUs
b) Suspending and resuming processes
c) Providing mechanisms for process synchronization
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 62.
The ________ algorithm is mainly used to allocate the job to the processor.
a) FIFO or SJF
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 63.
FIFO means ________.
a) First In Fast Out
b) Fast In First Out
c) First In First Out
d) None of these
Answer:
c) First In First Out

Question 64.
________ is based on queuing technique.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) All the above
Answer:
a) FIFO

Question 65.
________ algorithm works based on the size of the job being executed by the CPU.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
d) SJF

Question 66.
________ algorithm is designed especially for time sharing systems.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
b) Round Robin

Question 67.
In ________ algorithm jobs are assigned and processor time in a circular method.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
b) Round Robin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 68.
The challenge in computer and software industry is to protect user’s ________ from hackers.
a) data
b) operation
c) hardware
d) all the above
Answer:
a) data

Question 69.
The Operating System provides ________ levels of securities to the user end.
a) four
b) three
c) two
d) many
Answer:
b) three

Question 70.
The Operating System security is ________.
a) File access level
b) System level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 71.
In order to access the files created by other people, you should have the ________.
a) user name and password
b) ogin id
c) email id
d) access permission
Answer:
d) access permission

Question 72.
File aces permissions can be granted by the ________.
a) creator of the file
b) administrator of the system
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 73.
________ level security is offered by the password in a multi-user environment.
a) File access
b) System
c) Network
d) All the above
Answer:
b) System

Question 74.
________ offers the password facility.
a) Windows
b) Linux
c) Windows and Linux
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Windows and Linux

Question 75.
________ security is an indefinable one.
a) File access level
b) System level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Network level

Question 76.
The people from all over the world try to provide ________ security.
a) File access level
b) System level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Network level

Question 77.
The Operating Systems should be ________.
a) patience
b) error free
c) robust
d) none of these
Answer:
c) robust

Question 78.
When there is a fault, the ________ should not crash.
a) application program
b) operating system
c) data
d) none of these
Answer:
b) operating system

Question 79.
The operating system manages the ________ on a computer.
a) files
b) folders
c) directory systems
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 80.
Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of ________.
a) blocks
b) files
c) archives
d) none of these
Answer:
b) files

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 81.
FAT stands for ________.
a) File Allocation Task
b) File Authentication Table
c) Fixed Allocation Table
d) File Allocation Table
Answer:
d) File Allocation Table

Question 82.
The FAT stores general information about files like ________.
a) filename and type
b) size
c) starting address and access mode
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 83.
________ is the file access mode.
a) sequential
b) indexed / indexed-sequential
c) direct/relative
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 84.
The ________ of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files and also updates the FAT.
a) system agent
b) file agent
c) file supervisor
d) file manager
Answer:
d) file manager

Question 85.
ext2 stands for ________.
a) secondary extended file system
b) second extended folder system
c) second extended file scheme
d) second extended file system
Answer:
d) second extended file system

Question 86.
ext2 used in ________.
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
c) Unix
d) none of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Question 87.
NTFS stands for ________.
a) New Technology Focus System
b) New Technology File System
c) New Technology Filter System
d) New Trend File system
Answer:
b) New Technology File System

Question 88.
NTFS developed by ________.
a) Apple
b) IBM
c) Intel
d) Microsoft
Answer:
d) Microsoft

Question 89.
________ has two or more processors for a single running process.
a) Mega processing
b) Micro processing
c) Multi-processing
d) Mixed-processing
Answer:
c) Multi-processing

Question 90.
Processing takes place in parallel is known as __________ processing.
a) parallel processing
b) distributed processing
c) parent
d) none of these
Answer:
a) parallel processing

Question 91.
________ feature is used for high speed execution which increases the power of computing.
a) parallel processing
b) distributed processing
c) multi-processing
d) none of these
Answer:
a) parallel processing

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 92.
________ allows execution of multiple tasks or processes concurrently.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Question 93.
In ________ each task a fixed time is allocated.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Question 94.
In ________ the processor switches rapidly between various processes after a time is elapsed or the process is completed.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Question 95.
________ feature takes care of the data and application that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network.
a) Multi user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 96.
________ is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world.
a) Multi user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 97.
In ________ OS the user can handle the data from different locations.
a) Multiuser OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 98.
________ is the advantage of distributed Operating System.
a) A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
b) Many computer resources can be added easily in the network
c) Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 99.
________ reduces the load on the host computer.
a) Multi user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 100.
Prominent OS is ________.
a) UNIX and Windows
b) Linux
c) iOS and Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 101.
Modem operating systems use a ________.
a) command mode interaction
b) GUI
c) visual
d) none of these
Answer:
b) GUI

Question 102.
OS can be ________.
a) Proprietary with a commercial license
b) Open source
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 103.
________ is a proprietary with a commercial license OS.
a) Microsoft Windows
b) Apple Mac OS
c) Apple iOS
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 104.
________ is a open source free license OS.
a) Unix
b) Linux
c) Google’s Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 105.
Unix derive originally from ________.
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) None of these
Answer:
b) AT&T Bell Labs

Question 106.
The development of the Unix began in the year ________.
a) 1960
b) 1966
c) 1970
d) 1976
Answer:
c) 1970

Question 107.
The Unix was developed by ________.
a) Ken Thompson
b) Dennis Ritchie
c) Both A and B
d) Bjarne Stroustroop
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 108.
________ OS can be modified and distributed by anyone around the world.
a) MSDOS
b) Windows
c) Linux
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Linux

Question 109.
Most of the servers run on Linux because ________.
a) it is easy to customize
b) it is rigid
c) it is not case sensitive
d) None of these
Answer:
a) it is easy to customize

Question 110.
________ is Linux distributor.
a) Ubuntu
b) Mint
c) Fedora
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 111.
________ is Linux distributor.
a) RedHat
b) Debian
c) Google’s Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 112.
________ is Linux distributor.
a) Chrome OS
b) Chromium OS
c) Both A and B
d) MSDOS
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 113.
The Linux operating system was originated in the year ________.
a) 1990
b) 1991
c) 1890
d) 1980
Answer:
b) 1991

Question 114.
The Linux operating system was developed by ________.
a) Ken Thompson
b) Dennis Ritchie
c) Linus Torvalds
d) Bjarne Stroustroop
Answer:
c) Linus Torvalds

Question 115.
Linux is similar to the ________ operating system.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MSDOS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) UNIX

Question 116.
Unix and the C programming language were developed by ________.
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) None of these
Answer:
b) AT&T Bell Labs

Question 117.
________ OS is primarily targeted to Intel and AMD architecture based computers.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MSDOS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Windows

Question 118.
________ is a Windows-alternative open source operating system.
a) RearOS
b) ReachOS
c) ReactOS
d) None of these
Answer:
c) ReactOS

Question 119.
________ is a mobile device.
a) phones
b) tablets
c) MP3 players
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 120.
Android is a mobile operating system developed by
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) Google
Answer:
d) Google

Question 121.
________ OS is designed primarily for touch screen mobile devices such as smart phones and tablets.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MSDOS
d) Android
Answer:
d) Android

Question 122.
Google has developed ________ for televisions.
a) Android Wear
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android Wear

Question 123.
Google has developed ________ for cars.
a) Android Auto
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android Auto

Question 124.
Google has developed ________ for wrist watches.
a) Android Wear
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android Wear

Question 125.
Google has developed separate Android for ________.
a) game consoles
b) digital cameras
c) PCs
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 126.
________ is an Android version.
a) Alpha and Beta
b) Cupcake and Donut
c) Eclair and Froyo
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 127.
________ is an Android version.
a) Gingerbread
b) Honeycomb
c) Ice cream Sandwich
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 128.
________ is an Android version.
a) Jelly Bean
b) Kitkat and Lollipop
c) Marshmallow and Nought
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 129.
________ is a mobile Operating System created and developed by Apple Inc.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Question 130.
________ is a mobile Operating System created and developed only for harware of Apple iPhone.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Question 131.
________ is the second most popular mobile Operating System globally.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Question 132.
________ is the top most popular mobile Operating System globally.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android

Question 133.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 1is the logo of ________ OS
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) MAc OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Windows 8

Questions 134.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 2is the logo of ________ OS
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) MAc OS
d) None of these
Answer:
c) MAc OS

Questions 135.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 3is the logo of ________ OS.d
a) Linux
b) Windows 8
c) MAc OS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Questions 136.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 4is the logo of ________ OS
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) MAc OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Windows 8

Questions 137.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 5is the logo of ________ OS
a) Android
b) Apple iOS
c) MAc OS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Questions 138.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 6is the logo of ________ OS
a) Android
b) Apple iOS
c) MAc OS
d) Unix
Answer:
d) Unix

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is software?
Answer:
A software is set of instructions that perform specific task. It interacts basically with the hardware to generate the desired output.

Question 2.
What are the classifications of software? Software is classified into two types:
Answer:

  1. Application Software.
  2. System Software.

Question 3.
What is application software?
Answer:
Application software is a set of programs to perform specific task. For example MS-word is an application software to create text document.

Question 4.
What is system software?
Answer:
System software is a type of computer program that is designed to run the computer’s hardware and application programs.

Example : Operating System.

Question 5.
List any 4 application software.
Answer:

  1. MS-Word.
  2. VLC player.
  3. MS-Excel.
  4. MS-Access.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 6.
List any 4 system software.
Answer:

  1. Operating System.
  2. Language Processor.
  3. Compiler.
  4. Loader.

Question 7.
Which serves as an interface between a user and a computer?
Answer:
An Operating System (OS) is a system software which serves as an interface between a user and a computer.

Question 8.
What are the f unctions of an operating system?
Answer:
The functions of an Operating System include file management, memory management, process management and device management and many more.

Question 9.
What are the popular operating systems used in personal computers and laptops?
Answer:
The popular Operating Systems used in personal computers and laptops are Windows, UNIX and Linux.

Question 10.
What are the popular operating systems used in mobile devices?
Answer:
The mobile devices mostly use Android and iOS as mobile OS.

Question 11.
What are the prominent operating Systems? Prominent OS are as follows:
Answer:

  1. UNIX.
  2. Microsoft Windows.
  3. Linux.
  4. iOS.
  5. Android.

Question 12.
How OS cars be developed and released?
Answer:
OS can be either proprietary with a commercial license or can be open source.

Question 13.
Write note on React OS.
Answer:
React OS is a Windows-alternative open source operating system, which is being developed on the principles of Windows – without using any of Microsoft’s code..

Question 14.
Write note on Microsoft Windows.
Answer:
Microsoft Windows is a family of proprietary operating systems designed by Microsoft Corporation and primarily targeted to Intel and AMD architecture based computers.

Question 15.
Which OS is used to build a cheap computer?
Answer:
Build a cheap computer with raspbion OS and a Raspberry Pi.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 16.
Write about raspbion OS.
Answer:
Raspbion OS is a platform that’s designed to teach how to build a computer, what every part of a circuit board does, and finally how to code apps or games. The platform is available in pre-designed kits.

Question 17.
Write not on User Interface.
Answer:
User interface is one of the significant features in Operating System. The only way that user can make interaction with a computer. If the computer interface is not user-friendly, the user slowly reduces the computer usage from their normal life.

Question 18.
What is the objective of memory management?
Answer:
The objective of Memory Management process is to improve both the utilization of the CPU and the speed of the computer’s response to its users via main memory.

Question 19.
What is process management?
Answer:
Process management is function that includes creating and deleting processes and providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other.

Question 20.
What is process? Give an exampe.
Answer:
A process is the unit of work in a computer. A word¬processing program being run by an individual user on a computer is a process.

Question 21.
Give any two examples for a process. Examples:
Answer:

A word-processing program being run by an individual user on a computer.
System task, such as sending output to a printer or screen.

Question 22.
What are the classification of a process?
Answer:
A computer consists of a collection of processes. They are classified as h/vo categories:

Operating System processes which is executed by system code.
User Processes which is execute by user code.

Question 23.
What are the requirements of a process?
Answer:
A process needs certain resources including CPU time, memory, files and I/O devices to finish its task.

Question 24.
What is the major challenge in computer and software industry?
Answer:
The major challenge in computer and software industry is to protect user’s legitimate data from hackers.

Question 25.
Explain File Access level security.
Answer:
In order to access the files created by other people, you should have the access permission. Permissions can either be granted by the creator of the file or by the administrator of the system.

Question 26.
How will you offer system level security?
Answer:
System level security is offered by the password in a multi-user environment.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 27.
Which OS offers system level security?
Answer:
Both windows and Linux offer the password facility to enable system level security.

Question 28.
Write note on network level security.
Answer:
Network security is an indefinable one. So people from all over the world try to provide such a security.

Question 29.
Write note on Fault Tolerance.
Answer:
Fault Tolerance: The Operating Systems should be robust. When there is a fault, the Operating System should not crash, instead the Operating System have fault tolerance capabilities and retain the existing state of system.

Question 30.
How data is stored in computer?
Answer:
Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of files and directories/foiders through File Allocation Table (FAT).

Question 31.
What will be stored in FAT?
Answer:
The FAT stores general information about files like filename, type (text or binary), size, starting address and access mode.

Question 32.
What are the various file access mode?
Answer:
File access modes are:

  1. Sequential.
  2. Indexed.
  3. Indexed-sequential.
  4. Direct.
  5. Relative.

Question 33.
Write note on file manager.
Answer:
The file manager of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files and also updates the FAT,

Question 34.
What is multi -process?
Answer:
This is a one of the features of Operating System, It has two or more processors for a single running process. Each processor works on different parts of , the same task or on two or more different tasks. This feature is used for high speed execution which increases the power of computing.

Question 35.
Write note on parallel processing.
Answer:
Processing takes place in parallel is known as parallel processing.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 36.
Write note on Time Sharing,
Answer:
It allows execution of multiple tasks or processes concurrently. For each task a fixed time is allocated. This division of time is called Time- sharing.

Question 37.
Why distributed operating system is used?
Answer:
The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world.

Question 38.
What are the advantages of GUI?
Answer:
A GUI lets you use your mouse to click icons, buttons, menus and everything is clearly displayed on the screen using a combination of graphics and text elements.

Question 39.
What are the key features of OS?
Answer:
Features of the Operating System:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 7

Question 40.
What devices are controlled by OS?
Answer:
OS controls input, output and other peripheral devices such as disk drives, printers and electronic gadgets.

Part – III

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
Write note on GUI.
Answer:
Modern operating systems use a Graphical User Interface(GUI). A GUI lets you use your mouse to click icons, buttons, menus and everything is clearly displayed on the screen using a combination of graphics and text elements. Each Operating System’s GUI has a different look and feel. The modern Operating Systems are designed to be ease of use and most of the basic principles are the same.

Question 2.
List various OS with their symbol.
Answer:
Various Operating Systems:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 8

Question 3.
Explain the classification of Operating Systems according to availability.
Answer:
Classification of Operating Systems according to availability.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 9

Question 4.
Who developed the LINUX? Where it was developed?
Answer:
UNIX is a family of multitasking, multi-user operating systems that derive originally from AT&T Bel! Labs, where the development began in the 1970s by Ken Thompson and Dennis Ritchie.

Question 5.
List the various Linux distributions.
Answer:
Linux Distributions:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 10

Question 6.
Explain the Operating systems for mobile devices?
Answer:
Mobile devices such as phones, tablets and MP3 players are different from desktop and laptop computers and hence they need special Operating Systems. Examples of mobile Operating Systems are Apple iOS and Google Android.

Operating systems for mobile devices generally are not as fully featured as those made for desktop and laptop computers and they are not able to run all software.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 7.
Explain Android OS.
Answer:
Android:
Android is a mobile operating system developed by Google, based on Linux and designed primarily for touch screen mobile devices such as smart phones and tablets. Google has further developed Android TV for televisions, Android Auto for cars and Android Wear for wrist watches, each with a specialized user interface. Variants of Android are also used on game consoles, digital cameras, PCs and other electronic gadgets.

Question 8.
What are the various Android versions?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 11

Question 9.
Explain iOS – iPhone OS.
Answer:
iOS (formerly iPhone OS) is a mobile. Operating System created and developed by Apple Inc., exclusively for its hardware. It is the Operating System that presently powers many of the company’s mobile devices, including the iPhone, iPad and iPod Touch.

Question 10.
What are the points are considered when User Interface is designed for an application.
Answer:
The following points are considered when User Interface is designed for an application:

  1. The user interface should enable the user to retain this expertise for a longer time.
  2. The user interface should also satisfy the customer based on their needs.
  3. The user interface should save user’s precious time. Create graphical elements like Menus,Window,Tabs,
  4. Icons and reduce typing work will be an added advantage of the Operating System.
  5. The ultimate aim of any product is to satisfy the customer. The User Interface is also to satisfy the customer.
  6. The user interface should reduce number of errors committed by the user with a little practice the user should be in a position to avoid errors.

Question 11.
Explain memory management.
Answer:
Memory Management:
Memory Management is the process of controlling and coordinating computer’s main memory and assigning memory block (space) to various running programs to optimize overall computer performance.

The Memory management involves the allocation of specific memory blocks to individual programs based on user demands. At the application level, memory management ensures the availability of adequate memory for each running program at ail times.

Question 12.
What are the responsibilities of the Operating System in . connection with memory management?
Answer:
The Operating System is responsible for the following activities in connection with memory management:

  1. Keeping track of which portion of memory are currently being used and who is using them.
  2. Determining which processes and data to move in and out of memory.
  3. Allocation and de-aliocation of memory blocks as needed by the program in main memory.

Question 13.
What are the responsibilities of the Operating System in connection with process management?
Answer:
The Operating System is responsible for the following activities associated with the process management:

  1. Scheduling processes and threads on the CPUs.
  2. Creating and deleting both user and system processes.
  3. Suspending and resuming processes.
  4. Providing mechanisms for process synchronization.
  5. Providing mechanisms for process communication.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 14.
Explain File Management.
Answer:
File Management:
File management is an important function of OS which handles the data storage techniques. The operating System manages the files, folders and directory systems on a computer.

Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of files and directories/folders through File Allocation Table (FAT). The FAT stores general information about files like filename, type (text or binary), size, starting address and access mode (sequential/indexed/indexed-sequential/direct/ relative).

The file manager of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files and also updates the FAT. The OS also takes care of the files that are opened with proper access rights to read or edit them.

There are few other file management techniques available like Next Generation File System (NTFS) and ext2 (Linux).

Question 15.
Explain Time Sharing with an example.
Answer:
This is a one of the features of Operating Systems. It allows execution of multiple tasks or processes concurrently. For each task a fixed time is allocated. This division of time is called Time-sharing. The processor switches rapidly between various processes after a time is elapsed or the process is completed.

For example assume that there are three processes called PI, P2, P3 and time allocated for each process 30, 40, 50 minutes respectively. If the process PI completes
within 20 minutes then processor takes the next process P2 for the execution. If the process P2 could not complete within 40 minutes, then the current process P2 will be paused and switch over to the next process P3.

Part – IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
What is the Need for Operating System? Explain in details.
Answer:
Operating System has become essential to enable the users to design applications without the knowledge of the computer’s internal structure of hardware. Operating System manages all the Software and Hardware.

Most of the time there are many different computer programmes running at the same time, they all need to access the Computers, CPU, Memory and Storage. The need of Operating System is basically – an interface between the user and hardware.

Interaction of Operating system and user:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 12
Operating System works as translator, while it translates the user request into machine language (Binary language), processes it and then sends it back to Operating System. Operating System converts processed information into user readable form.

Question 2.
What are the uses of Operating System?
Answer:
The main use of Operating System is:

  1. To ensure that a computer can be used to extract what the user wants it do.
  2. Easy interaction between the users and computers.
  3. Starting computer operation automatically when power is turned on (Booting).
  4. Controlling Input and Output Devices.
  5. Manage the utilization of main memory.
  6. Providing security to user programs.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
Explain the various types of operating system.
Answer:
Operating System are classified into the following types depending on their processing capabilities.

Single User Operating Systems : An operating system allows only a single user to perform a task at a time. It is called as a Single user and single Task operating system.

For a user, a task is a function such as printing a document, writing a file to disk, editing a file or downloading a file etc. MS-DOS is an example for a single user and single task Operating System.

Multi-user Operating Systems:
It is used in computers and laptops that allow same data and applications to be accessed by multiple users at the same time. The users can also communicate with each other. Windows, Linux and UNIX are examples for multi-user Operating System.

Question 4.
Explain distributed operating system.
Answer:
This feature takes care of the data and application that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network. The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world. The user can handle the data from different locations. The users can access as if it is available on their own computer.

The advantages of distributed Operating System are as follows:

  1. A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
  2. Many computer resources can be added easily in the network.
  3. Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
  4. Reduces the load on the host computer.

Question 5.
Explain the various algorithms of process management.
Answer:
The following algorithms are mainly used to allocate the job (process) to the processor.

  1. FIFO
  2. SJF
  3. Round Robin
  4. Based on Priority

FIFO (First In First Out) Scheduling:
This algorithm is based on queuing technique. Assume that a student is standing in a queue to get grade sheet from his/her teacher. The other student who stands first in the queue gets his/her grade sheet first and leaves from the queue. Followed by the next student in the queue gets it collected and so on. This is the basic logic of the FIFO algorithm.

Technically, the process that enters the queue first is executed first by the CPU, followed by the next and so on. The processes are executed in the order of the queue.

SJF (Shortest Job First)Scheduling:
This algorithm works based on the size of the job being executed by the CPU.
Consider two jobs A and B.
A = 6 kilo bytes,
B = 9 kilo bytes.
First the job “A” will be assigned and then job “B” gets its turn.

Round Robin Scheduling:
The Round Robin (RR) scheduling algorithm is designed especially for time sharing systems. Jobs (processes) are assigned and processor time in a circular method. For example take three jobs A, B, C. First the job A is assigned to CPU then job B and job C and then again A, B and C and so on.

Based On Priority:
The given job (process) is assigned based on a Priority. The job which has higher priority is more important than other jobs. Take two jobs A and B. Let the priority of A be 5 and priority B be 7. Job B is assigned to the processor before job A.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

11th Computer Applications Guide Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) Text Book Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
Which is the first electronic spreadsheet?
a) Excel
b) Lotus 1-2-3
c) Visicalc
d) OpenOffice Calc
Answer:
c) Visicalc

Question 2.
Which of the following applications was the parent to OpenOffice Calc?
a) Visicalc
b) LibreCalc
c) Lotus 123
d) StarOffice Calc
Answer:
d) StarOffice Calc

Question 3.
Grid of cells with a programmable calculator:
a) Spreadsheet
b) Database
c) Word processor
d) Linux
Answer:
a) Spreadsheet

Question 4.
A column heading in Calc is represented using _________.
a) Number
b) Symbol
c) Date
d) Alphabet
Answer:
d) Alphabet

Question 5.
Which key is used to move the cell pointer in the forward direction within the worksheet?
a) Enter
b) Tab
c) Shift + Tab
d) Delete
Answer:
b) Tab

Question 6.
A formula in calc may begin with _________.
a) =
b) +
c) –
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 7.
What wilt be the result from the following formula (Assume A1=5, 82=2)? + A1^B2
a) 7
b) 25
c) 10
d) 52
Answer:
b) 25

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 8.
What will be the result from the following expression (Assume H1 = 12, H2 = 12)? = H1<>H2
a) True
b) False
c) 24
d) 1212
Answer:
b) False

Question 9.
Which of the following symbol is used to make a cell address as an absolute reference?
a) +
b) %
c) &
d) $
Answer:
d) $

Question 10.
Which of the following key combinations is used to increase the width of the current column?
a) Alt + Right arrow
b) Ctrl + Right arrow
b) Alt + Left arrow
d) Ctrl + Left arrow
Answer:
a) Alt + Right arrow

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the types of toolbars available in OpenOffice Calc?
Answer:
There are three toolbars available by default.
They are:

  1. Standard Toolbar
  2. Formatting Toolbar
  3. Formula bar

Question 2.
What is a Cell pointer?
Answer:
Cell pointer is a rectangle box which can be moved around the worksheet. The cell in which the cell pointer is currently located is known as active cell.

Question 3.
Write about the text operator in OpenOffice Calc.
Answer:
Text Operator:
In Calc, “&” is a text operator which is used to combine two or more text. Joining two different texts is also known as “Text Concatenation”. An expression using the text operator has the following syntax:

text reference 1 & text reference2
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 1

Question 4.
Write the general syntax of constructing a formula in Calc.
Answer:
General Syntax of constructing a formula is:
= cell reference1 cell reference2 <Operator>

Question 5.
What are the keyboard shortcuts to cut, copy and paste?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 2

Question 6.
Can you edit the contents of a cell? If yes, explain any one of the method of editing the cell content.
Answer:
Yes. We can edit the contents of a cell. We can do It in any one of the following method:

  1. Place the cell pointer in the cell and type the new data which replaces the existing data
  2. Click on the formula bar and use backspace to delete the unwanted and type the required
  3. Press F2 function key and then use backspace to delete the unwanted and type the required

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 7.
What are the options available in “Insert Cells” dialog box?
Answer:
The “Insert Cells” dialog box contains four options:

  1. Shift cells down
  2. Shift cells right
  3. Entire row
  4. Entire Column

Question 8.
Match the following:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 3
Answer:
1. a(3)
2. b(4)
3. c(2)
4. d(1)

Question 9.
Define the following:
(i) Text Operator
(ii) Rows and Columns of spreadsheet
Answer:
Text Operator: In Calc, “&” is a text operator which is used to combine two or more text, Joining two different texts is also known as “Text Concatenation” An expression using the text operator has the following syntax:
text reference 1 & text reference2

Rows and Columns: The worksheet has number of rows and columns, where each column is labelled as A, B, C, D ….. AA, AB, AC ….. and the rows are numbered from 1, 2, 3….

Question 10.
Differentiate between Copy – Paste and Cut – Paste.
Answer:
While Copy-Paste, the content will be available in both source and destination locations. While Cut-Paste, the content will shift from source location to the destination location, i.e., the content will change its position. The content will be available in destination location atone.

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
Write a short note on OpenOffice Calc.
Answer:

  1. OpenOffice Calc is a popular open source spreadsheet application maintained by Apache Foundation.
  2. OpenOffice Calc is the spreadsheet component of OpenOffice. We can enter any kind of data in a spreadsheet and then manipulate this data to produce certain results.
  3. Alternatively, we can enter data and then use Calc in a ‘What If…’ manner by changing some of the data and observing the results without having to retype the entire spreadsheet.

Question 2.
Write about insetting columns and rows in Calc-
Answer:
Inserting a Column: When we insert a new column, it is inserted to the left of the current column. The location of the cell pointer present is the Current column. In Calc, we can insert a new column anywhere in the worksheet.

  • Step 1: Select the column where a new column should be inserted.
  • Step 2: Right-click on the selected column name that we selected. A pop-up menu appears.
  • Step 3: dick the “Insert Columns” option from the menu.

Now, a new column will be inserted to the left of the current column. A new column can also be inserted using Insert Columns command.

Inserting Rows:
When we insert a new row, it is inserted above the current row. The location of the cell pointer present is the current row. In Calc, we can insert a new row anywhere in the worksheet,

  • Step 1: Select the row where a new row to be inserted.
  • Step 2: Right-click on the row number, a pop-up menu appears
  • Step 3: click “Insert Rows” option from the menu. Now, a new row will be inserted to above the current row.

Insert → Rows command is also used to insert a new row

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 3.
Differentiate Deleting data using Backspace and Delete.
Answer:

  1. a Delete key deletes the character right of the insertion point.
  2. Backspace key deletes the character left of the insertion point.

Question 4.
Write any three formatting options.
Answer:
Formatting Data in a cell gives additional effect to the text. Additional effect includes changing the font style, font size, automatic wrapping, bold, underline, italic etc. The data in Calc can be formatted in several ways. Using formatting icons can be used.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 4

Question 5.
In cell A1 = 34 A2 = 65 A3 = 89 write the formula to find the average.
Answer:
The following formula may be used:
a. = AVERAGE(A1 : A3) OR
b. = (A1+A2+A3) / 3

PART – IV

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
Explain about changing the column width in Calc.
Answer:
Method 1:
We can change the column width by pressing alt + → or Alt + → to increase or decrease the width. This method may be used when we don’t have the exact value of the column width.

Method 2:
If we know the exact value of the column then we can use the following method to change the width,
Select Format → Column → Width and then Column Width dialog box will appear as given below
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 5
Type width value in the Width and then press Ok to set the width

Question 2.
Write the steps to generate the following series. 5, 10, 20 …. 2560
Answer:

  1. Step 1: Select the rang to fill up Eg. A1: A10
  2. Step 2: Select Edit → Fill → Series
  3. Step 3: Select the series type as Growth
  4. Step 4: Type Start value as 5, Stop value as 2560 and Increment, as 2 and press OK to generate the series.

Question 3.
Read the following table.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 6
Above table shows the sales figures for “Air Cooler” sold in four major cities of Tamilnadu from the year 2012 to 2016. Based on this data, write the formula to calculate the following.

  • Total sales in the year 2015.
  • Total sales in Coimbatore from 2012 to 2016.
  • Total sales in Madurai and Tiruchi during 2015 and 2016.
  • Average sales in Chennai from 2012 to 2016
  • In 2016, how many “Air Coolers” are sold in Chennai compared to Coimbatore?

Formula:

  • Formula to find total sales in the year 2015 is; = SUM(B5:E5)
  • Formula to find total sales in Coimbatore from 2012 to 2016: = SUM(E2:E6)
  • Formula to find total sales In Madurai and Tiruchi during 2015 and 2016: =SUM(C5;D6)
  • Formula to find average sales in Chennai from 2012 to 2016; = AVERAGE(B2:B6)
  • Formula to find, in 2016, how many “Air Coolers” are sold in Chennai compared to Coimbatore? =(B6-E6)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

11th Computer Applications Guide Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
_______ is a very useful office automation tool to organise, analyse and store data in a tabular form.
a) Database
b) Spreadsheet
c) Word processor
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Spreadsheet

Question 2.
________ was develops as computerized equivalent to paper-based accounting worksheets.
a) Database
b) Spreadsheet
c) Word processor
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Spreadsheet

Question 3.
Modern spreadsheet can display data as ________.
a) text
b) numerals
c) graphical form
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 4.
Who is called as father of the Spreadsheet?
a) Bjarne Stroustroop
b) Dan Bricklin
c) Bob Frankston
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Dan Bricklin

Question 5.
VisiCalc was developed by ________.
a) Bjarne Stroustroop
b) Dan Bricklin
c) Bob Frankston
d) Both B and C
Answer:
b) Dan Bricklin

Question 6.
_______ is the first spreadsheet.
a) MS-Excel
b) VisiCalc
c) Quattro Pro
d) Improve
Answer:
b) VisiCalc

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 7.
VisiCalc was invented for ________ machine.
a) IBM
b) Apple II
c) BBC Micro
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Apple II

Question 8.
VisiCalc was invented in the year ________.
a) 1982
b) 1987
c) 1979
d) 1969
Answer:
c) 1979

Question 9.
Lotus 1-2-3 was invented in the year ________.
a) 1982
b) 1987
c) 1979
d) 1969
Answer:
a) 1982

Question 10.
MS-Excel was invented in the year ________.
a) 1982
b) 1987
c) 1979
d) 1969
Answer:
b) 1987

Question 11.
_______was the first to introduce cell name.
a) MS-Excel
b) VisiCalc
c) Quattro Pro
d) Lotus 1-2-3
Answer:
d) Lotus 1-2-3

Question 12.
_______was the first to introduce macros.
a) MS-Excel
b) VisiCalc
c) Quattro Pro
d) Lotus 1-2-3
Answer:
d) Lotus 1-2-3

Question 13.
_______ implemented a Graphical User Interface (GUI) and the ability to point and click using a mouse.
a) MS-Excel
b) VisiCalc
c) Lotus 1-2-3
d) All the above
Answer:
a) MS-Excel

Question 14.
_______ is a popular open source spreadsheet application maintained by Apache Foundation,.
a) Star Office Calc
b) OpenOffice Calc
c) Lotus 1-2-3
d) All the above
Answer:
b) OpenOffice Calc

Question 15.
_______ was the parent application of OpenOffice Calc.
a) Star Office Calc
b) OpenOffice Calc
c) Lotus 1-2-3
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Star Office Calc

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 16.
Star Office Calc was developed by ________.
a) Star Division
b) Microsoft
c) Borland
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Star Division

Question 17.
Star Office Calc was developed in the year ________.
a) 1982
b) 1987
c) 1979
d) 1985
Answer:
d) 1985

Question 18.
________ is the spreadsheet component of OpenOffice.
a) Writer
b) Base
c) Impress
d) Calc
Answer:
d) Calc

Question 19.
VisiCalc means ________.
a) Vital Calculator
b) Visible Calculator
c) View Calculator
d) Virtual Calculator
Answer:
b) Visible Calculator

Question 20.
_______is the feature of OpenOffice Calc.
a) Connecting with Excel
b) AutoSum
c) List AutoFill
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 21.
_______is the feature of OpenOffice Calc.
a) Charts
b) Functions
c) Database functions
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 22.
Which OpenOffice Calc feature helps us to add the contents of a cluster of adjacent cells?
a) Connecting with Excel
b) AutoSum
c) List AutoFill
d) None of these
Answer:
b) AutoSum

Question 23.
Which OpenOffice Calc feature automatically extends cell formatting when a new item is added to the end of a list.
a) Connecting with Excel
b) AutoSum
c) List AutoFill
d) None of these
Answer:
c) List AutoFill

Question 24.
_______ allows you to quickly fill cells with repetitive or sequential data such as chronological dates or numbers, and repeated text.
a) Connecting with Excel
b) AutoSum
c) List AutoFill
d) AutoFill
Answer:
d) AutoFill

Question 25.
_______ can also be used to copy functions.
a) Connecting with Excel
b) AutoSum
c) List AutoFill
d) AutoFill
Answer:
a) Connecting with Excel

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 26.
We can also alter text and numbers with feature.
a) Connecting with Excel
b) AutoSum
c) List AutoFill
d) AutoFill
Answer:
d) AutoFill

Question 27.
_______ helps us in presenting a graphical representation of our data.
a) Charts
b) Functions
c) Database functions
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Charts

Question 28.
Charts helps us in presenting a graphical representation of our data in the form of charts.
a) Pie
b) Bar
c) Line
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 29.
_______can be used to create formula to perform complex calculations on data.
a) Charts
b) Functions
c) Database functions
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Functions

Question 30.
_______can be used to arrange, store, and filter data.
a) Charts
b) Functions
c) Database functions
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Database functions

Question 31.
_______ is the command to open Calc from Windows.
a) Start → All Programs → OpenOffice → Open Office Calc
b) Start → All Programs → Open Office Calc
c) File → New → Spreadsheet
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Start → All Programs → OpenOffice → Open Office Calc

Question 32.
Opening screen of OpenOffice is called ________.
a) Star Center
b) Open Center
c) Desktop
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Star Center

Question 33.
_______ is the command to open Calc spreadsheet from any OpenOffice application,
a) Start → All Programs → OpenOffice → Open Office Calc
b) Start → All Programs → Open Office Calc
c) File → New → Spreadsheet
d) File → New → Calc
Answer:
c) File → New → Spreadsheet

Question 34.
The main area of the Calc window is called as ________.
a) Work area
b) Worksheet
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 35.
A_______is a grid of cells with a programmable calculator attached to each cell.
a) Work area
b) Worksheet
c) Work space
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Worksheet

Question 36.
When we open a new spreadsheet, there are ________ worksheets available by default.
a) four
b) five
c) three
d) two
Answer:
c) three

Question 37.
_______is used to show the name of the file and name of the application.
a) Address box
b) Title bar
c) Tool bar
d) Formula bar
Answer:
b) Title bar

Question 38.
In OpenOffice Calc, the default name for the first unsaved worksheet is ________.
a) Untitled 1
b) Noname 1
c) Calc 1
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Untitled 1

Question 39.
In the right corner of title bar, button is ________ available.
a) Minimize
b) Maximize / Restore
c) Close control
d) All the above
Answer:

Question 40.
_______menu contains the commands of all file management tasks.
a) File
b) Edit
c) View
d) Insert
Answer:
a) File

Question 41.
________ is a file management task.
a) Create a new file / Open an existing file
b) Close the current file/ Save a file / Save a file in another name
c) print file / Export file
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 42.
menu contains the commands like, cut, copy, paste, Undo, Redo, Fill etc.
a) File
b) Edit
c) View
d) Insert
Answer:
b) Edit

Question 43.
________ menu contains the commands which are used to modify the environment of calc.
a) File
b) Edit
c) View
d) Insert
Answer:
c) View

Question 44.
_______ menu contains commands for inserting various calc elements such as cells, columns, rows, functions, charts etc.,
a) File
b) Edit
c) View
d) Insert
Answer:
d) Insert

Question 45.
________ menu contains the commands of various text and cell formatting features.
a) Format
b) Tools
c) Data
d) Window
Answer:
a) Format

Question 46.
_______ menu contains option such as spell check, protect document, insert pictures, macros, etc.
a) Format
b) Tools
c) Data
d) Window
Answer:
b) Tools

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 47.
_______ menu contains the commands to manipulate data in a spreadsheet.
a) Format
b) Tools
c) Data
d) Window
Answer:
c) Data

Question 48.
_______ is a data manipulation option.
a) Sort
b) Filter
c) Validity
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 49.
_______ menu shows display options such as New Window, Close Windows, Split and Freeze.
a) Window
b) File
c) Edit
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Window

Question 50.
_______menu lists in-built help features available with OpenOffice.
a) Help
b) File
c) Assist
d) View
Answer:
a) Help

Question 51.
Under the menu bar, there are _______ toolbars available by default.
a) three
b) four
c) two
d) No
Answer:
a) three

Question 52.
Under the menu bar, _______ toolbar is available by default.
a) Standard Toolbar
b) Formatting Toolbar
c) Formula bar
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 53.
Standard toolbar contains frequently used ________ menu commands.
a) File
b) Edit
c) Data
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 54.
Icons such as Send, Print preview, Sorting, Inserting chart available in ________ toolbar.
a) Standard
b) Formatting
c) Object
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Standard

Question 55.
_______ toolbar contains frequently used text and cell formatting commands.
a) Standard
b) Formatting
c) Object
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Formatting

Question 56.
_______bar is a very important element in a spreadsheet.
a) Standard
b) Formatting
c) Object
d) Formula
Answer:
d) Formula

Question 57.
_______ bar contains Name box, Function Wizard, Sum button, Function button and Input line.
a) Standard
b) Formatting
c) Object
d) Formula
Answer:
d) Formula

Question 58.
In formula bar_______contains the current cell address.
a) Name box
b) Function Wizard
c) Sum button
d) Input line
Answer:
a) Name box

Question 59.
_______ is used to insert function.
a) Name Box
b) Function Wizard
c) Sum Button
d) Input line
Answer:
b) Function Wizard

Question 60.
________ is used to quickly insert sum function.
a) Name box
b) Function Wizard
c) Sum button
d) Input line
Answer:
c) Sum button

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 61.
_______ is used to show the contents of the current cell.
a) Name box
b) Function Wizard
c) Sum button
d) Input line
Answer:
d) Input line

Question 62.
_______always shows actually what you typed in a cell.
a) Name box
b) Function Wizard
c) Sum button
d) Input line
Answer:
d) Input line

Question 63.
_______ is used to edit the contents.
a) Name box
b) Function Wizard
c) Sum button
d) Input line
Answer:
d) Input line

Question 64.
Spreadsheet window has ________ sets of scrolling bars.
a) three
b) two
c) four
d) five
Answer:
b) two

Question 65.
_______is used to move the screen up and down.
a) Horizontal scroll bar
b) Vertical scroll bar
c) Scroll button
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Vertical scroll bar

Question 66.
_______is used to move the screen left and right.
a) Horizontal scroll bar
b) Vertical scroll bar
c) Scroll button
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Horizontal scroll bar

Question 67.
_______ used to move the screen to the relative distance.
a) Horizontal scroll bar
b) Vertical scroll bar
c) Scroll button
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Scroll button

Question 68.
OpenOffice Calc version 4.1.5 _______ columns.
a) 10,48,576
b) 1024
c) 65,537
d) 16,384
Answer:
b) 1024

Question 69.
OpenOffice Calc version 4.1.5 ________ rows.
a) 10,48,576
b) 1024
c) 65,537
d) 16,384
Answer:
a) 10,48,576

Question 70.
Microsoft Excel contains ________ columns.
a) 10,48,576
b) 1024
c) 65,537
d) 16,384
Answer:
d) 16,384

Question 71.
Microsoft Excel contains ________ rows.
a) 10,48,576
b) 1024
c) 32,000
d) 16,384
Answer:
a) 10,48,576

Question 72.
The last column heading of OpenOffice Calc version 4.1.5 is ________.
a) BK
b) IV
c) AMJ
d) XFD
Answer:
c) AMJ

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 73.
The last column heading of Microsoft Excel is _______.
a) BK
b) IV
c) AMJ
d) XFD
Answer:
d) XFD

Question 74.
The last cell address of OpenOffice Calc version 4.1.5 is ________.
a) AMJ1048576
b) XFD1048576
c) AMJ 1024
d) XFD16384
Answer:
a) AMJ1048576

Question 75.
The last cell address of Microsoft Excel is ________.
a) AMJ 1048576
b) XFD1048576
c) AMJ 1024
d) XFD16384
Answer:
b) XFD1048576

Question 76.
Intersection of each row and column makes a box which is called as ________.
a) Cell pointer
b) Cell
c) Insertion point
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Cell

Question 77.
Each cell has its unique ________.
a) address
b) cell pointer
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) address

Question 78.
_______ is the combination of column heading and row number.
a) Cell address
b) Cell pointer
c) Cell content
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Cell address

Question 79.
Every cell is identified by its unique ________.
a) Cell address
b) Cell pointer
c) Cell content
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Cell address

Question 80.
_______is a rectangle box which can be moved around the worksheet.
a) Cell address
b) Cell pointer
c) Cell content
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Cell pointer

Question 81.
The cell in which the cell pointer is currently located is known as ________.
a) Active cell
b) Base cell
c) Default cell
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Active cell

Question 82.
The address of the active cell is displayed in the ________.
a) Name box
b) Address box
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 83.
_______column name and row number will be highlighted.
a) Active cell
b) Base cell
c) Default cell
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Active cell

Question 84.
The contents of an active cell will be displayed in the ________ bar.
a) Tool
b) Formula
c) Address
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Formula

Question 85.
When we open a new worksheet, ________ is the default active sheet.
a) Sheet 1
b) Last sheet
c) Middle sheet
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Sheet 1

Question 86.
By default there are ________ sheets.
a) 3
b) 4
c) 5
d) 2
Answer:
a) 3

Question 87.
Active sheet tab will appear in ________ colour.
a) Yellow
b) Blue
c) Green
d) White
Answer:
d) White

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 88.
Multiple sheets can also be selected by clicking the sheet and press the _______ button.
a) Alt
b) Ctrl
c) Esc
d) Shift
Answer:
b) Ctrl

Question 89.
On the left of the sheet tab, ________ navigation buttons are used to move between worksheets.
a) Total count of sheets
b) The present active sheet number
c) Both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
d) none of these

Question 90.
Left corner of status bar shows the _______.
a) Total count of sheets
b) The present active sheet number
c) Both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 91.
If the status bar shows sheet 3/12; 3 refers to ________.
a) Total count of sheets
b) The present active sheet number
c) previous sheet number
d) none of these
Answer:
b) The present active sheet number

Question 92.
If the status bar shows sheet 3/12; 12 refers to ________.
a) Total number of sheets
b) Serial number of the current sheet
c) Previous sheet number
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Total number of sheets

Question 93.
_______bar shows the current status of the worksheet.
a) Formula
b) Status
c) Tool
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Status

Question 94.
There are ________ select the cells of a worksheet.
a) five
b) four
c) two
d) three
Answer:
d) three

Question 95.
________ is a mode to select the cells of a worksheet.
a) Standard (STD)
b) Extend (EXT)
c) Add (ADD)
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 96.
_______symbol indicates the changes made in the worksheet but not yet saved.
a) * (asterisk)
b) ^ (caret)
c) & (and)
d) none of these
Answer:
a) * (asterisk)

Question 97.
When you open a new spreadsheet, the cell pointer is located in cell ________.
a) A1
b) A1048576
c) AMJ1
d) AMJ1048576
Answer:
a) A1

Question 98.
The Cell A1 is known as ________.
a) Parent Cell
b) Home Cell
c) Active Cell
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Home Cell

Question 99.
_______is used to move the cell pointer towards the right side or forward direction.
a) Tab
b) Shift + Tab
c) Alt + Tab
d) Ctrl + Tab
Answer:
a) Tab

Question 100.
________is used to move the cell pointer towards the left side or backward direction.
a) Tab
b) Shift + Tab
c) Alt + Tab
d) Ctrl + Tab
Answer:
b) Shift + Tab

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 101.
_______key is also used to move the cell pointer.
a) Enter
b) Four direction keys
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 102.
_______ moves the cell pointer to a cell below the current cell.
a) Enter
b) Four direction keys
c) Tab
d) Shift + Tab
Answer:
a) Enter

Question 103.
_______data type is used in Calc.
a) Alphabetic
b) Numeric
c) Date / Time
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 104.
_______data type consists of alphabets only.
a) Alphabetic
b) Numeric
c) Date / Time
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Alphabetic

Question 105.
_______ data type consists only of numbers (whole number or fractional numbers).
a) Alphabetic
b) Numeric
c) Date / Time
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Numeric

Question 106.
_______ data type consists combination of alphabets and numerals.
a) Alphabetic
b) Numeric
c) Date / Time
d) Alphanumeric
Answer:
d) Alphanumeric

Question 107.
_______data type consists only of date.
a) Alphabetic
b) Numeric
c) Date
d) Time
Answer:
c) Date

Question 108.
_______data type consists only of time.
a) Alphabetic
b) Numeric
c) Date
d) Time
Answer:
d) Time

Question 109.
In a cell, the entered numbers are aligned to the _______ side within the cell by default.
a) left
b) center
c) right
d) none of these
Answer:
c) right

Question 110.
Calc will drop the _______ zero.
a) leading
b) trailing
c) both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
a) leading

Question 111.
If we enter any number within the bracket, it will be changed as _______ number.
a) fractional
b) negative
c) positive
d) none of these
Answer:
b) negative

Question 112.
In a cell, the entered text will be aligned to the _______ side within the cell by default.
a) left
b) center
c) right
d) none of these
Answer:
a) left

Question 113.
If our system has American date format, we should enter dates in Calc spreadsheet as _______.
a) dd/mm/yy
b) mm/dd/yy
c) yy/mm/dd
d) none of these
Answer:
b) mm/dd/yy

Question 114.
If our system has Indian date format, we should enter dates in Calc spreadsheet as _______.
a) dd/mm/yy
b) mm/dd/yy
c) yy/mm/dd
d) none of these
Answer:
a) dd/mm/yy

Question 115.
A Date format can be changed to any other valid form using _______ dialog box.
a) Date Formatting
b) Cell Formatting
c) Text Formatting
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Cell Formatting

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 116.
_______is the time format of Calc.
a) HH:MM:SS
b) HH:MM
c) SS:MM:HH
d) None of these
Answer:
a) HH:MM:SS

Question 117.
DD/MM/YYYY date _______ country.
a) Australia/New Zealand
b) Indonesia/India
c) Russia/Bangladesh
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 118.
DD/MM/YYYY date format used in _______country.
a) Parts of Europe
b) Latin America
c) North Africa
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 119.
YYYY/MM/DD date format used in _______ country.
a) Bhutan/Canada
b) China/Korea
c) Taiwan/Hungery
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 120.
YYYY/MM/DD date format used in _______ country.
a) Iran/ Japan
b) Lithuania
c) Mangolia
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 121.
MM/DD/YYYY date format used in _______country.
a) United States
b) Federated States of Micronesia
c) Marshall Islands
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 122.
DD/MM/YYYY and MM/DD/YYYY date format used in _______ country.
a) Malaysia/Nigeria
b) Philippines/ Somalia
c) Saudi Arabia
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 123.
DD/MM/YYYY and YYYY/MM/DD date format used in _______country.
a) Afghanistan/Albania
b) Austria/Czeck Republic
c) Germany/Kenya
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 124.
DD/MM/YYYY and YYYY/MM/DD date format used in _______ country.
a) Macua/Maldives
b) Montenegro/Namibia
c) Nepal
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 125.
DD/MM/YYYY and YYYY/MM/DD date format used in _______ country.
a) Singapre
b) South Africa
c) Sri Lanka/Sweden
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 126.
_______ describes the format for specifying a formula.
a) Function
b) Syntax
c) Pattern
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Syntax

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 127.
In Calc, we can enter formulas in _______ methods.
a) five
b) four
c) three
d) two
Answer:
d) two

Question 128.
In Calc, we can enter formulas in _______ methods.
a) directly into the cell
b) at the input line
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 129.
Formula in Calc may start with _______ sign.
a) equal (=)
b) plus (+)
c) minus (-)
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 130.
Formula in Calc may start with equal (=) sign followed by _______.
a) combination of values
b) operators
c) cell references
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 131.
Operators are symbols for doing _______ calculations.
a) mathematical
b) statistical
c) logical
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 132.
Combination of values, operators and cell references is called as _______.
a) expression
b) sequence
c) function
d) none of these
Answer:
a) expression

Question 133.
Calc supports_______ operator(s).
a) Arithmetic/Relational
b) Reference
c) Text
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 134.
_________ operators return a numerical result.
a) Arithmetic
b) Relational
c) Reference
d) Text
Answer:
a) Arithmetic

Question 135.
_______ operators are symbols for performing operations like addition, subtraction, multiplication and division.
a) Arithmetic
b) Relational
c) Reference
d) Text
Answer:
a) Arithmetic

Question 136.
_______Cell operators are symbols used for comparing two values such as greater than, less than, equal to etc.
a) Arithmetic
b) Relational
c) Reference
d) Text
Answer:
b) Relational

Question 137.
The relational operators are also called as ________ operators.
a) Arithmetic
b) Comparative
c) Reference
d) Text
Answer:
b) Comparative

Question 138.
The ________ operators return either True or False.
a) Arithmetic
b) Comparative
c) Reference
d) Text
Answer:
b) Comparative

Question 139.
In Calc, the result of the formula = 98 > 25 will be ________.
a) True
b) False
c) 73
d) -73
Answer:
a) True

Question 140.
In Calc, the result of the formula = 600 * 35% will be ________.
a) 210
b) 72
c) True
d) False
Answer:
a) 210

Question 141.
In Calc, the result of the formula = 25 ^ 2 will be _______.
a) 50
b) 27
c) 625
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 625

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 142.
In Calc, the result of the formula = 54 < > 45 will be ________.
a) True
b) False
c) 54
d) 45
Answer:
a) True

Question 143.
_______operators are used to refer cell ranges.
a) Arithmetic
b) Relational
c) Reference
d) Text
Answer:
c) Reference

Question 144.
A continuous group of cells is called as ________.
a) Intersection
b) Range
c) area
d) sequence
Answer:
b) Range

Question 145.
There are ________ types of reference operators that are used to refer cells in Calc.
a) three
b) two
c) four
d) many
Answer:
a) three

Question 146.
_______is a reference operator.
a) Range reference
b) Range concatenation
c) Intersection
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 147.
_______is the range reference operator.
a) ~
b) !
c) :
d) None of these
Answer:
c) :

Question 148.
_______ is the range concatenation operator.
a) ~
b) !
c) :
d) None of these
Answer:
a) ~

Question 149.
_______ is the intersection operator.
a) ~
b) !
c) :
d) None of these
Answer:
b) !

Question 150.
_______ operator is used to group a range of cells.
a) ~
b) !
c) :
d) None of these
Answer:
c) :

Question 151.
An expression using a range operator has the ________ syntax:
a) reference left: reference right
b) reference right : reference left
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) reference left: reference right

Question 152.
Linear group of cells Al, A2, A3, A4, A5 is referred as ________.
a) A1 : A5
b) A1 ~ A5
c) A1 A5
d) None of these
Answer:
a) A1 : A5

Question 153.
Rectangular group of cells A2, A3, A4, _______ B2, B3, B4,….D5, D6 is referred as ________.
a) A2:A6,B2:B6,C2:C6,D2:D6
b) A2:A6;B2:B6;C2:C6;D2:D6
c) A2:A6!B2:B6!C2:C6!D2:D6
d) A2:D6
Answer:
d) A2:D6

Question 154.
_______ symbol is used as a concatenation operator in calc.
a) &(and)
b) Tilde (~)
c) A(caret)
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Tilde (~)

Question 155.
If we want to find the sum of the values from Al to A6 and C3 to F3, the formula is ________.
a) =SUM(A1:A6 + C3:F3)
b) =SUM(A1:A6 ~ C3:F3)
c) =SUM(A1:A6 ; C3:F3)
d) =SUM(A1:A6, C3:F3)
Answer:
b) =SUM(A1:A6 ~ C3:F3)

Question 156.
_______ operator which is used to combine two or more text.
a) Arithmetic
b) Relational
c) Reference
d) Text
Answer:
d) Text

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 157.
_______is a text operator.
a) @
b) &
c) $
d) #
Answer:
b) &

Question 158.
Joining two different texts is also known as _________.
a) Intersection
b) Integration
c) Merging
d) Text Concatenation
Answer:
d) Text Concatenation

Question 159.
Cell references are of ________ types.
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) five
Answer:
a) two

Question 160.
_______is a cell reference.
a) absolute
b) relational
c) both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 161.
If we refer cell addresses directly while constructing formulae, it is called as _______Cell reference.
a) absolute
b) relational
c) both A and B
d) none of these
Answer:
b) relational

Question 162.
While writing a formula, if we use the __________ symbol in front of a column name and row number, it will become an Absolute Cell reference.
a) $
b) %
c) #
d) None of these
Answer:
a) $

Question 163.
Identify the absolutee reference from the following:
a) A1
b)Al:A10
c) $A$1
d) None of these
Answer:
c) $A$1

Question 164.
_______is used to save a worksheet.
a) Ctrl + S
b) File → Save
c) Save Icon
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 165.
OpenOffice Calc Spreadsheets are stored with extension ________.
a) .ode
b) .ods
c) .odw
d) .odo
Answer:
b) .ods

Question 166.
A _________ helps to identify the type of file.
a) file extension
b) file name
c) file content
d) none of these
Answer:
a) file extension

Question 167.
_______ is the file extension for text files.
a) .txt
b) .xls /. xlsx
c) .odt
d) None of these
Answer:
a) .txt

Question 168.
_______is the file extension for Microsoft word documents.
a) .txt
b) .doc / .docx
c) .odt
d) None of these
Answer:
c) .odt

Question 169.
_______ is the file extension for OpenOffice documents.
a) .txt
b) .doc / .docx
c) .odt
d) None of these
Answer:
b) .doc / .docx

Question 170.
_______is the file extension for Microsoft Excel.
a) .ods
b) .xls /. xlsx
c) .odt
d) None of these
Answer:

Question 171.
_______ is the file extension for OpenOffice Calc.
a) .ods
b) .xls /. xlsx
c) .odt
d) None of these
Answer:
a) .ods

Question 172.
_______is the file extension for Microsoft Power Point.
a) .ods
b) .xls /. xlsx
c) .odt
d) .ppt / .pptx
Answer:
d) .ppt / .pptx

Question 173.
_______ is the file extension for OpenOffice Impress.
a) .odp
b) .odi
c) .odt
d) None of these
Answer:
a) .odp

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 174.
_______ is the file extension for executable file / application files.
a).exe
b) .app
c) .prg
d) .obj
Answer:
a).exe

Question 175.
_______ is the file extension for web pages.
a) .htm
b) .html
c) Both A and B
d) .wpg
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 176.
.pdf stands for ________.
a) Portable Document Format
b) Public Document Format
c) Protected Document Format
d) Private Document Format
Answer:
a) Portable Document Format

Question 177.
_______is the file extension for photos.
a) .Jpg
b) .jpeg
c) Either A or B
d) .pho
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 178.
________ is the file extension for animated images.
a) .gif
b) .bmp
c) . ani
d) .img
Answer:
a) .gif

Question 179.
_______ is the file extension for audio.
a) .mp3
b) .mp4
c) .jpg
d) .gif
Answer:
b) .mp4

Question 180.
_______ is the file extension for audio/ video.
a) .mp3
b) .mp4
c) .jpg
d) .gif
Answer:
b) .mp4

Question 181.
The saved Calc file is stored in the ________ folder by default.
a) Desktop
b) Document
c) Recycle Bin
d) My Computer
Answer:
b) Document

Question 182.
Saving is a process of transferring or shifting contents from primary memory to ________.
a) ROM
b) Secondary storage medium
c) RAM
d) Cache
Answer:
b) Secondary storage medium

Question 183.
The default time interval for auto save is ________ minutes.
a) 10
b) 30
c) 5
d) 15
Answer:
d) 15

Question 184.
If any unexpected shutdown occurs, ________ feature will recover our file.
a) auto text
b) auto save
c) auto close
d) none of these
Answer:
b) auto save

Question 185.
_______is used to close the worksheet.
a) using File → Close command
b) Press Ctrl + W
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 186.
To reopen an existing worksheet, the ________ can be used.
a) File → Open command
b) Open icon
c) Ctrl + 0
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 187.
_______option can be used to open an existing worksheet from the recently opend file list.
a) File → Recent Documents
b) File → List
c) File → Recent List
d) None of these
Answer:
a) File → Recent Documents

Question 188.
The process of Copy and Paste data is used for copying ________.
a) formula
b) equation
c) object
d) none of these
Answer:
a) formula

Question 189.
When we copy a formula from one cell to another cell, the address of the pasted formula will change according to its ________.
a) row
b) cell pointer
c) range
d) none of these
Answer:
a) row

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 190.
_______feature fills the contents from one cell to all the dragged cells.
a) Auto copy
b) Auto Fill
c) Auto Paste
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Auto Fill

Question 191.
_______is an alternate way to copy and paste.
a) Auto copy
b) Auto Fill
c) Auto Paste
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Auto Fill

Question 192.
Auto Fill can be achieved by ________.
a) Edit → Fill → Down
b) Edit → Fill → Right
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 193.
_______is used to generate a series of values.
a) Auto copy
b) Auto Fill
c) Auto Paste
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Auto Fill

Question 194.
_______command is used to generate different set of series.
a) Edit → Fill → Down
b) Edit → Fill → Right
c) Either A or B
d) Edit → Fill → Series
Answer:
d) Edit → Fill → Series

Question 195.
Auto fill only fills _________.
a) right
b) down
c) either right or down
d) none of these
Answer:
c) either right or down

Question 196.
_______ type series will generate a sequence of series.
a) Linear
b) Growth
c) Date
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Date

Question 197.
_______ type series will generate a multiplication series.
a) Linear
b) Growth
c) Date
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Growth

Question 198.
_______type series will generate a date series.
a) Linear
b) Growth
c) Date
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Date

Question 199.
When we select “AutoFill”, ________ becomes disabled.
a) Time unit section
b) End value
c) Increment text box
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 200.
_______is an option of time unit.
a) Day / Week day
b) Month
c) Year
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 201.
_______time unit option will generate date series day-wise.
a) Day
b) Month
c) Year
d) Week day
Answer:
a) Day

Question 202.
_______time unit option will generate date series weekday-wise.
a) Day
b) Month
c) Year
d) Week day
Answer:
d) Week day

Question 203.
_______time unit option will generate date series month-wise.
a) Day
b) Month
c) Year
d) Week day
Answer:
b) Month

Question 204.
_______time unit option will generate date series year-wise.
a) Day
b) Month
c) Year
d) Week day
Answer:
c) Year

Question 205.
During Fill series, if we fail to specify the end value, series will be generated upto the ________.
a) selected cells
b) last cell
c) last column
d) last row
Answer:
a) selected cells

Question 206.
During Fill series, if our selection is less than the specified end value, series will be generated only upto the ________.
a) selected cells
b) last cell
c) last column
d) last row
Answer:
a) selected cells

Question 207.
During fill series, if we want to generate a decreasing order series, ________value should be specified as an increment value.
a) positive
b) fractional
c) negative
d) none of these
Answer:
c) negative

Question 208.
_______ is valid date arithmetic.
a) date + number
b) date – number
c) date – date
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 209.
In Calc, _______ can be inserted individually or in groups.
a) Columns
b) Rows
c) Cells
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 210.
When we insert a new column, it is inserted _______ to the of the current column.
a) right
b) left
c) above
d) below
Answer:
b) left

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 211.
In Calc, a new column can be inserted using _______ command.
a) Format → Column → Insert
b) Insert → Columns
c) Format → Insert → Column
d) Columns → Insert
Answer:
b) Insert → Columns

Question 212.
In Calc, When we insert a new row, it is inserted _______ the current row.
a) right
b) left
c) above
d) below
Answer:
c) above

Question 213.
In Calc, _______ command is used to insert a new row.
a) Format → Rows → Insert
b) Insert → Rows
c) Format → Insert → Rows
d) Rows → Insert
Answer:
b) Insert → Rows

Question 214.
The Insert Cells dialog box has _______ options
a) four
b) five
c) three
d) two
Answer:
a) four

Question 215.
_______ is an Insert Cells dialog box option.
a) Shift cells down/Shift cells right
b) Entire row
c) Entire Column
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 216.
In the Insert Cells dialog box, selecting ______ inserts a new cell in the present location and the existing cells are shifted downwards.
a) Shift cells down
b) Shift Cells right
c) Insert Row
d) Insert Column
Answer:
a) Shift cells down

Question 217.
In the Insert Cells dialog box, selecting ______ inserts a new cell in the present location and the existing cells are shifted towards right.
a) Shift cells down
b) Shift Cells right
c) Insert Row
d) Insert Column
Answer:
b) Shift Cells right

Question 218.
Identify the correct statement from the following:
a) When we delete a column/row, all the contents will be removed from the column/row.
b) No one can delete any column or row in a spreadsheet.
c) Formatting Data in a cell gives additional effect to the text.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 219.
_______ is a formatting option of Calc cells.
a) changing the font style, font size
b) automatic wrapping
c) bold, underline, italic
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 220.
Making the cell contents as bold, italics, underlined, changing font style, size, colour etc., comes under ______ formatting.
a) Number
b) Text
c) Font
d) Default
Answer:
b) Text

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 221.
_______ is the shortcutkey used to make the data as Bold.
a) Ctrl + B
b) Ctrl + I
c) Ctrl + U
d) Ctrl + L
Answer:
a) Ctrl + B

Question 222.
_______ is the shortcutkey used to italicize data.
a) Ctrl + B
b) Ctrl + I
c) Ctrl + U
d) Ctrl + L
Answer:
b) Ctrl + I

Question 223.
_______ is the shortcutkey used to underline the data.
a) Ctrl + B
b) Ctrl + I
c) Ctrl + U
d) Ctrl + L
Answer:
c) Ctrl + U

Question 224.
_______ is the shortcutkey used to left align the data within a cell.
a) Ctrl + R
b) Ctrl + E
c) Ctrl + 3
d) Ctrl + L
Answer:
d) Ctrl + L

Question 225.
_______ is the shortcutkey used to right align the data within a cell.
a) Ctrl + R
b) Ctrl + E
c) Ctrl + J
d) Ctrl + L
Answer:
a) Ctrl + R

Question 226.
_______ is the shortcutkey used to center the data within a cell.
a) Ctrl + R
b) Ctrl + E
c) Ctrl + J
d) Ctrl + L
Answer:
b) Ctrl + E

Question 227.
_________ is the shortcutkey used to align the data evenly both on left and right side of a cell.
a) Ctrl + R
b) Ctrl + E
c) Ctrl + J
d) Ctrl + L
Answer:
c) Ctrl + J

Question 228.
_______ is the shortcutkey used to format number with prefixing currency sign.
a) Ctrl + Shift + 4
b) Ctrl + Shift + 5
c) Ctrl + Shift + 6
d) Ctrl + Shift + 7
Answer:
a) Ctrl + Shift + 4

Question 229.
_______ is the shortcutkey used to format number as percent format.
a) Ctrl + Shift + 4
b) Ctrl + Shift + 5
c) Ctrl + Shift + 6
d) Ctrl + Shift + 7
Answer:
b) Ctrl + Shift + 5

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 230.
_______ is the shortcutkey used to format number as standard format.
a) Ctrl + Shift + 4
b) Ctrl + Shift + 5
c) Ctrl + Shift + 6
d) Ctrl + Shift + 7
Answer:
c) Ctrl + Shift + 6

Question 231.
OpenOffice Calc has more than _______ functions.
a) 350
b) 450
c) 250
d) 150
Answer:
a) 350

Question 232.
OpenOffice Calc functions are grouped under _______ categories.
a) 10
b) 11
c) 12
d) 13
Answer:
b) 11

Question 233.
_______ are predefined formulae already available with Calc.
a) Objects
b) Functions
c) Operators
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Functions

Question 234.
Every function has a unique _______.
a) name
b) prototype
c) name and a prototype
d) none of these
Answer:
c) name and a prototype

Question 235.
The functions such as Sum, Average, Sin, Cos etc., are categorized as _______.
a) Financial
b) Statistical
c) String
d) String
Answer:
c) String

Question 236.
A function can be inserted by ______ methods.
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
a) 2

Question 237.
A function can be inserted by ______ method.
a) Direct Insert
b) Using Function Wizard
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
c) Either A or B

Question 238.
If you know the function name and its syntax, it can be inserted using _______ method.
a) Direct Insert
b) Using Function Wizard
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Direct Insert

Question 239.
_______ is related with a function.
a) A function should begin with an equal sign.
b) Use proper name for the function to be used.
c) Arguments should be given within the brackets as per the syntax.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 240.
Function wizard can be invoked by_______
a) Clicking the Function Wizard icon on the Formula bar
b) Select Insert → Function
c) Press Ctrl + F2
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 241.
Function Wizard has _______ tabs.
a) four
b) five
c) three
d) two
Answer:
d) two

Question 242.
Function Wizard has_______ tab.
a) Functions
b) Shortcuts
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 243.
_______ is a function category in Calc.
a) Database
b) Date and Time
c) Financial
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 244.
_______ is a function category in Calc.
a) Information
b) Logical
c) Mathematical
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 245.
_________ is a function category in Calc.
a) Array / Add-in
b) Statistical
c) Spreadsheet / Text
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 246.
Functions in calc is displayed in _______ order.
a) Reverse alphabetical
b) Alphabetical
c) Descending
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Alphabetical

Question 247.
When we select a function, the function wizard shows the _______ on the right side of the dialog box.
a) function name
b) syntax
c) a small description about the function
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 248.
_______ is a function which is used to calculate power of an exponent value of a number.
a) SUM()
b) AVERAGE()
c) EXP()
d) POWER()
Answer:
d) POWER()

Question 249.
There are _______ inputs needed to find the power value of a number.
a) three
b) two
c) three
d) many
Answer:
b) two

Question 250.
The _______ value is the input needed to find the power value of a number.
a) Base
b) Exponent
c) Base and Exponent
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Base and Exponent

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 251.
In Calc, function arguments are separated by a _______.
a) semicolon
b) colon
c) comma
d) none of these
Answer:
a) semicolon

Question 252.
The most important features of spreadsheet is _______.
a) formula
b) object
c) function
d) chart
Answer:
d) chart

Question 253.
Creating _______ is the key factor for the of success of spreadsheet.
a) formula
b) charts
c) worksheet
d) none of these
Answer:
b) charts

Question 254.
_______ is used to insert charts in Calc.
a) Chart Wizard
b) Chart Template
c) Chart Format
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Chart Wizard

Question 255.
Chart wizard can be invoked by _______.
a) Chart Icon
b) Insert → Chart
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 256.
Chart wizard dialog box has _______ steps.
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) 5
Answer:
a) 4

Question 257.
_______ is a chart wizard step.
a) Chart type
b) Data Range / Data Series
c) Chart Elements
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 258.
Column chart has ______ styles.
a) four
b) three
c) two
d) many
Answer:
b) three

Question 259.
_______ is a column chart style.
a) Normal
b) Stacked
c) Percent Stacked
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 260.
_______ check box helps to display the selected chart type in an attractive form.
a) 3D Look
b) 2D Look
c) Flat
d) All the above
Answer:
a) 3D Look

Question 261.
3D Look is applied only for _______ chart type.
a) Column
b) Bar
c) Pie and Area
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 262.
How many check boxes are there in chart wizard chart type window?
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
d) 1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 263.
How many check boxes are there in chart wizard data range window?
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
c) 2

Question 264.
How many radio buttons are there in chart wizard data range window?
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
c) 2

Question 265.
_______ is the check box name in chart wizard data range window.
a) First Row as Label
b) First Column as Label
c) First Cell as Label
d) Both A and B
Answer:
d) Both A and B

Question 266.
_______ is the radio button name in chart wizard data range window.
a) Data series in rows
b) Data series in columns
c) Data series in table
d) Both A and B
Answer:
d) Both A and B

Question 267.
How many check boxes are there in chart wizard chart element window to display grids?
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
b) 3

Question 268.
How many radio buttons are there in chart wizard chart element window to display legend?
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
a) 4

Question 269.
_______ is the check box name in chart wizard chart element window to display grids.
a) X-axis
b) Y-axis
c) Z-axis
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 270.
_______ is the radio button name in chart wizard chart element window to display legend.
a) Left
b) Right
c) Top / Bottom
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 271.
To modify the chart element _______ can be used.
a) Double click on the element
b) Right click on the selected element
c) Select Format from the popup menu
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 272.
A spreadsheet is a _______ database.
a) Network
b) Hierarchical
c) Object oriented
d) Fiat file
Answer:
d) Fiat file

Question 273.
The database operation _______ can be done on spreadsheet.
a) sorting b) filtering
c) validity
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 274.
_______ menu of OpenOffice calc provides maximum data analysis tools.
a) Data
b) File
c) Edit
d) Insert
Answer:
a) Data

Question 275.
A _______ is a repository of collections of related data or facts.
a) document
b) database
c) chart
d) none of these
Answer:
b) database

Question 276.
The entire collection or related data in one table is referred to as a _______.
a) File
b) Table
c) File or a Table
d) None of these
Answer:
c) File or a Table

Question 277.
Each row in a database table represents a _______.
a) Field
b) Record
c) File
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Record

Question 278.
_______ is a set of data for each database entry.
a) Field
b) Record
c) File
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Record

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 279.
Each column in a database table represents a _______.
a) Field
b) Record
c) File
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Field

Question 280.
_______ groups each piece or item of data into specific categories.
a) Field
b) Record
c) File
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Field

Question 281.
_______ is the process of arranging data in ascending or descending order.
a) Filtering
b) Editing
c) Sorting
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Sorting

Question 282.
There are _______ types of sorting.
a) 3
b) 2
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
a) 3

Question 283.
_______ is a type of sorting.
a) Simple Sorting
b) Multi Sorting
c) Sort by selection
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 284.
Arranging data using single column is known as_______ sorting.
a) Simple
b) Multi
c) Sort by selection
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Simple

Question 285.
For sorting the data, Calc provide _______ icons on the standard tool bar.
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
d) 2

Question 286.
_______ is a sort icon.
a) Sort Ascending
b) Sort Descending
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 287.
Sort Ascending icon arrange data in _______ order.
a) Alphabetical
b) A to Z
c) Small to Large
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 288.
Sort Descending icon arrange data in _______ order.
a) Reverse
b) Z to A
c) Large to Small
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 289.
Sorting data based on more than one field (column) is known as _______
a) Simple Sorting
b) Multi Sorting
c) Sort by selection
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Multi Sorting

Question 290.
To rearrange the data alphabetically by name and _______ sorting is used.
a) Simple
b) Multi
c) Sort by selection
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Multi

Question 291.
_________ sorting is generally not recommended.
a) Simple
b) Multi
c) Sort by selection
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Sort by selection

Question 292.
_______ sort all the data based on the selection.
a) Extend Selection
b) Current Selection
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Extend Selection

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 293.
_______ sort only the selected range of data, remaining data are not sorted.
a) Extend Selection
b) Current Selection
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Current Selection

Question 294.
_______ is a way of limiting the information that appears on screen.
a) Sort
b) Merge
c) Filter
d) Edit
Answer:
c) Filter

Question 295.
_________ are a feature for displaying and browsing a selected list or subset of data from a worksheet.
a) Sorting
b) Merging
c) Filtering
d) Editing
Answer:
c) Filtering

Question 296.
OpenOffiee Calc allows _______ types of filters.
a) four
b) three
c) two
d) many
Answer:
b) three

Question 297.
______ is a OpenOffice Calc type of filter.
a) AutoFilter
b) Standard Filter
c) Advanced Filter
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 298.
_______ is used only for single criteria on a data
a) AutoFilter
b) Standard Filter
c) Advanced Filter
d) All the above
Answer:
a) AutoFilter

Question 299.
The _______ is used for multiple critieria to filter.
a) AutoFilter
b) Standard Filter
c) Advanced Filter
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Standard Filter

Question 300.
If we want to filter the records of “BC” students of group code 402 from the table, then _______ filter is suitable.
a) AutoFilter
b) Standard Filter
c) Advanced Filter
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Standard Filter

Question 301.
_______ is used to cancel / remove filter.
a) Data → Filter → Remove Filter
b) Data → Filter → Delete Filter
c) Data → Filter → Hide Filter
d) Data → Filter → Destroy Filter
Answer:
a) Data → Filter → Remove Filter

Question 302.
_______ dislog box is used for setting the Page size, Orientation and Margins.
a) Page style
b) Paragraph
c) Character
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Page style

Question 303.
_______ tab is available in page style dialog box.
a) Page
b) Header
c) Footer
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 304.
_______ is a process of changing the values in a cell to see how those changes will affect output.
a) What-if analysis
b) Editing
c) Formatting
d) None of these
Answer:
a) What-if analysis

Question 305.
_______ is a sheet of paper that shows accounting or other data in rows and columns.
a) Spreadsheet
b) Database
c) Presentation
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Spreadsheet

Question 306.
A _______ is an expression telling the computer what mathematical operation to perform upon a specific value?
a) function
b) formula
c) filter
d) none of these
Answer:
b) formula

Question 307.
A _______ is a predefined formula.
a) function
b) formula
c) filter
d) none of these
Answer:
a) function

Question 308.
_________ is a group of instructions to return a single result or a set of results.
a) function
b) formula
c) filter
d) none of these
Answer:
a) function

Question 309.
_______ is related to flat file database.
a) single table
b) non-relative database
c) spreadsheet
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 310.
A ______ is large quantity of indexed information.
a) Database
b) Function
c) Array
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Database

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is the use of a spreadsheet?
Answer:
Spreadsheet is a very useful office automation tool to organise, analyse and store data in a tabular form.

Question 2.
What do you mean by ‘what if analysis?
Answer:
Spreadsheet users can adjust any of the stored values and can observe the effects on the calculated values. This is called “What if” analysis.

Question 3.
Which application is the parent of OpenOffice Calc?
Answer:
StarOffice calc was the parent application of OpenOffice Calc which was developed by a German Company namely, Star Division in 1985.

Question 4.
Write note on VisiCalc.
Answer:
VisiCalc (“Visible Calculator”) was the first spreadsheet for personal computers, originally released for the Apple II by VisiCorp.

Question 5.
What is worksheet?
Answer:
The main area of the Calc window is called as “Work area” or “Worksheet”. A worksheet is a grid of cells with a programmable calculator attached to each cell.

Question 6.
Write the functions Of scroll bars and scroll buttons.
Answer:

  1. Vertical Scroll bar : It is used to move the screen up and down.
  2. Horizontal Scroll bar : It is used move the screen left and right.
  3. Scroll buttons : used to move the screen to the relative distance.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 7.
What is cell and cell pointer?
Answer:

  1. Intersection of each row and column makes a box which is called as “Cell”.
  2. Cell pointer is a rectangle box which can be moved around the worksheet.

Question 8.
What is active cell?
Answer:
The cell in which the cell pointer is currently located is known as “Active cell”

Question 9.
What is cell address?
Answer:
Cell address is the combination of column heading and row number. For example, the intersection of column B and row 4 makes a cell B4.

Question 10.
How will you identify the active cell?
Answer:
The address of the active cell is displayed in the Name box / Address box. Active cell’s column name and row number will be highlighted. Using this visual clue, one can easily identify an active cell.

Question 11.
How will you select the multiple sheet?
Answer:
Multiple sheets can also be selected by clicking the sheet and press the Ctrl button (Ctrl + Click).

Question 12.
What are the navigation buttons to move between worksheets?
Answer:
On the left of the sheet tab, four navigation buttons are used to move between worksheets.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 7
(1) Move to the First sheet
(2) Move to the previous sheet
(3) Move to Next sheet
(4) Move to the Last sheet

Question 13.
What is home cell?
Answer:
When we open a new spreadsheet, the cell pointer is located in cell Al. So, the Cell A1 is known as Home Cell.

Question 14.
How will you enter negative number in a cell?
Answer:
Negative numbers may be entered with a minus sign or within brackets If we enter any number within the bracket, it will be changed as negative number i.e., number prefixed with minus.

Question 15.
How will you enter data and time in a cell?
Answer:
Before entering date, ensure the format of your system date. Calc accepts date as per the system date format. If your system has American date format i.e. month-date-year; we should enter dates in Calc spreadsheet as mm/dd/yy. If our system follows the Indian date format, date should be entered as dd/mm/yy form in Calc. For entering time, calc follows the general format HH:MM:SS. where HH, MM and SS represent hours, minutes and seconds respectively.

Question 16.
How will you identify the entered date is accepted or not by Calc?
Answer:
As soon as the date is typed in the correct form, the entered date will be aligned on the right side within the cell, and if you place the cell pointer in that cell, the formula bar shows your date as “12/18/2017”. This is a visual clue to know whether the date is accepted or not.

Question 17.
What is an operator?
Answer:
Operators are symbols for doing some mathematical, statistical and logical calculations.

Question 18.
What is an expression?
Answer:
Combination of values, operators and cell references is called as “Expression”.

Question 19.
What is range?
Answer:
A continuous group of cells is called as “Range.

Question 20.
Give an example for Linear and Rectangular group of cells.
Answer:

  1. Linear group of cells A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 is referred as A1:A5
  2. Rectangular group of cells A2, A3, A4,…. B2, B3, B4,….D5, D6 is referred as A2:D6

Question 21.
What is the rule of precedence order for arithmetic operators?
Answer:
When arithmetic operators are used in a formula, Calc calculates the results using the rule of precedence followed in Mathematics.

The order is:

  1. Exponentiation ( A )
  2. Negation (-)
  3. Multiplication and Division ( *, /)
  4. Addition and Subtraction (+, -)

Question 22.
Write the syntax of constructing a formula in Calc.
Answer:
General Syntax of constructing a formula is:
= cell referencel cell reference2 <Operator> ……..

Question 23.
What are the types of cell reference?
Answer:
Cell references are of two types:

  1. Relative cell reference.
  2. Absolute Cell reference.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 24.
Give examples for relative cell reference.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 8

Question 25.
Give example for absolute cell reference.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 9

Question 26.
What is the use of file extension?
Answer:
A file extension or file name extension helps to identify the type of file. Following table gives the file extension of commonly used files.

Question 27.
What is save technically?
Answer:
Technically saving is a process of transferring or shifting contents from primary memory (RAM) to Secondary storage medium such as Hard disk, Pen drive, memory chip etc.

Question 28.
Write note on Auto Save in Calc.
Answer:
The OpenOffice saves a file at regular intervals. This is called as “Auto Save” feature. The default time interval is 15 minutes. It can be reduced even to one minute. If any unexpected shutdown occurs, this feature will recover our file.

Question 29.
How will you close a worksheet?
Answer:
We can close the worksheet using File → Close command (or) Press Ctrl + W.

Question 30.
How will you open an existing worksheet?
Answer:

  1. To reopen an existing worksheet, the File → Open command (or) “Open” icon (or) Ctrl + O can be used. An Open dialog box appears.
  2. The name of the file to be opened can be chosen from the list or folder in which worksheet has been saved.

Question 31.
How will you open the recently created files in Calc?
Answer:
OpenOffice keeps a list of recently opened files. File -* Recent Documents option can be used to open an existing worksheet from the list

Question 32.
Write the procedure to copy and paste data in Calc.
Answer:
Copy and paste Data:

  1. Select the cell or cells you want to copy.
  2. Select Edit → Copy or Click “Copy” icon from the standard toolbar or Press Ctrl + C
  3. Move the cell pointer to the cell in which you want to paste.
  4. Select Edit → Paste or Click “Paste” icon or Press Ctrl + V

Question 33.
Write the procedure to cut and paste the data.
Answer:
Cut and Paste Data:

  1. Select the cell or cells you want to cut
  2. Select Edit → Cut or Click “Cut” icon from the standard toolbar or Press Ctrl + X
  3. Move the cell pointer to the cell in which you want to paste.
  4. Select Edit → Paste or Click “Paste” icon or Press Ctrl + V .

Question 34.
What happen while copy and paste a formula?
Answer:
When we copy a formula from one cell to another cell, the address of the pasted formula will change according to its row. This is called “Relative Cell Reference”.

Question 35.
Write about AutoFill.
Answer:
The process of Copy and Paste can be replaced by . a click and drag and it is called as “Auto Fill”. This is an alternate way to copy and paste.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 36.
What is the function of AutoFill?
Answer:
Auto Fill feature fills the contents from one cell to all the dragged cells. The content may be a data or formula. If we fill a relative formula, all the addresses of filled formulae will be changed.

Question 37.
How will you perform AutoFill?
Answer:
Cell pointer’s “Drag fill handle” is used to auto fill. Just click and drag this handle to fill the contents. It can be dragged towards right or down.
Same can be achieved by Edit → Fill Down (or) Edit → Fill → Right.

Question 38.
How will you find out how many days you were born?
Answer:

  1. Type today’s date in first cell.
  2. Type your birth date in second cell.
  3. Type the following formula in third cell.
    = first_cell_reference – second_cell_reference

Question 39.
How will you delete single column or row?
Answer:
A single column or row can be deleted by using the mouse;

  1. Select the column or row to be deleted.
  2. Choose Edit → Delete Cells from the menu bar.

(Or)

  1. Right-click on the column or row header.
  2. Choose Delete Columns or Delete Rows from the pop-up menu.

Question 40.
How will you delete multiple columns or rows?
Answer:
Multiple columns or rows can be deleted at a time.

  1. Select the required columns or rows for deletion.
  2. Right-click on the selected columns or row.
  3. Choose Delete Columns or Delete Rows from the pop-up menu or Edit → Delete Cells.

Question 41.
Define function.
Answer:
Functions are predefined formulae already available with Calc. They are used to perform several frequently done calculations.

Question 42.
How many ways a function can be inserted in Calc cell?
Answer:
A function can be inserted by –

  1. Direct Insert Method or
  2. Using Function Wizard method.

Question 43.
What are the function categories in Calc?
Answer:
In Calc, the functions are categorized into 11 types.

They are:

  1. Database
  2. Array
  3. Date and Time
  4. Statistical
  5. Financial
  6. Spreadsheet
  7. Information
  8. Text
  9. Logical
  10. Add-in
  11. Mathematical

Question 44.
How will you edit chart elements?
Answer:
After inserting a chart any element of the chart can be modified. To modify the element

  1. Double click on the element (or)
  2. Right click on the selected element (or)
  3. Select Format from the popup menu and do the modifications.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 45.
What is database?
Answer:
A database is a repository of collections of related data or facts. It arranges them in a specific structure.

Question 46.
Is spreadheet a database? If so, what are the database manipulations are possible?
Answer:
Yes. A spreadsheet is a “Fiat file database”. Thus, database operations such as sorting, filtering can be done on spreadsheet

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
Write about Evolution of Spreadsheet.
Answer:
Daniel Bricklin and Bob Frankston developed the first spreadsheet called “VisiCalc” in 1979 for Apple II. In 1982, Lotus Corporation introduced “Lotus 1-2-3”. Lotus 1-2-3 was the first to introduce cell names and macros. In 1987, Microsoft Corporation introduced Excel. Excel Implemented a Graphical User Interface (GUI) and the ability to point and dick using a mouse.

Question 2.
Write short note on OpenOffice Calc.
Answer:
OpenOffice Calc is a popular open source spreadsheet application maintained by Apache Foundation. We can enter any kind of data in a spreadsheet and then manipulate this data to produce certain results. Alternatively, we can enter data and then use Calc in a ‘What If…’ manner by changing some of the data and observing the results without having to retype the entire spreadsheet.

Question 3.
Explain the toolbars of Calc.
Answer:
1. Tools Bar: Under the menu bar. there are three toolbars available by default. They are:

2. Standard Toolbar – contains frequently used File, Edit and Data menu commands as icons such as New Open Save, Send, print, print preview, Cut, Copy, Paste, Sorting, inserting chart etc.,

3. Formatting Toolbar – contains frequently used text and cell formatting commands as such as changing font style, font size, font colour, alignments, cell formatting etc.,

4. Formula bar – This is a very important element in a spreadsheet. It contains Name box, .Function Wizard, Sum button, Function button and Input
line.

Question 4.
How will you rename the sheet name?
Answer:
Every sheet name can be renamed. To rename a sheet, just double-click on the sheet, which will show a small box as shown in the following Figure:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 10
It shows the current name; delete or overwrite the existing name and type a new name; dick OK button. New name will be displayed on the sheet

Question 5.
How will you navigate within worksheet?
Answer:
The following keys are used to navigate within the worksheet. Tab key is used to move the cell pointer towards the right side or forward direction. Shift’4-Tab is used to move backward i.e. from right to left in a row. Enter key is also used to move the cell pointer. Enter moves the cell pointer to a cell below the current cell i.e downwards. Four “direction keys” are used to move the cell pointer anywhere in the worksheet.

Question 6.
Explain briefly about data types in Cad.
Answer:
Data types: Data are in different types. Data are made up of alphabets, numbers, Date and time is another data type even though it has numbers and symbols. In general, data types are classified as:

  1. Alphabetic data type — consists of alphabets only
  2. Numeric data type – consists only of numbers (whole number or fractional numbers)
  3. Alphanumeric data types – consists of a combination of alphabets and numerals
  4. Date data type – consists only of date Time data type – consists only time

Question 7.
Explain Different Date Formats.
Answer:
Different Date Formats:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 11

Question 8.
Write about formula in Calc cell.
Answer:
In Calc, we can enter formulas in two methods, either directly into the cell or at the input line. Formula in Calc may start with equal (=) or plus(+) or minus(-) sign followed by a combination of values, operators and cell references.

In general, all formulas should start with an equal sign. If any formula starts with a + or -, the values will be considered as positive or negative respectively.
Ex. = A1 * B2 / 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 9.
Write the procedure to save a worksheet.
Answer:
Saving Worksheet: The process of saving a worksheet is very similar to saving a document. Steps to save a worksheet are as follows:

  • Step 1: File → Save (or) Ctrl + S (or) Click “Save” icon on the standard tool bar.
  • Step 2: If the spreadsheet has not been saved previously, the Save As dialog box will appear.
  • Step 3: Type the name in “File Name” list box. OpenOffice Calc Spreadsheets are stored with extension .ods by default.
  • Step 4: Click “Save” button.

Question 10.
What is file extension? List some popular file extensions.
Answer:
A file extension or file name extension helps to identify the type of file. Following table gives the file extension of commonly used files.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 12

Question 11.
How will you generate a series of values using AutoFill?
Answer:
Auto Fill is also used to generate a series of values. For example, if we want to generate 1, 2, 3 up to some length; it can be done by a simple click and dragging over.

Generating whole number series:

  • Step 1: In cell A1, type as 1 (one) and press enter
  • Step 2: click Al to place the cell pointer
  • Step 3: Click “Drag Fill Handle” of cell pointer; now the mouse pointer becomes a small +
  • Step 4: Drag over the cells; while dragging, the generated values will be displayed.
  • Step 5: Release the mouse pointer. Selected cells will be filled with series of values.

Question 12.
Write about date arithmetic.
Answer:
In spreadsheets, date calculations become very simple. Here we can add a number to a date and arrive at a new date, find the difference between two dates and use a wide variety of function and formats to get what you want.

For example, enter a date 02/26/2018 in a cell, say A2. Suppose you want to calculate the date 80 days after this date. To do so, enter the formula, = A2 + 80, in another cell, say A4. The date 05/17/18 appears in the cell.

Question 13.
How will you insert a column in Calc worksheet?
Answer:
When we insert a new column, it is inserted to the left of the current column. The location of the cell pointer present is the Current column. In Calc, we can insert a new column anywhere in the worksheet.

  • Step 1: Select the column where a new column should be Inserted.
  • Step 2: Right-click on the selected column name that we selected. A pop-up menu appears.
  • Step 3: click the “Insert Columns” option from the menu.

Now, a new column will be inserted to the left of the current column.
A new column can also be inserted using Insert → Columns command.

Question 14.
How will you insert a row in Calc worksheet?
Answer:
When we insert a new row, it is inserted above the current row. The location of the cell pointer present is the current row. In Calc, we can insert a new row anywhere in the worksheet.

  • Step 1: Select the row where a new row to be inserted.
  • Step 2: Right-click on the row number, a pop-up menu appears.
  • Step 3: click “Insert Rows” option from the menu,

Now, a new row will be inserted to above the current row.
Insert → Rows command is used to insert a new row.

Question 15.
How will you insert columns, rows and cells using Insert Cells toolbar?
Answer:
Inserting Columns, Rows and Cells using “Insert Cells” Toolbar

  • Insert Cells floating toolbar is also used to insert cells, rows and columns
  • Click View Toolbars → Insert Cell
  • A tiny floating toolbar appears on the screen with four icons. Using these icons, we can insert cells, rows and columns.
     Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 13

Question 16.
Write short description about function in Calc.
Answer:
Functions are predefined formulae already available with Calc. They are used to perform several frequently done calculations. Every function has a unique name and a prototype. Functions are categorized according to their functionality. For example, the functions such as Sum, Average, Sin, Cos etc., are categorized as “Mathematical Functions”. OpenOffice Calc has more than 350 functions under 11 categories.

Question 17.
How will you insert a function in Calc cell using direct insert method?
Answer:
If we know the function name and its syntax, it can be directly typed in any cell of the worksheet. For example, SUM is the most frequently used function to add a set of values. The syntax of the SUM( ) is
= SUM (range 1; range 2; range 3…… range n)
If we want to know the sum of the values in Al, A2, A3, and A4 in A5, place the cell pointer in A5 and directly type the formula as follows,.
= SUM (A1 : A4)
While inserting a function the following points should be kept in mind.

  1. A function should begin with an equal sign.
  2. Use proper name for the function to be used.
  3. Arguments should be given within the brackets as per the syntax. Each function has a unique argument list.
  4. Press “Enter” key after typing the function.
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 14

Question 18.
Define i) Table/file ii) Record iii) field.
Answer:

  1. Table/ File – The entire collection or related data in one table is referred to as a File or a Table.
  2. Record – Each row in a table represents a Record, which is a set of data for each database entry.
  3. Field – Each table column represents a Field, which groups each piece or item of data among the records into specific categories.

Question 19.
What is sorting? List its types.
Answer:
Sorting is the process of arranging data in ascending or descending order. There are three types of sorting in OpenOffice Calc. They are

  1. Simple Sorting
  2. Multi Sorting
  3. Sort by selection

Question 20.
What is filter? Mention its types.
Answer:
Filter is a way of limiting the information that appears on screen. Filters are a feature for displaying and browsing a selected list or subset of data from a worksheet. The visible records satisfy the condition that the user sets. Those that do not satisfy the condition are only hidden, but not removed.

OpenOffice Calc allows three types of filters. They are:

  1. AutoFilter
  2. Standard Filter and
  3. Advanced Filter

Question 21.
How will you change the page size, orientation and margins?
Answer:

  1. To set page size, select Format → Page
  2. Page style dialog box will appears as shown below
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 15
  3. “Page” tab is used to change page size, orientation and margin.
  4. “Fleader” tab is used to create header.
  5. “Footer” tab is used to create footer.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Part – IV

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
What are the features of OpenOffice Calc?
Answer:
Features of OpenOffice Caic:

  1. Connecting with Excel – Ability to open, edit, and save Microsoft Excel spreadsheets
  2. AutoSum – helps you to add the contents of a cluster of adjacent cells.
  3. List AutoFill – automatically extends cell formatting when a new item is added to the end of a list.
  4. AutoFill – allows us to quickly fill cells with repetitive or sequential data such as chronological dates or numbers, and repeated text. AutoFill can also be used to copy functions. You can also alter text and numbers with this feature.
  5. Charts – helps us in presenting a graphical representation of our data in the form of Pie, Bar, Line charts and more.
  6. Functions – which can be used to create formula to perform complex calculations on data
  7. Database functions – to arrange, store, and filter data

Question 2.
Explain the parts of the OpenOffice Calc Window.
Answer:
OpenOffice Calc Window –
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 16
1. Title Bar – Top of the window is called the “Title Bar”. It is used to show the name of the file and name of the application. In OpenOffice Calc, the default name for the first unsaved worksheet is “Untitled 1”. When we save the file, Untitled will change to the name In which you saved.

2. Control Buttons – In the right corner of title bar:

  • minimize,
  • maximize / restore and
  • dose control buttons are available.

3. Menu Bar – Below the title bar is menu bar.

4. Tools Bar – Under the menu bar, there are three toolbars available by default. They are:

  • Standard Toolbar
  • Formatting Toolbar
  • Formula bar

5. Name box : It display the current cell address

6. Function Wizard : It is used to insert function

7. Sum button : It is used to quickly insert sum function.

8. Input Line : This is used to show the contents of the current cell. It always shows actually what you typed in a cell. It is also used to edit the contents

9. Scroll bar : Spreadsheet window also has two sets of scrolling bars (1) Vertical Scrollbar and (2) Horizontal Scrollbar

10. Row, Column, Cell and Cell Pointer – Below the formula bar contains the worksheet of work area which consist of grid cells The worksheet has number of rows and columns, where each column is labelled as A, B, C, D AA; AB, AC and the rows are numbered from 1, 2, 3, …..

11. Cell – Intersection of each row and column makes a box which is called as “Cell” Cell pointer is a rectangle box which can be moved around the worksheet

Question 3.
Explain the various menu bar commands.
Answer:

  1. Menu Bar – Below the title bar is menu bar.
  2. File – menu contains the commands of all file management tasks like, Create a new file, Open an existing file, Close the current file, Save a file, Save a file in another name, print file, Export file etc.
  3. Edit – menu contains the editing commands like, . cut, copy, paste, Undo, Redo, Fill etc.,
  4. View – menu contains the commands which are used to modify the environment of Calc.
  5. Insert – menu contains commands for inserting various calc elements such as cells, columns, rows, functions, charts etc.,
  6. Format – menu contains the commands of various text and cell formatting features.
  7. Tools – menu contains various tools and functions such as spell check, protect document, insert pictures, macros, etc.,
  8. Data – menu contains the commands to manipulate data in a spreadsheet such as sort, filter, subtotal, validity etc.,
  9. Window – menu shows display options such as New Window, Close Windows, Split and Freeze.
  10. Help – menu lists in-built help features available with OpenOffice.

Question 4.
Explain briefly about the contents of status bar.
Answer:
Calc Status bar:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 17
Status bar – Below the sheet tabs and horizontal scrolling bar is the “Status Bar”. It shows the current status of the worksheet.

Sheets count: Displays current serial number of the sheet / total number of sheets available.

Page Style: Displays the page style of the current sheet. To make changes, just double-click on “Default” and it will show you the “Page Style” dialog box, which is used to change the margin, orientation, paper size, inserting header, footer, border style etc.,

Selection Mode: Displays the selection mode of the current sheet. There are three modes available to select the cells of a worksheet. They are, Standard (STD), Extend (EXT) and Add (ADD).

Unsaved Changes: An asterisk ( * ) symbol indicates the changes made in the worksheet but not yet saved. If we have saved your changes, it will disappear.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 5.
Explain various operators available in Calc.
Answer:
Operators are symbols for doing some mathematical, statistical and logical calculations. Calc supports a variety of operators which are categorized as:

  • Arithmetic Operators
  • Relational Operators
  • Reference Operators
  • Text Operator

Arithmetic Operators: Arithmetic operators are symbols for performing simple arithmetic operations such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, division etc., These operators return a numerical result.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 18

Relational Operators – Relational operators are symbols used for comparing two values such as greater than, less than, equal to etc. The relational operators are also called as “Comparative operators”. These operators return either a True or a False.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 19

Reference Operator – Reference operators are used to refer cell ranges. There are three types of reference operators that are used to refer cells in Calc.

They are –

  1. Range Reference Operator
  2. Range Concatenation
  3. Intersection Operator.

Range Reference Operator – Colon (:) is the range reference operator. It is used to group a range of cells. An expression using a range operator has the following syntax:

reference left : reference right – where reference left is the starting cell address of a linear group of cells or upper left corner address of a rectangular group Reference right is the last cell address of a linear group or lower right corner address of a rectangular group of cell.

Example:

  1. Linear group of cells A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 is referred as A1:A5
  2. Rectangular group of cells A2, A3, A4,.. B2, B3, B4,.,. D5, D6 is referred as A2 : D6

Reference concatenation operator:
Concatenation means joining together. Tilde (~) symbol is used as a concatenation operator in calc. An expression using a concatenation operator has the following syntax

reference left ~ reference right – Example: If we want to find the sum of the values from Al to A6 and C3 to F3. The formula is =SUM(A1:A6 ~ C3:F3)

Intersection Operator: Intersection operator is used to join two set of groups. It is very similar to Range concatenation operator. The intersection operator is represented by an exclamation

reference left! reference right
Example: (A2:D3 ! B2:E4)
Text Operator: In Calc, is a text operator which is used to combine two or more text. Joining two different texts is also known as “Text Concatenation”. An expression using the text operator has the following syntax:
text reference 1 & text reference2
Example : = B3 & C3 = “Tamil” & “nadu”

Question 6.
Explain the method of generating different series.
Answer:
Generating series using command
Edit → Fill → Series Command is used to generate different set of series. Before using this feature, a set of cells should be selected. Using Fill Series feature, we can fill series of values at any direction.

Direction : Down / Right / Up / Left (Selected cell direction will be default)

Series Type :

  • Linear : To generate a sequence of series (Example 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 )
  • Growth : To generate multiplication series (Example 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 )
  • Date : To generate date series (when we select date as series type; time unit section gets enabled)
  • AutoFill : To generate a continuous series of values (1, 2, 3, ). When we select “AutoFill”, Time unit section, End value and Increment text boxes become disabled.
  • Time Unit: Enabled only when we select the series type as “Date”.
  • Day : To generate date series day-wise
  • Weekday : To generate date series weekday-wise.
  • Month : To generate date series month-wise
  • Year : To generate date series year-wise

Start Values : Initial value of the series should he typed.

End Value : End value of the series should be typed. If we fail to specify the end value, series will be generated upto the selected cells. If our selection is less than the specified end value, series will he generated only upto the selected cells.

Increment : It is a middle value between the first and second value of your series. So, the next value (Third value) of the series will be generated based on this value. If we want to generate a decreasing order series, negative value should be specified as an increment value.

Question 7.
How will you insert cells in a workhsheet?
Answer:
Inserting Cells:
1. To insert a new cell between two existing ceils, just right-click on any existing cell

2. From the pop-up menu, select “Insert” option.

3. The “Insert Cells” dialog box appear with four options

  • Shift cells down
  • Shift cells right
  • Entire row
  • Entire Column

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 20
4. Any one of the four options is selected.

5. Selecting “Shift cells down” inserts a new cell in the present location and the existing cells are shifted downwards.

6. Selecting “Shift cells right” inserts a new cell in the present location and the existing cells are shifted towards right.

7. Selecting the “Entire Row” or “Entire Column” option, inserts a new row, or a new column.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 8.
Explain formatting worksheet.
Answer:
Formatting Data in a cell gives additional effect to the text. Additional effect Includes changing the , font style, font size, automatic wrapping, bold, underline, italic etc.
Answer:
Text Formatting:
Making the cells contents as bold, italics, underlined, changing font style, size, colour etc,, comes under text formatting. Ail text-formatting options are available as icons in Formatting toolbar.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 21
Number formatting:
Number formatting options are used to visually change the format of a numeric content. These formatting changes are only for visual as, it does not change its original value. For example, To display a number as currency form use Number format: Currency.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 22

Question 9.
How will you insert a function in Calc cell using function wizard?
Answer:
A function can inserted using Function Wizard in Calc. Function Wizard is a dialog box provides the step-by-step procedure to Insert a function. Function wizard can be invoked by clicking the Function Wizard icon fx on the Formula bar (or) Insert → Function (or) Ctrl + F2.

Function Wizard has two tabs viz. Functions and Shortcuts. In Functions Tab, the list of categories is available in Category drop down list box. If you select any particular category, the Functions list box shows the functions which belongs to the selected category. If “All” is selected under category all functions in Calc is displayed in alphabetical order.

Selected Category
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 23
When we select a function, the function wizard shows the function name, syntax and a small description about the function on the right side of the dialog box.
The following steps explains to insert POWER(.) function in a cell.
The syntax of POWER( ) is = POWER (Base ;Exponent)
Both Base and Exponent are arguments. In Calc, arguments are separated by a semicolon.
Inserting POWER( ) in a worksheet:
Step 1: In cell A2 type the base value 25

Step 2: In cell B2 type the exponent value 2

Step 3: Move the cell pointer to C2; in which you want display result.

Step 4: Click fx icon from Formula bar (or) choose Insert → Functions (or) Press Ctrl+F2.

Step 5: Pull down category list box, Choose “Mathematical”. Ail function under Mathematical category is displayed in the “Functions” list box.

Step 6: Scroll the “Functions” list box and select “POWER()”. The function wizard shows the description about the selected function on the right corner of the dialog box.

Step 7: Click “Next” command button. Now, Function wizard appears.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 24

Step 8: Click on the cell which is contains the base value (A2). Now, the minimized wizard snows the cell address we have selected (A2).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 25

Step 9: Click “Maximize” button to display full wizard. Base box shows the cell address which contain base value.

Step 10: Directly type the cell address which contains exponent, in Exponent box. The formula box displays the syntax of the function with input values and Result box displays the result value.

Step 11: If the result is correct, click”OK” button else click “Back” button to display the previous page of this wizard.

Question 10.
How will you insert a chart in Calc cell?
Answer:
Chart wizard is used to insert charts in Calc. Chart wizard can be invoked by clicking “chart” icon from standard toolbar or choosing Insert → Chart command. A “Chart wizard” appear as shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 26
Chart wizard dialog box has 4 steps viz. (1) Chart type (2) Data Range (3) Data Series and (4) Chart Elements.

Step 1: Chart type:
The first step of “Chart wizard” is used to select Chart type. All available chart types are listed under the “Choose a chart type” list box. On the right side of the list box shows style of the selected chart; each chart type has different styles. For example, Column chart has three styles viz. Normal, Stacked and Percent Stacked.

“3D Look” check box helps to display the selected chart type in an attractive form. 3D Look is applied only for Column, Bar, Pie and Area chart type. Click, “Next” button to move to the second step.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 27

Step 2: Data Range:
In this step, specify the range of data for which the chart should be created in “Data range” text box or click “Select data range” button which is at the end of the textbox to minimize the wizard. If the user had selected the data before invoking “chart wizard”, the selected range will appear automatically in the textbox as shown in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 28
There are two checkboxes used to set the first row or first column or both, as X and Y axis labels to the chart. Click “Next” button to move to the third step.

Step 3: Data Series:
In this step, the user can fine tune the data to be included in the chart. If we don’t want to include any column, click the column names listed in “Data Series” box and click on “Remove” button or if you want to add some more columns click “Add” button.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 29
Click “Next” button to move the last step

Step 4: Chart Element:
This step is used to insert or change titles and legend. In “Title” box, type the title for the chart, to add a subtitle type it in the “Subtitle” box. For example, A chart for showing the highest mark holder in you class, we may enter as “Highest Mark holder” as title and “Class XII F” as subtitle.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 30
User can add or modify the labels of X and Y axis. To create a chart click “Finish” button.

Question 11.
What is sorting? Explain different methods of sorting?
Answer:
Sorting is the process of arranging data in ascending or descending order. There are two types of sorting in OpenOffice Calc. They are:

  • Simple Sorting
  • Multi Sorting
  • Sort by selection

(1) Simple Sorting – Arranging data using single column is known as simple sorting. For sorting the data, Calc provide two icons on the standard tool bar viz. (1) Sort Ascending (2) Sort Descending.

  • Sort Ascending – Arrange data in alphabetical order (A to Z / Small to Large)
  • Sort Descending – Arrange data in reverse order (Z to A / Large to Small)

Sorting data:

  • Step 1: Place cel! pointer in the field (column) to be sorted
  • Step 2: Click Sort Ascending or Sort Descending icon

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 31
OpenOffice Calc, sort the data of selected column and its corresponding values present in other columns are also arranged simultaneously.

(2) Multi Sorting – Sorting data based on more than one field (column) is known as multi sorting. For example, the worksheet containing data of 20 students belongs to different groups and classes. To rearrange this data alphabetically by name and group code, multi sorting is used.

Multi-sorting data (Procedure)
Step 1: Select Data → Sort
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 32
Name are arranged in Ascending order According to names, other data also rearranged.
Step 2: Sort dialog box appears.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 33
Step 3: Select the field name (Student name) in which we want to sort from the “sort by” dropdown list box and then choose order of sorting i.e. Ascending or Descending. Ascending is the default selection.

Step 4: Select another field name (Group Code) from the “Then by” dropdown list box and choose the order of sorting to this column.

Step 5: Click “OK” button.
In OpenOffice Calc, multi sort can be done only for three fields.

(3) Sort by selection – In Calc sorting can be done on selected range. But this kind of sorting is generally not recommended, because the other relevant data are also not sorted. Therefore, OpenOffice Calc displays a warning message for this type of sorting.

Sorting data by selection:

Step 1: Select any particular field in which you want sort.

Step 2: Click required Sort icon from standard tool bar or Data → Sort command.
Calc, display a “Sort Range” warning message.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 34
“Sort Range” message box has two options, viz. (1) Extend selection (2) Current selection.

Step 3: “Extend Selection” – Sort all the data based on the selection.
“Current Selection” – Sort only the selected range of data, remaining data are not sorted.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Question 12.
Explain Auto Filter method in detail.
Answer:
Auto Filter:
Auto Filter applies a drop-down list box to each field (columns) filled with similar data available in that field. Using the list box item, we can filter the data that matches the criteria of the data concerned.

Using Auto Filter:
1. Click Auto Filter icon available on the “Standard tools bar” (or) Click Data → Filter → Auto Filter

2. The list box contains similar data in the fields.
Spreadsheet table with Auto Filter:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 35
Auto Filter dropdown list box
3. Each list box item will be considered as filter
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 36

4. Select the data item from the list box. Now, Calc shows only the records which are satisfy the selected criteria.

Example:
If we want to apply an auto filter to the contents of the table, follow the following two steps

  • Step 1: Place cell pointer anywhere in the table
  • Step 2: Click Auto Filter icon available on the “Standard tools bar” (or) Click Data → Filter → Auto Filter.

In the above table, if we want to view only the students belongs to the Group code 402;

  • Click the dropdown list box’s drop arrow (a tiny triangle) to get the filter criteria.
  • Select group code 402 from the list.
  • The spreadsheet displays only the student’s details those who are studding in group code 402 and the re

Filtered details:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 37

Question 13.
Explain Standard Filter method in detail.
Answer:
Standard Filter: Auto filter is used only for single criteria on a data, whereas the Standard filter is used for multiple criteria to filter.

Step 1:

  1. Select Data → Filter → Standard Filter.
  2. Now, the entire data is selected and “Standard Filter” dialog box displays as shown in below.
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 38

Step 2:

  1. Select the column heading from the “Filed name” list box for first criteria.
  2. Select conditional operator such as >, <, = etc., from “Condition” list box.
  3. Type or select the value of criteria in the “Value” box.

Step 3:

  1. Select the one of the logical operator (And / Or) from “Operator” list box to fix second criteria.
  2. Follow the step 2, for the next criteria.

Step 4:
Click “OK” to finish.

Example for Standard filter: If you want to filter the records of “BC” students of group code 402 from the table

Step 1: Select Data → Filter → Standard Filter

Step 2: In “Standard Filter” dialog box, select the first criteria:

  • Select Field name as Group code
  • Select Condition as =
  • Type or select Value as 402

Step 3: To select the second criteria:

  • Select Operator as “AND”
  • Select Field name as Class e Select Condition as =
  • Type or select Value as XII- H2

Step 4: Click “OK”
Now, the table displays only the records which are match for the given two criteria.

Class XII student of group 402
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc) 39
Remove Standard Filter:
Select Data → Filter → Remove Filter

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 7 Spreadsheets Basics (OpenOffice Calc)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

11th Computer Applications Guide HTML – Structural Tags Text Book Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
HTML is acronym for ______.
a) Hyper Transfer Markup Language
b) Hyper Text Markup Language
c) Hyper Transfer Makeup Language
d) Hyper Text Makeup Language
Answer:
b) Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 2.
The coded HTML keywords that indicates how web browser should format and display the content is called ______.
a) Tags
b) Attributes
c) Headings
d) Body
Answer:
a) Tags

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 3.
Which of the following is a special word used inside tag to specify additional information to the tag?
a) Tags
b) Attributes
c) Headings
d) Body
Answer:
b) Attributes

Question 4.
HTML tags should be specified within:
a) [ ]
b) { }
c) ( )
d) < >
Answer:
d) < >

Question 5.
An HTML document is bounded within a pair of ______ tags.
a) <body> ….. </body>
b) <title> …… </title>
c) <html> …… </html>
d) <head> ….. </head>
Answer:
c) <html> …… </html>

Question 6.
Which of the following symbol is used to define a closing tag?
a) < >
b) %
c) /
d) \
Answer:
c) /

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 7.
Which section of the browser window displays the main contents?
a) Head
b) Body
c) Title
d) Heading
Answer:
b) Body

Question 8.
Which of the following tag is a structural tag?
a) <html>
b) <hl>
c) <br>
d) <p>
Answer:
a) <html>

Question 9.
In HTML, colours are represented as ______.
a) Binary values
b) Octal values
c) Decimal values
d) Hexadecimal values
Answer:
d) Hexadecimal values

Question 10.
Which of the following symbol is used to prefix with hexadecimal value representing colour in HTML?
a) %
b) #
c) @
d) &
Answer:
b) #

Question 11.
Which of the following attribute is used to change text colour within body tag?
a) bgcolor
b) background
c) text
d) color
Answer:
c) text

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 12.
Within body section, which of the following attribute is used to set top margin?
a) margin
b) top
c) topmargin
d) leftmargin
Answer:
c) topmargin

Question 13.
How many levels of heading tags available in HTML?
a) 6
b) 4
c) 8
d) 3
Answer:
a) 6

Question 14.
The tag used to insert a line break:
a) <h1>
b) <br>
c) <html>
d) <p>
Answer:
b) <br>

Question 15.
The tag used to define a paragraph in HTML:
a) <para>
b) <p>
c) <q>
d) <br>
Answer:
b) <p>

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Part – II

II. Very Short Answers

Question 1.
Sandhiya is creating a webpage. She is entering HTML code on her computer. In between, she keeps pressing “Refresh” / “Reload” button on her browser. What is the purpose?
Answer:
Refresh will be used to refresh / reload the modifications on the webpage.

Question 2.
Explain with the help of an example the difference between container and empty elements of HTML.
Answer:
The HTML elements (Tags) can be classified as two types:

  • Container elements
  • Empty elements

Container Elements:
The tags which are required opening and closing is known as container elements or tags.

For example:
<html>, <body>, <title>, <p> etc.

Empty Elements:
The tags which are required only opening tag is known as empty elements or tags.

For example:
<br>

Question 3.
What is the wrong in the following coding?
<html>
<my web page>
<title> Welcome to my web page </head>
</title>
Answer:
1. Beginning of head section with <head> is missing.
2. </title> must be placed before </head>
3. No Body section
4. End of </html> is missing
5. Title content and Body contents are misplaced.

The Correct code:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 1

Question 4.
How do you define comments in HTML?
Answer:
Comments are used to describe the page or provide some kind of indication of the status of the page. The tag <!> is used to create comments. In HTML, the text what you type within this tag is considered as comments and it is ignored by the browser. Comments never show up onscreen. Comments can be placed anywhere in HTML document.

The general form of comments:
<! comments>

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 5.
How do you include an image as your web page background?
Answer:
An image or picture can be applied as background to a webpage. When we insert an image as background, the text will be displayed on top of the image. Background images can be a texture or bitmap or even a photo.

When we insert a small image, the browser takes the image and repeats it across and down to fill browser window.

The tag to apply an image as background: <body background = “image_name_with_ extension”>

Html Code To Insert Image As Background:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 2

Output:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 3

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
Explain the attributes available with <body> tag.
Answer:
Attributes of <body> teg:
(i) Background Colour: bgcolor = color By default all the browsers display the text on white background. How ever the background color of the browser can be changed by using bgcolor tag.

(ii) Body text Colour: text = color
The default text colour of body section is “black”, it is often called as automatic color, text attribute within body tag is used to change the text colour,

The tag to change body text colour:
<body text = color_name/color_code>

(iii) Background image: background-image An image or picture can be applied as background to a webpage. When we insert an image as background, the text will be displayed on top of the image. Background images can be a texture or bitmap or even a photo.

Example:
<body background = “image_name_with_ extension”>

(iv) Setting Margins: margin = value
The margin refers the blank area from left or top edge of the browser window. Generally there is no default margin setting in any browser. If we want to leave some space as margin to left or top; leftmargin or topmargin attributes will be used respectively.

The tag to specify the left and top margin:
<body leftmargin = value topmargin = value>

Question 2.
What are the attributes available in <html> tags?
Answer:
<html> tag has two attributes viz. dir and lang to specify the text direction and language setting respectively.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 4

Question 3.
How do you view the source file?
Answer:
Viewing Source file:
Source file is an HTML document, what we actually type in text editor (Notepad or getit). we can view your original source file in the browser. The following steps are to be followed to view a source file.

  • Right click on the browser.
  • Select View Page Source (Firefox and Chrome) / View Source (Internet Explorer) or Press Ctrl + U (All browser).
  • Source tile will be displayed.
  • In Internet Explorer, View → Source is also used to open source file.

Note that, we cannot edit the source file .opened using the above methods.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 4.
How do you save a file as HTML file?
Answer:
Save the file as HTML:

  1. Click File → Save (or) Press Ctrl + S.
  2. Save as dialog box appears as shown in the following diagram.
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 5
  3. In “File Name” text box, type a file name with .htm or .html extension.
  4. Select “All Files” from “Save as type” list box. Click. “Save” button.

11th Computer Applications Guide HTML – Structural Tags Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
______ is a special markup language used to create webpages.
a) C++
b) HTML
c) HTTP
d) None of these
Answer:
b) HTML

Question 2.
language tells the browsers, how to display the text, images, animations and other contents of a hypertext document on the screen.
a) C++
b) HTML
c) HTTP
d) None of these
Answer:
b) HTML

Question 3.
______ language tells how to make a document interactive through special hyper links.
a) C++
b) HTML
c) HTTP
d) None of these
Answer:
b) HTML

Question 4.
HTML is not a ______.
a) Word processing tool
b) Programming language
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 5.
HTML is only a ______ specification language.
a) Markup
b) Page layout
c) Hyperlink
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 6.
______ language describes the structure of a document.
a) C++
b) HTML
c) HTTP
d) None of these
Answer:
b) HTML

Question 7.
HTML is made up of ______.
a) Tags
b) Attributes
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 8.
______ are known as elements of HTML.
a) Tags
b) Heading
c) Paragraph
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Tags

Question 9.
Additional information such as colour, alignment etc., can be included with an HTML tag is known as ______.
a) Property
b) Attribute
c) command
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Attribute

Question 10.
______ are used to improve the appearance of an HTML document.
a) Tags
b) Structures
c) Attributes
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Attributes

Question 11.
All HTML tags should be specified within ______ brackets.
a) Angle
b) Square
c) Curly
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Angle

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 12.
HTML is ______.
a) case sensitive
b) not case sensitive
c) Neither A nor B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) not case sensitive

Question 13.
Entire HTML document is bounded within a pair of ______ tags.
a) <html> and </html>
b) <body> and </body>
c) <head> and </head>
d) <title> and </title>
Answer:
a) <html> and </html>

Question 14.
A HTML document contains ______.
a) hyperlinks
b) video
c) audio
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 15.
HTML ______ tag turn-on a feature.
a) Opening
b) Closing
c) head section
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Opening

Question 16.
HTML ______ tag turn-off its features.
a) Opening
b) Closing
c) head section
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Closing

Question 17.
______ is a opening tag.
a) <html>
b) <head>
c) <body>
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 18.
______ is a dosing tag.
a) <html>
b) <head>
c) </body>
d) None of these
Answer:
c) </body>

Question 19.
Every web document has ______ sections.
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) many
Answer:
a) two

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 20.
Every web document has ______ section.
a) Head
b) Body
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 21.
The ______ section is used to show the title of a webpage in title bar or tab heading in browser.
a) Heading
b) Body
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Heading

Question 22.
The head section should begins with ______ tag.
a) <head>
b) </head>
c) <title>
d) <heading>
Answer:
a) <head>

Question 23.
The tag ______ is used to specify the title of the webpage.
a) <head>
b) </head>
c) <title>
d) <heading>
Answer:
c) <title>

Question 24.
The ______ section is used to display the main content on the browser window.
a) Head
b) Body
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Body

Question 25.
Whatever the text we specify between ______ tags will display on the browser window.
a) <html> and </html>
b) <body> and </body>
c) <head> and </head>
d) <title> and </title>
Answer:
b) <body> and </body>

Question 26.
_______ tag is known as structural tag.
a) <html>
b) <head> and <title>
c) <body>
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 27.
_______ tag Is basic essential element to construct a web page,
a) <html>
b) <head> and <title>
c) <body>
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 28.
The _______ tag contains information about the document,, Including Its title, scripts used, style definition and document descrlptlors.
a) <html>
b) <head>
c) <body>
d) All the above
Answer:
b) <head>

Question 29.
______ tag should be placed within <head> tag.
a) <html>
b) <tide>
c) <body>
d) None of these
Answer:
b) <tide>

Question 30.
The _______ tag endoses all the tags, attributes and Information to be displayed in the web page.
a) <html>
b) <title>
c) <body>
d) None of these
Answer:
c) <body>

Question 31.
_______ tag should be entered below the </head> tag.
a) <html>
b) <title>
c) <body>
d) None of these
Answer:
c) <body>

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 32.
We can write, test and link web pages with a _____.
a) Internet connection
b) Web server
c) Web Hosting
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 33.
To create and testing a HTML document i.e. web page need a _______.
a) Text editor
b) Browser
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 34.
A simple text editor _______ for Windows used to create a HTML document.
a) Notepad
b) Getit
C) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Notepad

Question 35.
A simple text editor ______ for Linux used to create a HTML document.
a) Notepad
b) Getit
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Getit

Question 36.
will be used to refresh/ reload the modifications in the HTML document.
a) Ctrl + R
b) F5
C) Ctrl +R or F5
d) None of these
Answer:
C) Ctrl +R or F5

Question 37.
_______ are specIal words used Inside a tag to specify additional Information to a tag.
a) Attributes
b) Properties
c) Functions
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Attributes

Question 38.
Attributes should be placed within the _______ tag.
a) opening
b) dosing
c) outside
d) None of these
Answer:
a) opening

Question 39.
_______ is used to make browsers and otter programs, known that this is an HTML document.
a) <html>
b) <body>
c) <head>
d) <title>
Answer:
a) <html>

Question 40.
<html> tag has ______ attributes.
a) three
b) two
c) four
d) five
Answer:
b) two

Question 41.
<html> tag has _______ attribute.
a) dir
b) lang
c) dir and lang
d) none of these
Answer:

Question 42.
_______ attribute specifies the direction of the text to be aligned within the entire document.
a) dir
b) lang
c) align
d) none of these
Answer:
a) dir

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 43.
_______ is global attribute.
a) dir
b) lang
c) align
d) none of these
Answer:

Question 44.
_______ is the default value of the dir attribute.
a) rtl
b) Itr
c) tob
d) btot
Answer:
b) Itr

Question 45.
_______ is the value of the dir attribute for Arabian languages.
a) rtl
b) Itr
c) tob
d) btot
Answer:
a) rtl

Question 46.
_______ attribute specify t%e language used with in the document.
a) dir
b) lang
c) align
d) none of these
Answer:
b) lang

Question 47.
Predefined language cod for English is _______.
a) EN
b)ENG
c) ENGUSH
d) None of these
Answer:
a) EN

Question 48.
Predefined language code for Tamil is _______.
a) TA
b) TL
c) TAM
d) None of these
Answer:
a) TA

Question 49.
By default M the browsers display th text on _______ background.
a) Black
b) White
c) Yellow
d) None of these
Answer:
b) White

Question 50.
The background color of the browser can be changed by using _______ tag.
a) bgcolor
b) bkcolour
c) backcolor
d) None of these
Answer:
a) bgcolor

Question 51.
______ Is the <body> tag attribute.
a) bgcolor
b) text
C) background
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 52.
The colors In HTML are represented as _______ digit hexadecimal values.
a) six
b) five
c) four
d) two
Answer:
a) six

Question 53.
______ will be more flexible to handle colors.
a) color code
b) colour name
c) either A or B
d) none of these
Answer:
a) color code

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 54.
First two digits represent _______ colour valu. In the six digit hexadecimal valu.
a) Red
b) Green
c) Blue
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Red

Question 55.
Middle two digits represent _____ colour value in the six dIgit hexadecimal value.
a) Red
b) Green
c) Blue
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Green

Question 56.
Last two digits represent ______ colour value In the six digit hexadecImal value.
a) Red
b) Green
c) Blue
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Blue

Question 57.
The colour rang is _______.
a) 00 to FF
b) 11 to FF
c) AA t0 00
d) FF t0 AA
Answer:
a) 00 to FF

Question 58.
The colour code 000000 represent _______ colour.
a) Black
b) White
c) Bright Red
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Black

Question 59.
The colour code FFFFFF represent _______ colour.
a) Black
b) White
c) Bright Red
d) None of these
Answer:
b) White

Question 60.
The colour code FF0000 represent _______ colour.
a) Black
b) White
c) Bright Red
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Bright Red

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 61.
The colour code 00FF00 represent _______ colour.
a) Green
b) White
c) Bright Red
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Green

Question 62.
The colour code 0000FF represent _______ colour.
a) Green
b) Blue
c) Bright Red
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Blue

Question 63.
The colour code COCOCO represent _______ colour.
a) Green
b) Silver
c) Bright Red
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Silver

Question 64.
The colour code 808000 represent _______ colour.
a) Olive
b) Silver
c) Bright Red
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Olive

Question 65.
The colour code for Grey colour is _______.
a) 808080
b) OOFFFF
c) 800000
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 808080

Question 66.
The colour code for Brown colour is _______.
a) 808080
b) 00FFFF
c) 800000
d) A52A2A
Answer:
d) A52A2A

Question 67.
The colour code for Purple colour is _______.
a) 808080
b) 00FFFF
c) 800000
d) 800080
Answer:
d) 800080

Question 68.
The colour code for Yellow colour is _______.
a) 808080
b) FFFF00
c) 800000
d) 800080
Answer:
b) FFFF00

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 69.
The default text colour of body section is _______.
a) Black
b) White
c) Yellow
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Black

Question 70.
The tag to change body text colour is _______.
a) text
b) colour
c) btext
d) None of these
Answer:
a) text

Question 71.
The tag to apply an image as background is _______.
a) background
b) bgground
c) backimage
d) bgimage
Answer:
a) background

Question 72.
The attribute to specify the left margin is _______.
a) Leftmargin
b) Lmargin
c) LM
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Leftmargin

Question 73.
The attribute to specify the top margin is _______.
a) Tmargin
b) Topmargin
c) TM
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Topmargin

Question 74.
HTML has _______ levels of headings.
a) Five
b) Four
c) Six
d) Two
Answer:
c) Six

Question 75.
_______ is an attribute to set right, center and justify alignment to headings.
a) Align
b) Alignment
c) Justification
d) Justify
Answer:
a) Align

Question 76.
_______ is the value of Align attribute in Heading tag.
a) Justify
b) Center
c) Right
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 77.
Browsers do not recognize _______.
a) returns
b) tabs
c) more than one space between words
d) All the above
Answer:
b) tabs

Question 78.
The ______ tag is used for line break.
a) <Break>
b) <BR>
c) <HR>
d) None of these
Answer:
b) <BR>

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 79.
The _______ is an empty tag.
a) <br>
b) <hr>
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 80.
The _______ tag does not have close tag.
a) <br>
b) <body>
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) <br>

Question 81.
The _______ tag does not have attribute.
a) <br>
b) <body>
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) <br>

Question 82.
In HTML, paragraphs are created using the _______ tag.
a) <P>
b) <Para>
c) <Paragraph>
d) None of these
Answer:
a) <P>

Question 83.
Identify the correct statement from the following.
a) The keyboard shortcut to change paragraph alignment in word processor is not working in HTML
b) To change the alignment of a paragraph align attribute can be used with <p> tag.
c) The tag <!> is used to create comments.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 84.
_______ never show up onscreen.
a) Comments
b) Body section content
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Comments

Question 85.
The HTML elements (Tags) can be classified as _______ types.
a) Three
b) Two
c) Four
d) Five
Answer:
b) Two

Question 86.
_______ is the HTML elements (Tags).
a) Container elements
b) Empty elements
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 87.
The tags which are required opening and closing is known as _______ or tags.
a) Container elements
b) Empty elements
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Container elements

Question 88.
The tags which are required only opening tag is known as _______ or tags.
a) Container elements
b) Empty elements
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Empty elements

Question 89.
_______ is a container tag.
a) <html>
b) <bdoy>
c) <title>
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 90.
_______ is an empty tag.
a) <br>
b) <title>
c) <p>
d) None of these
Answer:
a) <br>

Question 91.
Text which contains links to other texts is called _______.
a) Hypertext
b) Hyperlink
c) Anchor
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Hypertext

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
Write note on HTML.
Answer:
HTML is not a word processing tool or a programming language. It is only a markup or page layout and hyperlink specification language. It describes the structure of a document.

Question 2.
Write note on HTML code.
Answer:
HTML cod is made up of tags and its attributes.

Question 3.
Differentiate Tags and Attributes.
Answer:
Tags are known as elements of HTML.etc., can be included with an HTML tag is known as attribute. Attributes are used to improve the appearance of an HTML document.

Question 4.
What is opening tag and closing tag?
Answer:
Opening tag turn-on a feature such as heading, bold, center etc., and closing tag turn – off its features. Opening and closing tags are the same name, but closing tag name preceded by a slash (/). For example, <html> is an opening tag, </html> is a closing tab.

Question 5.
What are the sections of a web document?
Answer:
Every web document has two sections viz. Heading Section and Body Section.

Question 6.
Write note on heading section.
Answer:
The heading section is used to show the title of a webpage in title bar or tab heading in browser. The head section should begins with <head> tag and end with </head> tag. The tag <title> is used to specify the title of the webpage.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 7.
Write note on body section.
Answer:
The body section is used to display the main content on the browser window. The body section should defined within <body> and </ body> tags. Whatever the text we specify between these tags will display on the browser window.

Question 8.
What are the structural tags of HTML?
Answer:
<html>, <head>, <title> and <body> these four tags are known as structural tags. These tags are basic essential elements to construct a web page.

Question 9.
Write about <HTML> tag.
Answer:

  1. The <html> tag identified the document as an HTML document.
  2. All HTML documents should begins with <html> and end with </html>.

Question 10.
Write about <head> tag.
Answer:
The <head> tag contains information about the document, including its title, scripts used, style definition and document descriptions.

Question 11.
Write note on <title> tag.
Answer:

  1. The <title> tag contains the title of the document.
  2. The title specified between opening and closing tags appears in the title bar / page tab of the browser.
  3. <title> tag should be placed within <head> tag.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 12.
Write note on <body> tag.
Answer:

The <body> tag encloses all the tags, attributes and information to be displayed in the web page.
<body> tag should be entered below the </head> tag.

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is HTML?
Answer:
HTML is a special markup language used to create web pages. This language tells the browsers, how to display the text, images, animations and other contents of a hypertext document on the screen. The language also tells how to make a document interactive through special hyper links.

Question 2.
Write the HTML Document Structure.
Answer:
HTML Document Structure:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 6

Question 3.
What are the HTML writing tools?
Answer:
HTML Writing Tools:

  1. To get started writing HTML, there is no need of web server, web hosting or even Internet connection. We can write, test and link web pages without a network.
  2. To create and testing a HTML document i.e. web page need an application text editor to write HTML code and a browser to view them.

Question 4.
Write briefly about HTML attributes.
Answer:

  1. Attributes are special words used inside a tag to specify additional information to a tag. Attributes should be placed within the opening tag.
  2. Most of the tags support specialized attributes and there are also a few global elements that can be used with any tag.
  3. Global elements are common to all HTML elements; they can be used on all elements.

Question 5.
Create a web page (HTML document) to the following specification.
Answer:
Title: My First Web Page
Text to be display: Welcome to Computer Applications
Background color: Lime
Body text color: Blue
Margin: from left and top 1 inch

Html Code:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 7

Question 6.
Explain comments in HTML.
Answer:
Comments are used to describe the page or provide some kind of indication of the status of the page. The tag <!> is used to create comments. In HTML, the text what we type within this tag is considered as comments and it is ignored by the browser. Comments never show up onscreen. Comments can be placed anywhere in HTML document.

The general form of comments:
<! comments >

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags

Question 7.
Explain Container and Empty Elements.
Answer:
The HTML elements (Tags) can be classified as two types – (1) Container elements (2) Empty elements. ,

Container Elements:
The tags which are required opening and closing is known a.s container elements or tags. For example: <html>, <body>, <title>, <p> etc.,

Empty Elements:
The tags which are required only opening tag is known as empty elements or tags.
For example: <br>

Part – IV

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
Explain Heading tag with its attributes.
Answer:
Headings are used to include titles to sections of a web page. HTML has six levels of headings viz. <h1> to <h6>. The number with h indicates the level of heading, Header tags are display the body text as bolder and larger in size according to its level.

The syntax of heading tags:
<h,..> Heading text </h…>

Attribute of Headings tag: Align is an attribute to set right, center and justify’ alignment to headings. Left if the default alignment, so that it is not supported in latest version of HTML. Justify alignment is not supported by older browsers.
The tag is to specify the alignment to headings:
<h# align = value>
Where # is the level number, value may be Right, Center or Justify. Justify alignment only used for paragraphs.

HTML code with Heading and align attributes:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 8
Output:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 9

Question 2.
Explain Line Breaks and Paragraphs in HTML document.
Answer:
Browser applications are having some special rules for displaying text. They do not recognize returns, tabs or even more than one space between words. If we create an HTML document with multiple lines of text, browser will display it as a single line.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 10
The <br> tag is used for line break. The <br> is an empty tag, does not have close tag and attribute. It should be placed at the end of a line.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 11
In HTML, paragraphs are created using the <p> tag. The content what we type between <p> and </p> is identified as a paragraph and display as a paragraph by the browser. Because, the browser does not recognize returns.

HTML code to create a paragraph:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 12
Output:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 13

Changing Paragraph alignment
In HTML documents there are four paragraph alignments viz. Left, Right, Center and Justify. The text that we type between <p> and </p> is by default aligned to left. To change the alignment of a paragraph align attribute can be used with <p> tag.

The tag to specify the alignment to paragraphs:
<p align = alignment>
Where alignment can either be Right, Center or Justify. Note that, left is the default alignment.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 HTML – Structural Tags 14

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

11th Physics Guide Work, Energy and Power Book Back Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Part – I:
I. Multiple choice questions:

Question 1.
A uniform force of (2\(\hat{i}\) + \(\hat{j}\)) N acts on a particle of mass 1 kg. The particle displaces from position (3\(\hat{j}\) + \(\hat{k}\) )m to (5\(\hat{i}\) + 3\(\hat{j}\)) m. The work done by the force on the particle is _______. (AIPMT Model 2013)
a) 9 J
b) 6 J
c) 10 J
d) 12 J
Answer:
c) 10 J

Question 2.
A ball of mass 1 kg and another of mass 2 kg are dropped from a tall building whose height is 80 m. After, a fall of 40 m each towards Earth, their respective kinetic energies will be in the ratio of _______. (AIPMT model 2004)
a) \(\sqrt{2}\) : 1
b) 1 : \(\sqrt{2}\)
c) 2 : 1
d) 1 : 2
Answer:
d) 1 : 2

This online Velocity Calculator is used to find the velocity of water in a pipe with the flow rate and diameter of the pipe.

Question 3.
A body of mass 1 kg is thrown upwards with a velocity 20 m s-1. It momentarily comes to rest after attaining a height of 18 m. How much energy is lost due to air friction? (Take g= 10ms-2 ) (AIPMT 2009)
a) 20 J
b) 30 J
c) 40 J
d) 10 J
Answer:
a) 20 J

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 4.
An engine pumps water continuously through a hose. Water leaves the hose with a velocity v and m is the mass per unit length of the water of the jet. What is the rate at which kinetic energy is imparted to water? (AIPMT 2009)
a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) mv3
b) mv3
c) \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)mv²
d) \(\frac { 5 }{ 2 }\) mv²
Answer:
a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) mv3

Question 5.
A body of mass 4 m is lying in xy-plane at rest. It suddenly explodes into three pieces. Two pieces each of mass m move perpendicular to each other with equal speed v. The total kinetic energy generated due to explosion is _______. (AIPMT 2014)
a) mv²
b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)mv²
c) 2 mv²
d) 4 mv²
Answer:
b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)mv²

Question 6.
The potential energy of a system increases, if work is done _______.
a) by the system against a conservative force
b) by the system against a non-conservative force
c) upon the system by a conservative force
d) upon the system by a non-conservative force
Answer:
a) by the system against a conservative force

Question 7.
What is the minimum velocity with which a body of mass m must enter a vertical loop of radius R so that it can complete the loop?
a) \(\sqrt{2gR}\)
b) \(\sqrt{3gR}\)
c) \(\sqrt{5gR}\)
d) \(\sqrt{gR}\)
Answer:
c) \(\sqrt{5gR}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 8.
The work done by the conservative force for a closed path is _______.
a) always negative
b) zero
c) always positive
d) not defined
Answer:
b) zero

Question 9.
If the linear momentum of the object is increased by 0.1%, then the kinetic energy is increased by _______.
a) 0.1 %
b) 0.2%
c) 0.4%
d) 0.01%
Answer:
b) 0.2%

Question 10.
If the potential energy of the particle is α – \(\frac { β }{ 2 }\)x², then force experienced by the particle is _______.
a) F = \(\frac { β }{ 2 }\)x²
b) F = βx
c) F = – βx
d) F = – \(\frac { β }{ 2 }\)x²
Answer:
c) F = – βx

Question 11.
A wind-powered generator converts wind energy into electric energy. Assume that the generator converts a fixed fraction of the wind energy intercepted by its blades into electrical energy. For wind speed v, the electrical power output will be proportional to
a) v
b) v²
c) v3
d) v4
Answer:
c) v3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 12.
Two equal masses m1 and m2 are moving along the same straight line with velocities 5ms-1 and -9ms-1 respectively. If the collision is elastic, then calculate the velocities after the collision of m1 and m2, respectively _______.
a) -4ms-1 and 10 ms-1
b) 10ms-1 and 0 ms-1
c) -9ms-1 and 5 ms-1
d) 5 ms-1 and 1 ms-1
Answer:
c) -9ms-1 and 5 ms-1

Question 13.
A particle is placed at the origin and a force F= kx is acting on it (where k is a positive constant). If U(0)=0, the graph of U(x) versus x will be (where U is the potential energy function) (IIT 2004)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 1
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 2

Question 14.
A particle which is constrained to move along x-axis, is subjected to a force in the same direction which varies with the distance x of the particle from the origin as F(x) = – kx + ax3. Here, k and a are positive constants. For x > 0, the functional form of the potential energy U(x) of the particle is _______. (IIT 2002)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 3
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 4

Question 15.
A spring of force constant k is cut into two pieces such that one piece is double the length of the other. Then, the long piece will have a force constant of _______.
a) \(\frac { 2 }{ 3 }\) k
b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\) k
c) 3k
d) 6k
Answer:
b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\) k

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

II. Short Answer Questions:

Question 1.
Explain how the definition of work in physics is different from general perception.
Answer:
The term work is used in diverse contexts in daily life. It refers to both physical as well as mental work. In fact, any activity can generally be called work. But in Physics, the term work is treated as a physical quantity with a precise definition. Work is said to be done by the force when the force applied to a body displaces it.

Question 2.
Write the various types of potential energy. Explain the formulate.
Answer:
The energy possessed by the body by virtue of its position is called potential energy.
The various types of potential energies are
1) Gravitational potential energy :
The energy possessed by the body due gravitational force gives gravitational potential energy
u = mgh.
where
u → Gravitational potential energy
m → Mass of the body
g → acceleration due to gravity
h → displacement produced

2) Elastic potential energy :
The energy due to spring force and other similar forces give rise to elastic potential energy
u = 1/2² Where
U → elastic potential energy
K → spring constant
x → elongation produced

3) Electrostatic potential energy
The energy due to electro static force on charges give rise to electrostatic potential energy
U = K \(\frac{\mathrm{q}_{1} \mathrm{q}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\) where
K = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\) Constant
q1, q2 – magnitude of charges
d – displacement made by any one of the charges or by both charges.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 3.
Write the differences between conservative and non-conservative forces. Give two examples each.
Answer:
Conservative forces:
A Force is said to be a conservative force if work done by or against the force in moving the body depends only on the initial and final positions of the body and net depend on the nature of the path followed between the two positions
Examples:
Elastic spring force, electrostatic force, magnetic force, gravitational force.

Non-conservative force:
A force is said to be non-conservative if the work done by or against the force in moving a body depends on the path between initial and final positions. This means the value of work-done is different in different paths.

Examples:

  1. Frictional forces are non-conservative forces as the work done against friction depends on the length of the path moved by the body.
  2. The force due to air resistance, viscous forces are also non conservative forces because work done by or against these forces depends upon the velocity of motion.

Question 4.
Explain the characteristics of elastic and inelastic collision Elastic collision:
Answer:
In a collision, the total K.E of the bodies before collision is equal to the total K.E. of the bodies after collision, then it is an elastic collision.
Total K.E. before collision = Total K.E. after collision

Inelastic collision:
In a collision, the total K.E. of the bodies before collision is not equal to total K.E. after collision then it is called as inelastic collision Even though K.E. is not conserved but total energy is conserved. After collision of the two colliding bodies stick together such collision are called as perfectly inelastic a plastic collision.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 5.
Define the following
Answer:
a) Coefficient of restitution
b) Power
c) Law of conservation of energy
d) Loss of Kinetic energy in inelastic collision
Answer:
a) Coefficient of restitution :
Coefficient of restitution defined as the ratio of velocity of separation (after collision) to velocity of approach (before collision)
The coefficient of restitution = Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 5

b) Power :
Power is defined as the rate of work done or energy delivered
P = \(\frac { W }{ t }\) = \(\vec{F}\).\(\vec{V}\)

c) Law of conservation of energy :
Law states that “Energy can neither be created nor destroyed. It may be transformed from one to another but the total energy of an isolated system remains constant”

d) Loss of kinetic energy in inelastic collision
The difference in total K.E. before collision and total K.E. after collision’s is equal to loss of K.E. during collision.
∆Q = Total K.E. before collision – Total K.E. after collision.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

III. Long Answer Questions:

Question 1.
Explain with graphs the difference between work done by a constant force and by a variable force.
Answer:
a) Work done by a constant force:
When a constant force ‘F’ acts on a body the small work done (dw) by the force in producing a small displacement ‘dr’ is given by dw = (F cos θ) dr.
The total W.D in producing a displacement from initial position ri, to final position rf is,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 6
The graphical representation of the W.D by constant force is shown below
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 7
The area under the graph shows the work done by constant force.

b) Work done by a variable force :
When the component of a variable force F acts on a body, the small work done (dw) by the force in producing a small displacement dr is given by dw = (F cos θ) dr [ Here F cos 0 is the component of variable forces]. where F and 0 one variables To total W.D for the displacement from initial position ri to final position rf is given by the relation.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 8
A graphical representation of the work done by a variable force is shown below. The area under the graph gives the W.D. by variable force.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 9

Question 2.
State and explain work energy principle Mention any three examples for it.
Answer:
Law:
Work done by a force on the body changes the kinetic energy of the body, ie change in K.E. = work done. This is called work energy theorem.
Proof:
Consider a body of mass m at rest on a frictionless horizontal surface. The work done (W) done by the constant force (F) for displacement (S) in the same direction is W = FS → (1)
The constant force is given by F = ma → (2)
We know that v² = u² + 2a
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 10
W = 1/2 mv² – 1/2 mu²
Here the term 1/2 mv² indicates K.E.
1/2 mv² – 1/2mu² = ∆K (change in K.E.)
∵ W = ∆K
Hence proved

Examples:

  1. A moving hammer drives a nail into the wood. Being in motion, it has K.E. or ability to do work.
  2. A fast moving stone can break a windowpane. The stone has K.E. due to its motion and so it can do work.
  3. The kinetic energy of air is used to run windmills.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 3.
Arrive at an expression for power and velocity. Give some examples for the same.
Answer:
Power is defined as the rate of work done or energy delivered. P = \(\frac { w }{ t }\)
Relation between power and velocity:
The work done by a force F for a displacement \(\overline{dr}\) is dw = \(\overline{F}\).\(\overline{dr}\)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 11

Examples:
1) A 100 Watt bulb consumes 100 joule of electrical energy in one second
2) Electrical motor supply enough power to bring water from a bore well.

Question 4.
Arrive at an expression for elastic collision in one dimension and discuss various cases.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 12
Consider two elastic bodies of masses m1 and m2 moving in a straight line (along positive direction) on a frictionless horizontal surface. In order to have collision assume m1 moves faster than m2.

Let U1 and 1 be the initial velocities of m1 and m2 respectively. (u1 > u2). After collision let the masses m1 and m2 moves with velocities v1 and v2 respectively.
Incase of elastic collision both linear momentum and kinetic energies are conserved
∴ from law of conservation of linear momentum
Total momentum before (Pi)
collision = Total momentum afer collision (Pf)
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2 → (1)
m1(u1 – v1) = m2(v2 – u2 → (2)
Further
Total K.E. before collision (KEi) = Total K.E. after collision (KEf)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 13
rearranging
u1 – u2 = – (v1 – v2) → (5)
From this it is dear that for any elastic collision, relative speed of two elastic bodies after the collision has the same magnitude as before collision but in opposite direction.

Rewriting the above equation for v1 & v1
v1 = v2 + u2 – u1 → (6)
(or)
v2 = v1 + u1 – u2 → (7)
To find velocities of v1 & v2
Substituting (7) in (2)
m1(u1 – v1) = m2(v1 + u1 – u2 – u2)
m1(u1 – v1) = m2(v1 + u1 – 2u2)
m1u1 – m1v1 = m2v1 + m2u1 – 2m2u2
m1u1 – m2u1 + 2m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v1
u1(m1 – m2) + 2m2u2 = v1(m1 + m2)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 14

Case 1:
When bodies have same mass is m1 = m2 = m
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 15
The velocities get interchanged.

Case 2:
When both bodies have same mass m1 = m2 = m, but second body at rest in u2 = 0
v1 = 0, v2 = u1
After collision the first body comes to rest and the second body moves with the velocity of first body.

Case 3 :
The first body very much lighter than the second body in m1 << m2, \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1}}{\mathrm{~m}_{2}}\) << 1.
the ratio \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1}}{\mathrm{~m}_{2}}\) = 0 and also second body at rest, (u2 = 0)
Dividing numerator and denominator of equation 8 by m2
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 16
Similarly dividing numerator and denominator of equation 9 by m1
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 17

From this, the conclusion arrived is the first body which is lighter returns back (rebounds) in opposite direction with the same initial velocity as it has a negative sign. The second body since it has heavier mars continues to remain at rest even after the collision.

Case 4 :
The second body is very much lighter than the first body.
m2 << m1 then the ratio = 0 \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{2}}{\mathrm{~m}_{1}}\) and also if the target is at rest ie second body at rest (u2 = 0)
Dividing equation (8) both the numerator and denominator by m1
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 18
This shows that the first body which is heavier continues to move with same velocity and the second body which is lighter will move with twice the initial velocity of the first body, ie lighter body is thrown away from the point of collision.

Question 5.
What is inelastic collision? In which way it is different from elastic collision mention few examples in day to day life for inelastic collision.
Answer:
In a collision, the total K.E. on the bodies before collision is not equal to the total K.E. after collision then it is called as inelastic collision, i.e
Total K.E after collision ≠ Total K.E. before collision
Whereas in case of elastic collision Total K.E. before collison is equal to total K.E after collision.
Example: Collision between two vehicles, collision between a ball and floor.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

IV. Numerical Problems:

Question 1.
Calculate the work done by a force of 30N in lifting a load of 2kg to a height of 10m (g = 10ms-2)
Solution:
F = 30N
m = 2kg
s = 10 m
g = 10 ms-2
θ = 0
W.D = ?
W.D = \(\overline{F}\).\(\overline{S}\) = FS cos θ
W.D = 30 x 10
= 300 J

Question 2.
A ball with a velocity of 5 ms-1 impinges at an angle of 60° with the vertical on a smooth Horizontal plane. If the coefficient of restitution is 0.5 find the velocity and direction after the impact.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 19
U1 = 5 ms-1
θ = 60°
e = 0.5
v = ?
Initial momentum = final momentum along the original line of m of con.
∵ Coefficient of restitution is 0.5 (less than 1) the collision is inelastic
Applying component of velocities. The x component of velocity is
u sin θ = v sin Φ → (1)
But the magnitude of y component is not same using coefficient of restitution
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 20

Question 3.
A bob of mass m is attached to one end of the rod of negligible mass and length r, the other end of which is pivoted freely at a fixed center O as shown in the figure. What initial speed must be given to the object to reach the top of the circle?. (Hint: use law of conservation of energy). Is this speed less or greater than speed obtained in the section 4.2.9?
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 21
T.E. at lowest point (E1) = Total energy at (E2)
E1 = E2
At the lowest point potential energy = u1 = 0
Kinetic energy = KE1 = 1/2 mv1²
Total energy at lowest point = E1 = u1 + KE1
E1 = 0 + 1/2 mv² → (1)
∴ E1 = mv²1 … (1)
At the top of circle:
Potential energy = u2 = 2mgr
K.E energy at top = 1/2mv2²
Total energy at highest
point = 2mgr + 1/2 mv2² → (2)
According to law of conservation of energy E1 = E2
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 22

Question 4.
Two different unknown masses A and B collide. A is initially at rest when B has a speed V. After collision B has a speed V/2 and moves at right angles to its original direction of motion. Find the direction in which A moves after collision.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 23
Applying principle of conservation of momentum along x-axis
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 24
Applying principle of conservation of momentum along y-axis
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 25

Question 5.
A bullet of mass 20g strikes a pendulum of mass 5 kg. The centre of mass of the pendulum rises at a vertical distance of 10 cm. If the bullet gets embedded into the pendulum, calculate its initial speed.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 26
mass of bullet m1 = 20 x 10-3kg
mass of pendulum m2 = 5kg
Let the speed of the bullet = u1
∵ The pendulum at rest u2 = 0
h = 10 x 10-2m
Let v be the common velocity after the bullet embedded inside the bob.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 27
This common velocity ‘v’ is the initial velocity of combined bullet and bob.
W.K.T
v² – u² = 2as
Here v = 6; u = 0, a = – g s = h
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 28

V. Conceptual Questions:

Question 1.
A spring which is initially in the unstretched condition is first stretched by a length x and again by a further length x. The work done in the first case w1 is one-third of the work done in the second case w2. True or false?
Answer:
True, W.D by the first case will be 1/3 of the second W.D
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 29

Question 2.
Which is conserved in inelastic collision? Total energy (or) kinetic energy?
Answer:
In inelastic collision total energy is only conserved but kinetic energy is not conserved. A part of kinetic energy is converted into some other form of energy such as sound, heat energy.
Note: The linear momentum is also conserved.

Question 3.
Is there any network done by external forces on a car moving at a constant speed along a straight road?
Answer:
Since the car is moving at a constant speed along a straight line, displacement is caused. So work in done by the force.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 4.
A car starts from rest and moves on a surface with uniform acceleration. Draw the graph of kinetic energy versus displacement. What information you can get from that graph?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 30
According to work-energy theorem change in K.E = W.D
K.E is Kept constant slope is constant

Question 5.
A charged particle moves towards another charged particle under what conditions the total momentum and the total energy of the system conserved?
Answer:
Coulomb force is acting in between the charged particles Internal force is a conservative force. If no external forces act or the work done by external forces is zero then the mechanical energy of the system and also total linear momentum also remains constant.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

11th Physics Guide Work, Energy and Power Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Multiple choice questions:

Question 1.
Thrust and linear momentum
(a) Thrust and linear momentum
(b) Work and energy
(c) Work and power
(d) Power and energy
Answer:
(b) Work and energy

Question 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 31 For the surface μ = 0.4, The work done by applied force, frictional force and net force are
a) 50J, -40J, 10J
b) 50J, -20J, 10J
c) 10J, -50J, 40J
d) 50J, -40J, 20J
Answer:
a) 50J, -40J, 10J

Question 3.
The system is released from rest. Find the work done by the force if gravity during first 2 seconds of motion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 32
a) 80J
b) 20J
c) 40J
d) 100J
Answer:
c) 40J

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 4.
Dimensional formula for work done is
(a) MLT-1
(b) ML2T2
(c) M-1L-1T2
(d) ML2T-2
Answer:
(d) ML2T-2

Question 5.
The variation of force acting on a particle along x ax is is shown. The W.D by the force during the displacement x = 0 to x = 25m is _______.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 33
a) 100J
b) 115J
c) 130J
d) 125J
Answer:
b) 115J

Question 6.
The amount of work done by centripetal force on the object moving in a circular path is
(a) zero
(b) infinity
(c) positive
(d) negative
Answer:
(a) zero

Question 7.
A ball of mass 200g is attached to a string 50 mm and a force F is applied as shown. The W.D by this force if the string makes an angle 60° with vertical is? [at initial and final positions speed of the ball is zero.]
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 34
a) 1J
b) 0.5J
c) 0.05J
d) 0.25J
Answer:
b) 0.5J

Question 8.
An object of mass 4kg falls from rest through a vertical distance of 20m and reaches with velocity 10ms-1 on ground. The work done by air friction is .
a) 800J
b) – 800J
c) 600J
d) – 600J
Answer:
d) – 600J

Question 9.
If the force and displacement are perpendicular to each other, then the work done is
(a) positive
(b) negative
(c) zero
(d) maximum
Answer:
(c) zero

Question 10.
What is the power of an engine which can lift 600kg of coal per minute from a mine 20m deep?
a) 2000 w
b) 100 w
c) 1000 w
d) 200 w
Answer:
a) 2000 w

Question 11.
If w1, w2 and w3 represent the work done in moving a particle from A to B along 3 different paths 1, 2 and 3 respectively as shown in figure, in the gravitational field of a point mass m. Find the correct relation an between w1, w2 and w3 _______.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 35
a) w1 > w2 > w3
b) w1 = w2 = w3
c) w1 < w2 < w3
d) w2 > w1 > w3
Answer:
b) w1 = w2 = w3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 12.
A position – depends force F = 7 – 2x + 3x² newton acts on a small body of mass 2kg and displacement if from x = 0 to x = 5m. The work done in Joule is _______.
a) 70
b) 270
c) 35
d) 135
Answer:
d) 135

Question 13.
The energy possessed by a body due to its motion is called as
(a) potential energy
(b) kinetic energy
(c) mechanical energy
(d) none
Answer:
(b) kinetic energy

Question 14.
According to the work-energy theorem, the work done by the net force on a particle is equal to change in its _______.
a) kinetic energy
b) potential energy
c) linear momentum
d) angular momentum
Answer:
a) kinetic energy

Question 15.
A block of 2kg is resting on a smooth surface. At what angle a force of 10N be acting on the block so that it will acquire a K.E of 10J after moving 2m _______.
a) 30°
b) 60°
c) 45°
d) 90°
Answer:
b) 60°

Question 16.
The K.E acquired by a body of mass m in travelling a certain distance starting from rest under a constant force is _______.
a) directly proportional to m
b) directly proportional to \(\sqrt{m}\)
c) inversely proportional to \(\sqrt{m}\)
d) independent of m
Answer:
b) directly proportional to \(\sqrt{m}\)

Question 17.
1-kilowatt hour is equivalent to
(a) 10-7 J
(b) 1.6 × 10-19 J
(c) 4.186 J
(d) 3.6 × 10-6 J
Answer:
(d) 3.6 × 10-6 J

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 18.
A particle moves in a straight line with retardation proportional to displacement. Its loss of K.E in any displacement x is proportional to _______.
a) x²
b) ex
c) x
d) logex
Answer:
a) x²

Question 19.
Which one of the following is not a conservative force?
a) gravitational force
b) electrostatic force between the charges
c) Magnetic force between two magnetic dipoles
d) Frictional force
Answer:
d) Frictional force

Question 20.
A spring of force constant 800 N/M has an extension of 5 cm. The work done in extending it from 5 cm to 15 cm is _______.
a) 163
b) 8J
c) 32J
d) 24J
Answer:
b) 8J

Question 21.
The kinetic energy of the body is always
(a) zero
(b) infinity
(c) negative
(d) positive
Answer:
(d) positive

Question 22.
A bullet moving with a speed of 150 m/s strikes a wooden plank. After passing through the plank its speed becomes 125ms-1. Another bullet of the same mass and size strikes the plank with a speed of 90m/s. Its speed after passing through the plank would be _______.
a) 25 m/s
b) 35 m/s
c) 50 m/s
d) 70 m/s
Answer:
a) 25 m/s

Question 23.
A 2kg block slides on a horizontal floor with a speed of 4 m/s. It strikes on uncompressed spring and compresses it fill the block is motionless. The kinetic friction force is 15N and spring constant is 104N/m. The spring compress by _______.
a) 5.5 cm
b) 2.5 cm
c) 11 cm
d) 8.5 cm
Answer:
a) 5.5 cm

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 24.
If two objects of masses m1 and m2 (m1 > m2) are moving with the same momentum then the kinetic energy will be greater for
(a) m1
(b) m2
(c) m1 or m2
(d) both will have equal kinetic energy
Answer:
(b) m2

Question 25.
The power of a pump which can pump 200 kg of water to a height if 200m in 10s is _______. (g = 10ms-2)
a) 40 kW
b) 80 Kw
c) 400 Kw
d) 960 Kw
Answer:
a) 40 Kw

Question 26.
A body of mass m accelerates uniformly from rest to velocity v0 in a time t0. The instantaneous power delivered to the body at any time t is _______.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 36
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 37

Question 27.
particle to mass ‘m’ starting from rest undergoes uniform acceleration. If the speed acquired in time T is V, the power delivered to the particle is _______.
a) \(\frac{M V^{2}}{T}\)
b)\(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)\(\frac{M V^{2}}{T^{2}}\)
c) \(\frac{M V^{2}}{T^{2}}\)
d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)\(\frac{M V^{2}}{T}\)
Answer:
d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)\(\frac{M V^{2}}{T}\)

Question 28.
A particle is placed at the origin and a force F = kx is acting on it (where k is the positive constant). If U (o) = 0, the graph u(x) verses x will be _______. (u=potential energy function)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 38
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 39

Question 29.
The force acting on a body moving along x-axis varies with the position of the particle as in fig _______.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 40
The body in stable equilibrium at
a) x = x1
b) x = x2
c) both x1, and x2
d) neither x1 nor x2
Answer:
b) x = x2

Question 30.
Non-conservative force is
(a) frictional force
(b) viscous force
(c) air resistance
(d) all the above
Answer:
(d) all the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 31.
If the K.E of the body is increased by 300% then for the percentage change in momentum will be _______.
a) 100%
b) 150%
c) 265%
d) 73.2%
Answer:
a) 100%

Question 32.
A particle is projected making an angle 45’ with horizontal having kinetic energy k. The K.E at the highest point will be _______.
a) K/\(\sqrt{2}\)
b) K/2
c) 2K
d) K
Answer:
b) K/2

Question 33.
The coefficient of restitution e for a perfectly elastic collision is _______.
a) 1
b) 0
c) ∞
d) -1
Answer:
a) 1

Question 34.
A ball moving with a certain velocity hits another identical ball at rest. If the plane is frictionless and collision is elastic, the angle between the directions in which the balls move after collision will be _______.
a) 30°
b) 60°
c) 90°
d) 120°
Answer:
c) 90°

Question 35.
Which of the following is zero at the highest point in vertical circular motion?
(a) velocity of the particle
(b) tension of the spring
(c) potential energy
(d) none
Answer:
(a) velocity of the particle

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

II. Additional Questions:

Question 1.
The sign of work done by a force on a body is important to understand. State carefully if the following quantities are positive or negative.
(a) Work done by man lifting a bucket out of the well by means of a rope tied to the bucket
Solution:
Work done is positive, because the bucket moves in the direction of force applied by the man.

(b) work done by gravitational of force in the above case.
Solution:
work done by gravitational force in negative because the bucket is moving upwards against gravitational force.

(c) Work done by friction on a body sliding down an inclined plane.
Solution:
Work done is negative, as frictional force is opposite to direction of motion.

(d) work done by the applied force on a body moving on a rough horizontal plane with uniform velocity.
Solution:
Work done is positive because the applied force acts in the direction of motion of the body

(e) Work done by the resistive force of air on a vibrating pendulum in bringing it to rest.
Solution:
Work done is negative, because the resistive force of air acts in a direction opposite to the direction of motion of the vibration pendulum.

Question 2.
Comets move around the sun in highly elliptical orbits. The gravitational force an the comet due to sun is not normal to the comet velocity in general. Yet the W.D by the gravitational force over every complete orbit of the comet is zero why?
Solution:
The gravitational force acting on the comet is a conservative force. The work done by the conservative force over any path is equal to the negative of change in potention energy. Over a complete orbit of any shape, there is no change in P.E of the comet. Hence no work is done by the gravitational force on the comet.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 3.
A body is moving unidirectionally under the influence of a source of constant power. How displacement (S) and time (t) are related?
Answer:
By work energy theorem
W = Pxt = 1/2 mv²
v² = \(\frac { 2pt }{ m }\)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 41

Question 4.
A molecule in a gas container hits a horizontal wall with speed 200 ms-1 and angle 30° with normal and rebounds with same speed. Is momentum conserved in collision? Is the conserved is elastic or in elastic.
Solution:
Momentum is always conserved, whether collision is elastic or in elastic
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 42
Let m be the mars of the molecule and M be the mass of the wall. As the wall is heavy the molecule rebounding with same velocity does not produce any velocity to wall.
K.E. before collision = Ki = 1/2 m(200)² + 0
= 2 x 104 x 1/2m – 3
K.E. after collision = Kf = 1/2 m(200)² + 0
= 1/2 x m x 2 x w4
∵ Ki = Kf
Collision is elastic in nature

Question 5.
An elastic spring of force constant K is compressed by a amount x. Show that its potential energy is 1/2 kx².
Answer:
Consider the plot of spring force Fs versus displacement x of the block attached to free end of a spring.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 43
According to Hookes law Fs = – k xm
The work done by the spring force for an extension xm is
Ws = Area ∆OBA = 1/2 AB x OB
= 1/2 Fs Xm
= 1/2 (-kxm) xm²
Ws = – 1/2 kxm²
In order stretch the spring slowly an external force F equal to and opposite to Fs has to be applied. So work done by the external force F is
W = – Ws = + 1/2 kxm²
This work done is stored as P.E of the spring
u = 1/2 kx²

Question 6.
Obtain the relation between momentum and K.E
Answer:
Consider an object of mass on moving with velocity v. Then its linear momentum is \(\overline{p}\) = \(\overline{mv}\) and its kinetic energy
k.E = 1/2 mv²
multiply and divide by m both numerator and denominator
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 44

Question 7.
Explain motion of a body in vertical circle.
Answer:
Consider a body of mass m attached to one end of marsless and inextensible string executes circular motion is a vertical plane with other end fixed at 0. The length of the string equal to radius.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 45
There are two forces acting an mass m.
i) Gravitational force (mg) which acts downwards
ii) Tension along the string (T)
Applying Newtons II law
mg sin θ = m at
mg sin θ = – m\(\frac { dv }{ dt }\) → (1)
Where at = tangential acceleration
In the radial direction
T – mg cos θ = m ar
T – mg cos θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
Where ar = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = centripetal or radial acceleration from the above 2 equations four important facts to get understood are.

1) The mass is having tangential acceleration (g sin θ) for all values of 0 (expect θ =0°). It is clear that vertical circular motion is not a uniform circular motion

2) From (1) & (2) as the magnitude of velocity is not constant in the course of motion, the Tension in the string is also not constant.

3) From equ(2) T = mg cos θ + \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\), indicates that in section A and D (for – π/2 < θ < π/2) cosθ is five, ie the term mg cos θ is always > 0.
Hence Tension can not vanish even when the velocity vanishes.

4) The equation (2) \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = T – mg cos θ further indicates that in section B and C
(for π/2< θ < 3π/2) cosθ is negative.
(-mg con θ) is always greater than zero. Hence velocity cannot vanish even tension vanishes.
Consider two positions, lowest position (1) and the highest position 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 46
Let v1 be the velocity at the lowest point 1.
Let v2 be the velocity at the lowest point 2.
The direction of velocity is always tangential to the circular path at all points.
Let T1 and T2 be the Tensions at lowest end highest point respectively. Tension at each point act towards the centre. Tension and Similarly velocity can be determined by applying the law of conservation of energy.
For the lowest point (1)
when the body is at its lowest point (1) the gravitational force mg which acts vertically downwards and Tension (T1) vertically upwards.
 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 47
For the highest point:
At the highest point (2) both gravitational force mg and tension T2 act vertically downwards.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 48
Here the term can (v1² – v2²) be found by applying law of conservation of energy at point 1 and 2.
Total energy at 1 = Total energy at 2
E1 = E2
P.E at 1, u1 = 0
K.E at 1, KE1 = 1/2 mv1²
T.E at 1 = 1/2 0 + mv1² = 1/2 mv1² → (8)
Similarly
P.E at 2, u2 = mg(2r)
K.E at 2, K.E2 = 1/2 mv²
T.E at 2 = mg(2r) + 1/2 mv22 → (9)
equating (8) and (9)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 49
(v1² – v2²) = 4gr → (10)
Substituting (10) in (7)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 50
Minimum speed at the highest point (2)
In order to loop the circle, the body must have a minimum speed at point 2 – To find minimum speed at 2 consider 2.
Consider T2 = 0 in equation … (6)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 51
At highest point 2 the body should have a minimum velocity v2 = \(\sqrt{gr}\) to stay in circular path.
Minimum speed at the lowest point:
From equation 10
v1² – v2² = 4gr
v1² – gr = 4gr
v1² = \(\sqrt{5gr}\)
The body must have a speed of \(\sqrt{5gr}\) at the lowest point 1.
ie v1 ≥ \(\sqrt{5gr}\) so that the mars can stay in circular path.
Comparing values of v1 & v2 it is clear that minimum speed at the lowest point should be \(\sqrt{5}\) times more than the minimum speed at the highest point, so that the body loops in a vertical circle.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power

Question 8.
What is perfect in elastic collision?
Answer:
Obtain an expression for velocity after collision. A perfect or complete in elastic collision is the are in which the object stick permanently after collision such that they move with a common velocity.

Expression for common velocity:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 52
Let two bodies of masses m1 and m2 move with initial velocities u1 and u2 respectively before collision. After perfect inelastic collision both two objects move together with a common velocity v.

Since linear momentum is conserved during collisions.
m1u1 + m2u2 = (m1 + m2)v
V = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{u}_{1}+\mathrm{m}_{2} \mathrm{u}_{2}}{\left(\mathrm{~m}_{1}+\mathrm{m}_{2}\right)}\)
This gives the expression for common velocity.

Question 9.
Obtain an expression for loss of K.E. in perfect elastic collision.
Answer:
Let KEi be the initial total kinetic energy before collision and KEf be the total final kinetic energy after collision.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 53
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 4 Work, Energy and Power 54

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Pdf Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Solutions Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

11th Accountancy Guide Subsidiary Books – II Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

I. Multiple Choice Questions

Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
Cash book is a ________.
a) Subsidiary book
b) Principal book
c) Journal proper
d) Both subsidiary book and principal book
Answer:
d) Both subsidiary book and principal book

Question 2.
The cash book records ________.
a) All cash receipts
b) All cash payments
c) Both (a) and (b)
d) All credit transactions
Answer:
c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 4.
A cash book with discount, cash and bank column is called ________.
a) Simple cash book
b) Double column cash book
c) Three column cash book
d) Petty cash book
Answer:
c) Three column cash book

Question 5.
In Triple column cash book, the balance of bank overdraft brought forward will appear in ________.
a) Cash column debit side
b) Cash column credit side
c) Bank column debit side
d) Bank column credit side
Answer:
d) Bank column credit side

Question 6.
Which of the following is recorded as contra entry?
a) Withdrew cash from bank for personal use
b) Withdrew cash from bank for office use
c) Direct payment by the customer in the bank account of the business
d) When bank charges interest
Answer:
b) Withdrew cash from bank for office use

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 7.
If the debit and credit aspects of a transaction are recorded in the cash book, it is ________.
a) Contra entry
b) Compound entry
c) Single entry
d) Simple entry
Answer:
a) Contra entry

Question 8.
The balance in the petty cash book is ________.
a) An expense
b) A profit
c) An asset
d) A liability
Answer:
c) An asset

Question 9.
Petty cash may be used to pay ________.
a) The expenses relating to postage and conveyance
b) Salary to the Manager
c) Purchase of furniture and fixtures
d) Purchase of raw materials
Answer:
a) The expenses relating to postage and conveyance

Question 10.
Small payments are recorded in a book called ________.
a) Cash Book
b) Purchase Book
c) Bills Payable Book
d) Petty Cash Book
Answer:
d) Petty Cash Book

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

II. Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is a cash book?
Answer:
Cashbook is the book in which only cash transactions are recorded in chronological order. The cash book is the book of original entry or prime entry as cash transactions are recorded for the first time in it. Cash transactions here may include bank transactions also. Cash receipts are recorded on the debit side while cash payments are recorded on the credit side.

Question 2.
What are the different types of cash books?
Answer:
The main cash book may be of various types and the following are the three most common types.

  1. Simple or single column cash book (only cash column)
  2. Cashbook with cash and discount column (double column cash book)
  3. Cashbook with cash, discount, and bank columns (three-column cash book).
  4. Apart from the main cash book, the petty cash book may also be prepared to enter the petty expenses, i.e., expenses involving a small amount.

Question 3.
What is a simple cash book?
Answer:
Single column cash book or simple cash book, like a ledger account, has only one amount column, i.e., cash column on each side. Only cash transactions are recorded in this book. All cash receipts and payments are recorded systematically in this book.

Question 4.
Give the format of ‘Single column cash book’.
Answer:
Simple Cash Book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 1

Question 5.
What is a double column cash book?
Answer:
It is a cash book with cash and discount columns. As there are two columns, i.e., discount and cash columns, both on debit and credit sides, this cash book is known as ‘double column cash book’.

Question 6.
Give the format of ‘Double column cash book’.
Answer:
Double Column Cash Book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 2

Question 7.
What is three column cash book?
Answer:
A three-column cash book includes three amount columns on both sides, i.e., cash, bank, and discount. This cash book is prepared in the same way as simple and double column cash books are prepared. The transactions which increase the cash and bank balance are recorded on the debit side of the cash and bank columns respectively. Opening balance of cash and favourable bank balance appear as the first item on the debit side of the three-column cash book in case of existing business. If the business is a new one, capital contributed in cash and/or bank deposit appear as the first item on the debit side.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 8.
What is a cash discount?
Answer:

  1. A cash discount is allowed to the parties making a prompt payment within the stipulated period of time or early payment.
  2. It is discount allowed (loss) for the creditor and discount received (gain) for the debtor who makes payment.
  3. The discount is allowed when payment is received or made and hence, the entry for discount is also passed with the entry of payment.
  4. Cash discount motivates the debtor to make the payment at an earlier date to avail discount facility.

Question 9.
What is a trade discount?
Answer:
Trade discount is a deduction given by the supplier to the buyer on the list price or catalogue price of the goods. It is given as a trade practice or when goods are purchased in large quantities. It is shown as a deduction in the invoice. Trade discount is not recorded in the books of accounts. Only the net amount is recorded.

Question 10.
What is a petty cash book?
Answer:

  1. Business entities have to pay various small expenses like taxi fare, bus fare, postage, carriage, stationery, refreshment and other sundry items.
  2. These are small payments and repetitive in nature.
  3. If all these small payments are recorded in the main cash book, it will be loaded with a lot of entries.
  4. Hence, all petty payments of the business may be recorded in a separate book, which is called a petty cash book, and the person who maintains the petty cash book is called the petty cashier.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

III. Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain the meaning of the imprest system of petty cash books.
Answer:
Under this system, a fixed amount necessary or sufficient to meet petty payments determined on the basis of past experience is paid to the petty cashier on the first day of the period. (It may be a week or fortnight or month). The amount given to the petty cashier in advance is known as “Imprest Money”.

The word imprest means payment in advance. The petty cashier makes payments from this amount and records them in the petty cash book. At the end of a particular period, the petty cashier submits the petty cash book to the head cashier.

The head cashier scrutinizes the petty payments and gives an amount equal to the amount spent by the petty cashier so that the total amount with the petty cashier is now equal to the amount he had received in the beginning as advance. Under the system, the total cash with the petty cashier never exceeds the imprest at any time during the period.

Question 2.
Bring out the differences between cash discounts and trade discounts.
Answer:
Following are the difference between cash discount and trade discount:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 3

Question 3.
Write the advantages of maintaining a petty cash book.
Answer:
Following are the advantages of maintaining a petty cash book:

  1. There can be better control over petty payments.
  2. There is a saving of time for the main cashier.
  3. Cashbook is not loaded with many petty payments.
  4. Posting entries from the main cash book and petty cash book is comparatively easy.

Question 4.
Write a brief note on the accounting treatment of discounts in the cash book.
Answer:

  1. Discount column represents discount allowed on the debit side and discount received on the credit side.
  2. In the discount columns, cash discount, i.e., cash discount allowed and cash discount received is recorded.
  3. The net amount received is entered in the Amount column on the debit side and the net amount paid is entered in the amount column on the credit side.
  4. For the seller who allows cash discount, it is a loss and hence it is debited and shown on the debit side of the cash book.
  5. For the person making payment, discount received is a gain because less payment is made and it is credited and shown on the credit side of the cash book.
  6. The cash columns are balanced. Discount columns are not balanced, since debit represents discount allowed and credit represents discount received. They are totalled, separately.

The periodical totals of discount columns are posted as under:

  1. Debit Discount allowed account as ‘To Sundry Accounts as per Cash book’, with the periodical total of the discount allowed column.
  2. Credit Discount received account as ‘By Sundry Accounts as per Cash Book’ with the periodical total of the discount received column.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 5.
Briefly explain contra entry with examples.
Answer:
To denote that there are contra entries, the alphabet ‘C’ is written in the L.F. column on both sides. Contra means that a particular entry is posted on the other side (contra) of the same book because the Cash account and Bank account are there in the cash book only and there are no separate ledger accounts needed for this purpose. The alphabet ‘C’ indicates that no further posting is required and the relevant account is posted on the opposite side.

IV. Exercises

Question 1.
Enter the following transactions in a single column cash book of Seshadri for May, 2017.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 4
Solution:
In the book of Seshadri
Cashbook (single column)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 5

Question 2.
Enter the following transactions in a single column cash book of Pandeeswari for the month of June 2017
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 6
Solution:
In the book of Pandeeswari
Cashbook (single column)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 7

Question 3.
Enter the following transactions in a single column cash book of Ramalingam for the month of July 2017.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 8
Solution:
Single column cash book of Mr. Ramalingam
 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 9

Question 4.
Enter the following transaction in Chandran’s cash book with cash and discount columns.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 9a
Solution:
In the book of Mr. Chandran
Cashbook (with cash and discount columns)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 10

Question 5.
Enter the following transaction in Chandran’s cash book with the cash and discount column.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 11
Solution:
In the book of Mr. Chandran
Cashbook (with cash and discount columns)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 12

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 6.
Enter the following transactions in the cash book with the discount and cash column of Anand.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 13
Solution:
In the book of Anand
Cashbook (with cash and Discount columns)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 14

Question 7.
Write out a cash book with discount, cash, and bank columns in the books of Mahendran. 2017 Oct?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 15
Solution:
IIn the books of Mr. Mahendran
Three columns cash book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 16

Question 8.
Enter the following transactions in the three-column cash book of Kalyana Sundaram.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 17
Solution:
IIn the books of Mr. Mahendran
Three columns cash book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 18

Question 9.
Enter the following transactions of Fathima in the cash book with a sh, bank, and discount columns for the month of May 2017.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 19
Solution:
In the books of Fathima
Dr. Three columns cash book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 20

Question 10.
Enter the following transactions in the three-column cash book of Chozhan.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 21
Solution:
In the books of Sri Chozhan
Three Columns Cash Book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 22

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 11.
Enter the following transactions, in a cash book with cash, bank, and discount columns of Sundari.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 23
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 24

Question 12.
Record the following transaction in the three-column cash book of Rajeswari for the month of June 2017.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 25
Solution:
In the book of Miss. Rajeswari
Three columns cash book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 26

Question 13.
Record the following transactions in three column cash book of Ramachandran.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 27
Solution:
In the book of Mr. Ramachandran
Three columns cash book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 28

Question 14.
Record the. following transactions in the three-column cash book of John Pandian.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 29
Solution:
In the book of Mr. John Pandian
Three columns cash book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 30

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 15.
Prepare a triple column cash book of Rahim from the following transactions:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 31
Solution:
In the book of Mr. Rahim
Three Columns cash book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 32

Question 16.
Prepare analytical petty cash book from the following particulars under imprest system:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 32a
Solution:
Analytical petty cash book – Analysis of payments (in ₹)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 33

Question 17.
From the following information prepare an analytical petty cash book under imprest system:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 34
Solution:
Analytical petty cash book – Analysis of payments
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 35

Question 18.
Record the following transactions in an analytical petty cash hook and balance the same. On 1st November 2017, the petty cashier started with imprest cash of ₹ 2,000.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 36
Solution:
Analytical petty cash book – Analysis of payments
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 37

Question 19.
Enter the following transactions in Iyyappan’s petty cash hook with analytical columns under the imprest system.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 38
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 39

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

11th Accountancy Guide Subsidiary Books – II Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
Cash receipts are recorded on the ……………. of the cash book.
(a) debit side
(b) credit side
(c) journal
(d) ledger
Answer:
(a) debit side

Question 2.
The imprest system pertains to ________.
a) Purchases book
b) Sales book
c) Cashbook
d) Petty cash book
Answer:
d) Petty cash book

Question 3.
All cash transactions are straightway recorded in the …………….
(a) cash book
(b) ledger
(c) journal
(d) contra
Answer:
(a) cash book

Question 4.
In three column cash book, when does contra entry occur?
a) Withdrawal of cash from the bank
b) Payment to creditors
c) Withdrawal of cash from the bank for personal use
d) All of the above
Answer:
a) Withdrawal of cash from the bank

Question 5.
There are ……………. types of cash book (common).
(a) three
(b) four
(c) five
(d) two
Answer:
(a) three

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 6.
A book where small items of expenditure like postage, carriage, coolies, stationery etc., are entered is called ________.
a) Purchases book
b) Sales book
c) Cashbook
d) Petty cash book
Answer:
d) Petty cash book

Question 7.
L.F. expands for ……………..
(a) Long file
(b) Ledger folio
(c) Line folio
(d) Link file
Answer:
(b) Ledger folio

Question 8.
Cash discount is recorded in the ________.
a) Purchases book
b) Sales book
c) Cashbook
d) Journal proper
Answer:
c) Cashbook

Question 9.
As both the debit and credit aspects of a transaction are recorded in the cash book, such entries are called ……………. entries.
(a) Contra
(b) Journal
(c) Compound
(d) Opening
Answer:
(a) Contra

Question 10.
Which of the following books should be used to record the purchase of furniture on credit?
a) Purchases book
b) Goods account
c) Cashbook
d) Journal proper
Answer:
d) Journal proper

Question 11.
The credit balance in the Bank account is ________.
a) An asset
b) A liability
c) An expense
d) None of the above
Answer:
b) A liability

Question 12.
Double entry means ________.
a) Entry in two sets of books
b) Entry in two pages
c) Entry for two aspects of a transaction
d) None
Answer:
c) Entry for two aspects of a transaction

Question 13.
Which of the following is not true?
a) Double Column cash book contains cash and bank columns
b) Discount columns are not balanced
c) The dosing balance of bank columns is called cash at bank
d) None of the above
Answer:
a) Double Column cash book contains cash and bank columns

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 14.
Dishonour of a discounted bill, not recorded in the cash book will be added in the BRS if the balance given is ________.
a) Unfavourable balance as per cash book
b) Favourable balance as per Passbook
c) Both (a) & (b)
d) None of the above
Answer:
c) Both (a) & (b)

Question 15.
The total of the purchases day book is posted periodically to the debit of ________.
a) Purchases account
b) Journal proper
c) Cashbook
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Purchases account

Question 16.
Goods given as charity should be credited to ________.
a) Purchases account
b) Journal proper
c) Cashbook
d) Charity Account
Answer:
a) Purchases account

Question 17.
“Bills payable discounted in cash by creditor”. This transaction will be recorded in ________.
a) Journal
b) Ledger
c) Bankbook
d) No entry required to be made
Answer:
d) No entry required to be made

Question 18.
Contra entries are passed only when ________.
a) Double column cash book is prepared
b) Three-column cash books are prepared
c) Simple Cashbook is prepared
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Three-column cash books is prepared

Question 19.
Which of the following is a type of cash receipt journal + cash payment journal?
a) Bank Statement
b) Cash flow statement
c) Cashbook
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Cashbook

Question 20.
The credit balance of the bank column in the cash book shows:
a) Overdraft
b) Cash deposited in the bank
c) Cash is withdrawn from the bank
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Overdraft

Question 21.
A cash book with discount and cash column is called ________.
a) Simple cash book
b) Double column cash book
c) Three column cash book
d) Petty cash book
Answer:
b) Double column cash book

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 22.
When goods are purchased for cash, the entry will be recorded in the ________.
a) Cashbook
b) purchases book
c) Sales book
d) journal
Answer:
a) Cashbook

Question 23.
The balance of cash book indicates ________.
a) Net income
b) cash in hand
c) Debtors
d) creditors
Answer:
b) cash in hand

Question 24.
In triple column cash book, cash was withdrawn from bank for office use Will appear in ________.
a) Debit side of the cash book only
b) both sides of the cash book,
c) Credit side of the cash book only.
d) Journal proper
Answer:
b) both sides of the cash book,

Question 25.
If a cheque sent for collection is dishonoured, the debit is given to ________.
a) suppliers A/c
b) bank A/c
c) customers A/c
d) A and B
Answer:
c) customers A/c

Question 26.
If a cheque issued by us is dishonoured the credit is given to ________.
a) supplier’s A/c
b) customer’s A/c
c) bank A/c
d) A and B
Answer:
a) supplier’s A/c

Question 27.
Cashbook always shows.
a) debit balance
b) credit balance
c) nill balance
d) credit balance and debit balance
Answer:
a) debit balance

Question 28.
Bank book always shows ________.
a) debit balance
b) credit balance
c) nil balance
d) credit balance and debit balance
Answer:
d) credit balance and debit balance

Question 29.
On Jan 1st, 2017, Rs.1,000 given to the petty cashier. He has spent Rs.960during the month of January. On Feb 1st to make the imprest he will receive a cheque for Rs. ________.
a) Rs. 1,000
b) Rs. 960
c) Rs. 1,960
d) Rs. 40
Answer:
b) Rs. 960

Question 30.
The dosing balance of petty cash book is considered as ________.
a) Liability
b) Asset
c) Expenses
d) Income
Answer:
b) Asset

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 31.
Payment of rent expenses is recorded on which side of the cash book?
a) Receipts
b) Payments
c) Income
d) Expense
Answer:
b) Payments

Question 32.
The most common imprest system is the ________ systems.
a) pretty cash
b) cash book
c) cash receipt
d) discount
Answer:
a) pretty cash

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

II. Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Enter the following transactions in the simple column cash book.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 40
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 40a

III. Additional Questions & Answers

Question 1.
What is the importance of a cash book?
Answer:
Serves as both journal and ledger – When cash book is maintained, it is not necessary to open a separate cash account in the ledger. Thus, a cash book serves the purpose of a journal and a ledger.

Saves time and labor – When cash transactions are recorded through journal entries, a lot of time and labour will be involved. To avoid this, all-cash transactions are straightaway recorded in the cash book, which saves time and labour.

Shows the cash and bank balance – It helps to know the cash and bank balance at any point of time by comparing the total cash receipts and cash payments.

Benefit of division of labour – As a cash book is a separate subsidiary book, an independent person can maintain it. Hence, businesses can get the benefit of division of labour.

Effective cash management – Cashbook provides all information regarding total receipts and payments of the business concern during a particular period. It helps in formulating effective policies for cash management.

Prevents errors and frauds – Balance as per cash book and the balance in the cash box can be compared daily. If there is any deficit or surplus, it can be found easily. It helps in preventing any fraud or error in cash dealings.

Question 2.
What are the various types of petty cash books?
Answer:
There are two types of petty cash books. They are:

  1. Simple petty cash book
  2. Analytical petty cash book

Simple petty cash book –
A simple petty cash book resembles the single-column cash book. But the columns are different. On the debit side, only the advance received from the head cashier is recorded. On the credit side, all payments are recorded in only one column. This is known as a simple petty cash book.

Analytical petty cash book –
In the analytical petty cash book, a separate column is provided for different heads of payments and one column for total payments. When the petty expenses are recorded in the total payment column, the same amount is also recorded in the appropriate expense column. This is known as an analytical petty cash book.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 3.
What is Simple petty cash hook?
Answer:
A simple petty cash book resembles the single-column cash book. But the columns are different. On the debit side, only the advance received from the head cashier is recorded. On the credit side, all payments are recorded in only one column. This is known as a simple petty cash book.

Question 4.
What is an Analytical petty cash book?
Answer:
In the analytical petty cash book, a separate column is provided for different heads of payments and one column for total payments. When the petty expenses are recorded in the total payment column, the same amount is also recorded in the appropriate expense column. This is known as an analytical petty cash book.

Question 5.
Give any two Examples for a Contra Entry.
Answer:

  1. Cash paid into the bank.
  2. Money is withdrawn from bank for office use.

Additional Sums:

Question 1.
Enter the following in the simple column cash book.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 41
Solution:
Single Column Cash Book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 42

Question 2.
Enter the following transactions in a petty cash book of Mr, Kishore Kumar with analytical columns the petty cashier begins with an imprest amount of Rs.1,000.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 43
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 45

Question 3.
Prepare petty cash book on imprest system from the Following Particulars given below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 46
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 47

Question 4.
Prepare the analytical petty cash book of Mr. Keerthivasan from the Following.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 48
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 49

Question 5.
Thiru Suganthan started the business with the capital of Rs.15,00,000 on 01.01.2018. He paid into Bank Rs.10,00,000. He tarried out the following transactions during the month is given below; prepare the cash of Suganthan.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 50
Solution:
Single Column Cash Book of Mr. Suganthan
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 51

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 6.
Enter the lowing transactions of Royce in Double Column Cash Book.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 52
Solution:
Double Column Cash Book of Royce
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 54

Question 7.
Record the following transactions in the Double CoSusium cash book of Mr. X
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 56
Solution:
Double Column Cash Book of Mr. X
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 57

Question 8.
Enter the following transactions of a trader in a triple column cash book.
2015,
Nov.
1 – Nizam started the business with ₹ 1,00,000
2 – Deposited into a bank of Baroda ₹ 95,000
5 – Purchased a building for ₹ 70,000 and paid by cheque
10 – Purchased merchandise ₹ 20,000 and paid by cheque
25 – Paid freight ₹ 50
29 – Withdrew from the bank for personal use ₹ 500
30 – Cleared electricity bills ₹ 90
Solution:
Cash Book of a Trader
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 58

Question 9.
Enter the following transactions in the three columnar cash book of Mr.Z
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 59
Solution:
Three Column Cash Book of Mr.Z
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 60

Question 10.
Enter the following transactions in Gopi’s Three Column Cash Book:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 61
Solution:
Three Column Cash Book of Mr.Z
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 62

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 11.
Enter the following transactions in the cash book of Mr. K with cash, bank, and discount columns
2018
Feb.
1 – Cash in hand Rs. 1,60,000
3 – Opened bank account with Rs. 70,000
5 – Cash purchases Rs. 1,00,000
6 – Cash Sales Rs. 1,30,000
14 – Withdrew cash for office use Rs. 20,000
20 – Sold goods to Sundar Rs. 90,000
25 – Cash received from Sundar Rs. 88,000 in full settlement
28 – Paid Salaries Rs. 30,000
29 – Withdrew Rs. 10,000 from the bank for domestic purpose
30 – Paid Rent Rs. 10,000
31 – Paid to Prabhu Rs. 37,000 in a full settlement against his claim of Rs. 40,000 during 2017
Solution:
Triple Column Cash Book of Mr. K
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 63

Question 12.
Enter the following transactions in Ganesan’s cash book with columns for cash, bank, and discount:
2017
Nov
1 – Balance in cash on hand Rs. 400 and at Bank Rs. 3,600
3 – Received Rs. 1,600 from Gopalan in cash; Allowed him a discount of Rs. 20
3 – Paid Rs. 1,000 into bank
4 – Cash sales Rs. 1,200
5 – Paid salaries by cheque Rs. 1,600
6 – Repairs of typewriter Rs. 600
8 – Paid Rs. 1,200 to Modern Co., half in cash and half in cheque
Solution:
Triple Column Cash Book of Mr.Ganeshan
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 64

Question 13.
From the following particulars prepare an analytical column of the petty cash book of Mr. Z:
2017
Dec
1 – Received from head cashier Rs. 300
2 – Paid for stationary Rs. 20; Postage and telegram paid Rs. 10; Paid office expenses Rs. 15
4 – Bought paper and ink Rs. 10
5 – Paid for Tiffen to office peon Rs. 8; Bought postage stamps Rs. 15
6 – Paid Selvan on account Rs. 15
7 – Paid for miscellaneous office expenses Rs. 10
8 – Paid Cartage Rs. 10; Paid travelling expenses Rs. 15
Solution:
Analytical Petty Cash Book of Mr. Z
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 65

Question 14.
Lakshman maintains a columnar petty cash book on the imprest system. The imprest amount is Rs.400. From the following information write up the petty cash book for the 1st Week of January 2018.
Jan
2018
1 – Bought stamps Rs. 50 (Voucher No.l)
2 – Paid bus fares Rs. 4 (Voucher No.2)
2 – Paid postages Rs. 10 (Voucher No.3)
2 – Paid envelopes Rs. 30 (Voucher No.4)
2 – Paid for refreshment Rs. 14 (Voucher No.5)
3 – Paid Arun a creditor Rs. 62 (Voucher No.6)
4 – Paid for postage Rs. 20 (Voucher No.7)
5 – Paid Guru a creditor Rs. 105 (Voucher No.8)
6 – Paid train fares Rs. 45 (Voucher No.9)
7 – Restored imprest
Solution:
Analytical Petty Cash Book of Mr. Lakshman
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 66

Question 15.
From the following transactions for the month of June 2017, drew up a Petty Cash Book in the analytical form:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 67
Solution:
Analytical Petty Cash Book
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 68

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 16.
Prepare Mr. Keerthivasan’s single-column cash book.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 69
Solution:
Single column book of Mr. Kishore Kumar
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 70

Question 17.
Record the transactions given below in the double column cash book of cash book (with discount and cash columns) of Mr. Kirubakaran.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 71
Solution:
Double column cash book or Mr. Kirunakaran (Cashbook with discount and cash column)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 72

Question 18.
Enter the following transaction in the cash book with discount and cash columns of Mr. Guru.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 73
Solution:
Double column cash book or Mr. Guru
(Cashbook with discount and cash column)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 74

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II

Question 19.
Enter the following transaction in the three-column cash book of Mr. Kumaran.
2002
May
1 – Cash in hand Rs. 30,000; Cash at bank Rs. 2,000
3 – A received cheque for goods sold to Arun and bank Rs. 1,000
5 – Paid into bank Rs. 4,000
9 – Paid cash to David from whom goods worth Rs.6,000 were purchased for credit on 1st May on term 2% cash discount within two weeks
10 – Paid to Robert by cheque Rs.2,400 in full settlement of his account of Rs.2,500
12 – Received cash from Nathan Rs.4,750 Discount allowed Rs.250
19 – Interest allowed by bank Rs.200
20 – Robert to whom we have used a cheque has reported that our cheque is dishounred
22 – Roshan got exchange for a Five hundred rupee note
31 – Paid into the bank all cash in excess of Rs.5000
Solution:
Trible column cash book or Mr. Guru
(Cashbook with discount and cash column)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 75

Question 20.
Enter the following transactions in the triple column cash hook of Mr.Yogesh
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 76
Solution:
Trible column cash book or Mr. Kumaran
(Cashbook with discount and cash column)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide Chapter 7 Subsidiary Books – II 77